The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

2022 RAM 2500/3500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
2022 RAM 2500/3500
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. FIRST EDITION V1
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
to install them on products previously manufactured. dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
substitution therefore. is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 19 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................101 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 131 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................246 5
6 SAFETY ....................................................................................................................................... 300 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 361 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................384 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................461
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................473
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 477
11
INTRODUCTION REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)............27 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .... 36
How To Use Remote Start................................27 Programming The Memory Feature ................36
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 11
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....28 Linking And Unlinking The Remote
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 11 Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory..................37
To Arm The System ..........................................28
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER To Disarm The System .....................................28 Memory Position Recall ...................................37
LOADING ................................................................. 11 Rearming Of The System .................................29 SEATS ...................................................................... 37
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 13 Security System Manual Override...................29 Manual Front Seat Adjustment .......................38
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 13 DOORS ....................................................................29 Manual Rear Seat Adjustment........................39
Manual Door Locks ..........................................29 Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................30 If Equipped .......................................................39
KEYS ....................................................................... 19 Power Side Steps — If Equipped .....................30 Heated Seats — If Equipped............................41
Key Fob .............................................................19 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................42
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 23 (If Equipped) ....................................................30 Head Restraints ...............................................42
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 23 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................23 If Equipped........................................................32 IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 44
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .... 24 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ..............33 MIRRORS ............................................................... 45
How To Use Remote Start................................25 Child-Protection Door Lock .............................33 Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................45
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................26 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................33 Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped .........46
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Tilt Steering Column ........................................33 Outside Mirrors ................................................47
If Equipped........................................................26 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...........34 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................48
Remote Start Comfort Systems — UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
If Equipped........................................................26 IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................34 Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped ........48
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Introducing Voice Recognition.........................34 Power Convex Mirror Switch — If Equipped....49
Activation — If Equipped ..................................27 Basic Voice Commands ...................................35 Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped .............49
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................27 Get Started .......................................................35 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................50
Additional Information .....................................36 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....50
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............56 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 69
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 50 Directional LED Headlamp System — Storage .............................................................69
Before You Begin Programming If Equipped........................................................56 USB/AUX Control..............................................75
HomeLink®.......................................................50 Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................56 Electrical Power Outlets ..................................76
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............51 Automatic Headlights With Wipers .................56 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................77
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Headlight Delay ................................................57 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............79
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...................51 Lights-On Reminder .........................................57 WINDOWS ............................................................. 80
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................57 Power Windows ...............................................80
Door Opener .....................................................51 Turn Signals......................................................57 Automatic Window Features ...........................80
Programming HomeLink® To A Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................57 Reset Auto-Up ..................................................81
Miscellaneous Device ......................................52 Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/ Window Lockout Switch...................................81
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Trailer Hitch Light With Bed Lights — Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ....81
Button ...............................................................52 If Equipped .......................................................58 Manual Sliding Rear Window —
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........53 Battery Saver ....................................................59 If Equipped .......................................................81
Security .............................................................53 INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................59 Wind Buffeting .................................................81
Troubleshooting Tips........................................53 Courtesy Lights.................................................59 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 82
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 54 Illuminated Entry .............................................60 Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .....82
Headlight Switch...............................................54 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............61 HOOD....................................................................... 83
Multifunction Lever ..........................................55 Windshield Wiper Operation............................61 To Open The Hood ...........................................83
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............62 To Close The Hood ...........................................84
If Equipped........................................................55 CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................62 TAILGATE ................................................................ 84
High/Low Beam Switch....................................55 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Opening.............................................................84
Automatic High Beam Headlamp And Functions...................................................62 Closing ..............................................................84
Control — If Equipped.......................................55 Manual Climate Control Descriptions Tailgate Removal..............................................84
Flash-To-Pass....................................................56 And Functions ..................................................66 Bed Step — If Equipped ...................................86
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............68
Climate Voice Recognition —
If Equipped........................................................68
Operating Tips .................................................68
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 87 BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —

Cargo Camera — If Equipped ...........................88 DIESEL ENGINE .................................................. 105 OBD II ...................................................................129
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions — Onboard Diagnostic System
If Equipped .......................................................89 Diesel Engine................................................. 106 (OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 129
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 91 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Locking And Unlocking RamBox......................91 DIESEL ENGINE.................................................... 108 PROGRAMS .........................................................130
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins............................91 Premium Instrument Cluster
RamBox Safety Warning ..................................93 Descriptions — Diesel Engine ....................... 109 STARTING AND OPERATING
Bed Divider — If Equipped................................94 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY...................... 109 STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 95 Instrument Cluster Display Controls ............ 110 ENGINE .................................................................131
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ....................95 Oil Life Reset ................................................ 111 Automatic Transmission ............................... 131
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ................98 Display Menu Items ...................................... 111 Tip Start Feature .......................................... 131
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................. 100 Diesel Messages And Warnings — 6.7L Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .................. 131
Cummins® Diesel Engine............................. 115 Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode STOP Button ............................................... 131
INSTRUMENT PANEL Message — Electrical Load Reduction AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT Actions — If Equipped.................................... 118 Transmission Only......................................... 132
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................. 119 If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 133
CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE ....................................101
Red Warning Lights....................................... 119 Cold Weather Operation
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 122 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 134
Descriptions — Gas Engine ........................... 102
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 125 After Starting ................................................. 134
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 127
GAS ENGINE .........................................................103
White Indicator Lights ................................... 128
Premium Instrument Cluster
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 129
Descriptions — Gas Engine ........................... 104
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE.......134 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED......168
Automatic Transmission ............................... 135 DIESEL ENGINE.................................................... 145 Description .................................................... 168
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 135 PARKING BRAKE ................................................ 146 Air Suspension Modes .................................. 168
Extreme Cold Weather .................................. 137 DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 169
Normal Starting Procedure — BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) ................................... 147 Operation....................................................... 169
Engine Manifold Air Temperature AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................. 148 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
Above 66° F (19° C)..................................... 137 Ignition Park Interlock................................... 149 MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED) ...........................170
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM —
Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F System .......................................................... 149 POWER WAGON ONLY ......................................171
(–18°C to 19°C) ........................................... 137 8-Speed Automatic Transmission — SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air If Equipped .................................................... 149 ONLY .....................................................................172
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ................. 138 6-Speed Automatic Transmission — Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Starting Fluids ............................................... 139 If Equipped..................................................... 154 Characteristics ............................................ 172
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE .........139 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED............. 159 Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand................... 173
Cold Weather Precautions ............................ 140 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION .......................... 160 Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Engine Idling ................................................. 141 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — Points)............................................................ 174
Noise .............................................................. 142 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 160 Hill Climbing................................................... 175
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 142 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Driving Through Water .................................. 177
Idle Shutdown................................................ 143 (8-Speed Transmission) — Airing Down For Off-Road Driving................. 178
Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed .... 143 If Equipped .................................................... 160 Vehicle Recovery ........................................... 178
Operating Precautions .................................. 143 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case After Driving Off-Road ................................... 180
Cooling System Tips ...................................... 144 (6-Speed Transmission) — LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ............................181
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........144 If Equipped ................................................... 163
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — Manually Shifted Transfer
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................145 Case — If Equipped ....................................... 166
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................. 207 TRAILER TOWING ................................................227
(IF EQUIPPED) .....................................................181 LaneSense Operation ................................... 207 Common Towing Definitions......................... 227
Things To Know Before Using Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 208 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum
Your Winch..................................................... 181 LaneSense Warning Message...................... 208 Trailer Weight ................................................ 231
Understanding The Features Of Your Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 210 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Winch ............................................................. 182 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 210 Trailer Weight Ratings) ................................. 231
Winch Accessories ....................................... 183 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 232
Operating Your Winch .................................. 183 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 212 Towing Requirements .................................. 232
Rigging Techniques ...................................... 189 TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 217 Towing Tips ................................................... 237
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.........................190 Trailer Surround View Camera System — SNOWPLOW ........................................................238
Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Check ......... 190 If Equipped..................................................... 217 Before Plowing .............................................. 238
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — AUX Camera — If Equipped ........................... 220 Snowplow Prep Package Model
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................191 ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE ............. 221 Availability...................................................... 238
Cruise Control ............................................... 191 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................... 193 ENGINE ................................................................ 222 Attached......................................................... 239
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................... 223 Operating Tips ............................................... 239
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .......................................201 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL General Maintenance ................................... 239
ParkSense Sensors ....................................... 202 ENGINE ................................................................ 223 RECREATIONAL TOWING
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 202 Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 223 (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................240
ParkSense Display ........................................ 202 VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 226 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......... 226 Vehicle ........................................................... 240
Rear ParkSense............................................. 205 Payload .......................................................... 226 Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 226 Drive Models ................................................. 241
Park Assist System........................................ 206 Tire Size ......................................................... 226 Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 206 Rim Size ......................................................... 226 Drive Models ................................................. 241
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 206 Inflation Pressure.......................................... 226 DRIVING TIPS .......................................................244
Curb Weight ................................................... 226 Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 244
Loading .......................................................... 227 Driving Through Water .................................. 244
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 245
MULTIMEDIA SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................246 SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 300 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................361
CYBERSECURITY .................................................246 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 300 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....362
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................247 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 301 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................365
Customer Programmable Features.............. 247 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 307 Preparations For Jacking .............................. 365
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................269 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Jack Location................................................. 366
System Overview .......................................... 269 If Equipped .................................................... 307 Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 366
Safety And General Information ................... 272 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Removing The Spare Tire ............................. 368
UCONNECT MODES .............................................273 Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 313 Jacking Instructions ...................................... 369
Steering Wheel Audio Controls..................... 273 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 315 To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 372
Radio Mode .................................................. 273 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 323 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 373
Media Mode .................................................. 281 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 323 Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped....... 374
Phone Mode ................................................. 283 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 323 JUMP STARTING .................................................375
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 324 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 375
PHONES ................................................................293 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 331 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 376
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 294 Child Restraints ............................................ 340 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............................377
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................294 SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 358 6–Speed Transmission ................................ 377
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ........................... 295 Transporting Passengers.............................. 358 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................378
Vehicle Dynamics .......................................... 296 Transporting Pets ......................................... 358 8–Speed Transmission................................. 378
Accessory Gauge ........................................... 297 Safety Checks You Should Make IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................379
Pitch & Roll .................................................... 298 Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 358 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................380
Suspension .................................................... 299 Periodic Safety Checks You Should TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................381
Forward Facing Camera................................ 299 Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 360 Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 382
Exhaust Gas .................................................. 360 Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 382
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................... 360 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......... 383
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................383
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................383
2022 RAM 2500/3500
U.S. CANADA

2022 RAM 2500/3500
OWNER’S MANUAL
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 405 TIRES .....................................................................439
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Tire Safety Information .............................. 439
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
Diesel Engine ................................................ 406 Tires — General Information ....................... 445
GASOLINE ENGINE .............................................384
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Tire Types....................................................... 448
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine ......... 385 Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 407 Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................... 449
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE......388 Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 451
Oil Change Indicator System — Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 407 Snow Traction Devices ................................. 451
Diesel Engine................................................. 389 Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 454
Perform Service Indicator — Of Fuel — Diesel Engine ................................ 408 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Diesel Engine ................................................ 389 Intervention Regeneration Strategy — UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................455
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine.............. 390 Message Process Flow ................................ 409 Treadwear...................................................... 455
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................395 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ........................... 410 Traction Grades............................................. 455
6.4L Gasoline Engine ................................... 395 Body Lubrication ......................................... 410 Temperature Grades..................................... 456
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed Windshield Wiper Blades ............................ 410 STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................456
68RFE ........................................................... 396 Exhaust System ............................................ 412 BODYWORK..........................................................456
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed Cooling System ............................................. 413 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 456
AS69RC HD.................................................... 397 Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ................. 416 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 457
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 398 Brake System ............................................... 417 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 457
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 398 Automatic Transmission ............................... 417 INTERIORS ...........................................................459
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 399 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Pressure Washing ......................................... 399 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 459
Fluid Level .................................................. 419 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 459
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................399 Transfer Case ............................................... 420 Leather Surfaces........................................... 460
Engine Oil ...................................................... 400 Noise Control System Required Glass Surfaces ............................................. 460
Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 400 Maintenance & Warranty ............................. 420
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 401 FUSES ............................................................ 423
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................... 402 BULB REPLACEMENT ................................... 432
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........ 465 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................475
Fuel Specifications ....................................... 465 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................475
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........461
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 465 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................475
BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................461
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 467 In The 50 United States And
Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped .......... 461
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 468 Washington, D.C............................................ 475
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 471 In Canada ...................................................... 475
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................461
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................476
Torque Specifications .................................. 461
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE GENERAL INFORMATION....................................476
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................463 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
6.4L Engine.................................................... 463 FOR YOUR VEHICLE ........................................... 473
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 463 Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 473
Materials Added To Fuel ............................... 463 Prepare A List ................................................ 473
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 463 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 473
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 473
Fuel Vehicles.................................................. 464 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 473
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 464 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 473
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Mexico............................................................ 474
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 464 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 474
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 464 Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 474
Service Contract ........................................... 474
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 244.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
11
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body 1
injury and/or death. builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage. CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
TIP: This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
use of the product or functionality.
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
PAGE REFERENCE Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
ARROW accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
Follow this reference for additional information on
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
a particular feature.
truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
FOOTNOTE that contains your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo
Supplementary and relevant information weight rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain
pertaining to the topic. additional dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle,
please visit https:/ /www.ramtrucks.com.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
12
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located,
to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
13
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the
truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to 1
passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s each symbol Ú page 119.
recommended CG zone when installed. NOTE:
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of Red Warning Lights
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight Air Bag Warning Light
below the ratings. Ú page 119
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the Battery Charge Warning Light
driver’s side B-pillar. See Ú page 226 for more information. Ú page 120
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer. Brake Warning Light
Ú page 120
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING! Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 120
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 121
14
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 121 Ú page 122
Hood Open Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Oil Pressure Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Oil Temperature Warning Light Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 123
Ú page 121
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light LaneSense Warning Light

15
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Sway Bar Fault Warning Light 1
Low Fuel Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Ú page 123 Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light Ú page 126
Ú page 123
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light

Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light Ú page 125
Ú page 124
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light Ú page 126
Ú page 124
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light

Service LaneSense Warning Light Ú page 126
Ú page 124
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light

Service 4WD Warning Light Ú page 126
Ú page 124
16
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Cargo Light 4WD Low Indicator Light

Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light 4WD High Indicator Light
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
4WD Lock Indicator Light Snowplow Mode Indicator Light

17
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Sway Bar Indicator Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light 1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Indicator Light
Ú page 127
Ú page 127
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Wait To Start Light Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

Water In Fuel Indicator Light ECO Mode Indicator Light

18
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

LaneSense Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light

Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light

Ú page 129
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
KEY F OB the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, 2
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which result in poor performance.
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), air  If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
suspension remote lowering (if equipped), and Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the Ú page 79.
RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the Panic  With the ignition in the ON position and the
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at commands are disabled.
the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in the Key Fob
rear of the key fob.
1 — LED Indicator Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped)
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering
(If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Remote Start
7 — PANIC
8 — Emergency Key
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change with Key Left Vehicle Feature The following conditions must be met for the
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or vehicle to lower remotely:
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be  The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
verified by referring to the instrument cluster, ride height.
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
which will display directions to follow.
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster  The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
NOTE: display along with an interior chime. An exterior
 All doors must be closed.
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by audible and visual alert will also be activated to
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by warn the driver.  The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times  Gear selector must be in PARK.
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
then the key fob battery requires replacement
NOTE:
lights. Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
Ú page 476.
NOTE: people prior to remote lowering.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate Canceling Remote Lowering
 The doors have to be open and then closed in
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob order for the vehicle to check for the presence of Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime.
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and activate until all of the doors are closed. raise to the next defined level and lock out the
the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and
 These alerts will not be activated in situations remote lowering feature for five seconds until a
the tailgate, push the lock button once.
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with new request is made.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will the key fob inside. To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The suspension lowering button one time during the
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
lowering process. When vehicle lowering is
signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Vehicle) — If Equipped
cancelled, the horn will chirp two times and the
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first For easy entry and loading, your vehicle turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once raising
push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the can be lowered by pushing the key fob air is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off suspension lowering button two times.
When air suspension lowering is
NOTE:
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.
requested using the key fob, the vehicle will send a More information on air suspension is provided
series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer later in this manual, see Ú page 168.
that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob 4. Remove the battery by using a suitable tool,
such as a screwdriver, to slide the battery
The replacement battery model is one CR2032
downward and back toward the key ring.
battery.
NOTE:
 Customers are recommended to use a battery 2
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
 Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- Emergency Key Removal
ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
1 — Emergency Key
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on 2 — Emergency Key Release Button
the back housing or the printed circuit board. Key Fob Battery Location
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing NOTE:
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
the left side between the housing and the back the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
cover of the key fob. Use a small screwdriver new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
usage.
(or similar tool) to pry open the left side of the battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing fob cover while applying pressure until the it with rubbing alcohol.
the emergency key release button (2) on the cover snaps open.
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
key out with your other hand.
fob, which is positioned further to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to  Only key fobs that are programmed to the
push down and slide the battery under the WARNING! vehicle electronics can be used to start and
small lip on the top edge of the opening.  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is programmed to any other vehicle.
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death. WARNING!
 If you think a battery may have been swal-  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
seek immediate medical attention. unattended.
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil-  Always remember to place the Keyless
dren. If the battery compartment does not Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
close securely, stop using the product and
Key Fob Battery Replacement keep it away from children. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
Programming And Requesting Additional programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
and press the edges into the interlocking Key Fobs
been programmed.
hinges until all edges snap together with no Programming the key fob may be performed by an
large visual gaps. authorized dealer.
NOTE:
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
NOTE: serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
place.
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it authorized dealer.
NOTE: cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
The key fob battery should only be replaced by another vehicle.
match the vehicle locks.
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
engine. The system does not need to be armed or serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of dealer. 2
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button CAUTION!
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, compatible with some aftermarket remote
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle starting systems. Use of these systems may Keyless Push Button Ignition
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from 1 — OFF
security protection.
another vehicle. 2 — ACC (Accessory)
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, 3 — ON/RUN
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on Ú page 476. The push button ignition can be placed in the
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a following modes:
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
that someone attempted to start the engine with  The engine is stopped
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
is used to start the engine but there is an issue This feature allows the driver to operate the alarm, etc.) are still available
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
ACC
and shut off after two seconds. the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
 Engine is not started
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will  Some electrical devices are available
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, (e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
RUN NOTE:
WARNING!
 Driving position  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
 All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
controls, heated seats, etc.)
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with device; these devices may block the key fob’s
START wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
access to an unlocked vehicle.
 The engine will start (when foot is on the brake) Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
NOTE: is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
 For more information on engine starting proce-
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by dures, see Ú page 131.
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or Children should be warned not to touch the  When opening the driver's door and the ignition
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up parking brake, brake pedal or the gear is in the ON/RUN (engine not running) position,
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. selector. a chime will sound to remind you to place the
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
ignition button and push to operate the ignition or in a location accessible to children, and do will display in the instrument cluster display.
switch. not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle. (GASOLINE)
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked This system uses the key fob to start the
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup engine conveniently from outside the
may cause serious injury or death. vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Back Up Starting Method Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts All of the following conditions must be met before
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all the engine off. the engine will remote start:
ambient conditions before the driver enters the To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and  Gear selector in PARK
vehicle. place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Doors closed
NOTE: NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob  Hood closed 2
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
may reduce this range Ú page 476.  Hazard switch off
15 minutes.
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
WARNING!  Remote Start can only be used twice.
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down  PANIC button not pushed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and in 10 seconds.  Fuel meets minimum requirement
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and  The parking lights will turn on and remain on  System not disabled from previous Remote
can cause serious injury or death when during Remote Start mode. Start event
inhaled.
 For security, power window and power sunroof  Vehicle Security system not active
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation operation (if equipped) are disabled when the  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
of the Remote Start system, windows, door vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. illuminated
locks or other controls could cause serious  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
injury or death. position before the Remote Start sequence can WARNING!
be repeated for a third cycle.
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Start will automatically lock the doors. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
can cause serious injury or death when
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
inhaled.
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition When Remote Start is active, and the outside optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
end of the 15 minute cycle. system will automatically activate front defrost for placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the controls will resume their previous settings.
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the system will automatically adjust the settings
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next below, the climate settings will default to
resume the previously set operations section for detailed operation. maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
(temperature, blower control, etc.). cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
REMOTE START C OMFORT vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
NOTE:
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
SYSTEMS — IF E QUIPPED  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
on the last settings selected by the driver.
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
Button” will display in the instrument cluster The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
display until you push the START/STOP ignition feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort above, the climate settings will default to
button. menu screen within Uconnect Settings MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system Ú page 247. In warm weather, the driver vented For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
will disable for two seconds after receiving a seat feature will automatically turn on when control settings, see Ú page 62.
valid Remote Start request. Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the
NOTE:
comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
These features will stay on through the duration of
climate control settings depending on the outside
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ambient temperature.
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
DE–ICER ACTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED This system uses the key fob to start the To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
When remote start is active and the outside engine conveniently from outside the place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately All of the following conditions must be met before
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
the engine will remote start: 2
remote start will resume its previous operation. If 300 ft (91 m).
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold  Gear selector in PARK
and operation will continue. weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all  Doors closed
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
REMOTE START A BORT M ESSAGE vehicle.
 Hood closed
 Hazard switch off
The following messages will display in the NOTE:
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
 Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
Remote Start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:  Battery at an acceptable charge level
fob may reduce this range.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open  PANIC button not pushed
 The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open To Start Indicator Light to extinguish before  Fuel meets minimum requirement
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low cranking the engine. This allows time for the  Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
engine pre-heat cycle to heat the cylinder air,
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired  Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
and is normal in cold weather. For further infor-
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset mation on the Wait To Start Indicator Light and  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
The message will stay active until the ignition is the pre-heat cycle, see Ú page 127. illuminated
placed in the ON/RUN position. For additional functions of the Remote Start
HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
system, see Ú page 26
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
WARNING! TO ARM THE SYSTEM NOTE:

 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains system:
door key cylinder when the system is armed will
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in sound the alarm when the door is opened.
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and the OFF position.
 The Vehicle Security system remains armed
can cause serious injury or death when  For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, when the power tailgate (if equipped) is opened
inhaled. make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition using the tailgate button on the key fob.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation system is OFF.
 If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
of the Remote Start system, windows, door 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the tailgate, the Vehicle Security system is
locks or other controls could cause serious the vehicle: disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
injury or death. remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
 Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or on first press within Uconnect Settings.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED passenger door open.  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive interior power door lock switches will not unlock
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle the doors.
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 30. The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches  Push the lock button on the key fob. your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
for door locks and tailgate release are disabled. If where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
3. If any doors are open, close them.
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
system will provide the following audible and TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
visible signals:
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
 The horn will pulse alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
any of the following methods:
 The turn signals will flash Security system.
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
cluster will flash the door Ú page 30.
 Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside WARNING!
Security system will remain armed when the the vehicle before closing the door.  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, NOTE: matic transmission into PARK, apply the
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the parking brake, place the ignition in the OFF
Vehicle Security system. Vehicle Security system. position, remove the key fobs from vehicle, 2
and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
If something triggers the alarm and no action is access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five a number of reasons. A child or others could
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself. be warned not to touch the parking brake,
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE brake pedal or the gear selector.
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
the doors using the manual door lock. is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
Door Lock Knob or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
DOORS Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
WARNING! selector.
MANUAL D OOR L OCKS
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
The power door locks can be manually locked from vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup or in a location accessible to children, and do
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To may cause serious injury or death. not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
 For personal security and safety in the event the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you operate power windows, other controls, or
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
drive as well as when you park and leave the move the vehicle.
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock vehicle.
(Continued)
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's
The power door lock switches are located on each door is open, the doors will not lock. E NTRY (I F EQUIPPED)
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
the doors. the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you to lock and
lock knob. unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
POWER S IDE STEPS — I F EQUIPPED NOTE:
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier  Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
entry and exit of the vehicle. within Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Steps will deploy when any of the doors are Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
through the touchscreen. When configured for these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
Power Door Lock Switches “Store” mode, the steps will not deploy unless the signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
setting is selected manually through the Controls from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the menu within the touchscreen.
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door  Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated
lock button on the front door panel is used to lock If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon the the retract setting is selected within Uconnect tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is Settings Ú page 247, the steps will retract. between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
inside. unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ NOTE:  When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock or armed status and the tailgate transitions
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a when you grab hold of the front driver’s door from opened to closed.
slower response time. handle, depending on the selected setting in the  When the tailgate transitions from open to
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and Uconnect system Ú page 247. closed and remote start is active.
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the  All doors will unlock when the front passenger When any of these situations occur, after all open 2
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the door handle is grabbed regardless of the doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
Vehicle Security system. driver’s door unlock preference setting. executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (FOBIK-Safe) the customer.
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to To minimize the possibility of unintentionally NOTE:
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
handle will unlock the driver door automatically. the Passive Entry system is equipped with an Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all automatic door unlock feature which will function if vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
doors and the tailgate automatically. the ignition is in the OFF position. any of the following conditions are true:
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe  The doors are manually locked using the door
search in any passive entry vehicle: lock knobs.
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry  Three attempts are made to lock the doors
key fob while a door is open. using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.  There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch door handle.
while the door is open.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs key fob battery is depleted Ú page 19.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,  The LED light on the key fob will not blink if
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the the key fob battery is low or fully depleted,
vehicle. but a low key fob battery condition will still
support the Passive Entry system function-
ality. When the key fob battery is low, the
instrument cluster will display a message
indicating that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 476.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON
NOTE: E XIT — I F EQUIPPED
 After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
the doors, using either Passive Entry door with power door locks after the following sequence
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the of actions:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the without the vehicle unlocking. enabled within Uconnect Settings
door handle lock button. This could unlock the Ú page 247.
 If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
door(s).
Settings, the key protection described in 2. All doors are closed.
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key 3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional. placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — WARNING!

I F EQUIPPED Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
The auto door lock feature default condition is collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock be opened from the inside door handle when the
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. 2
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled within the Uconnect Settings NOTE:
Ú page 247.
Always use this device when carrying children.
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK Child Lock Control
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
To provide a safer environment for small children door with the internal handle. Once the
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock  When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is impossible to open the doors from inside the
system. engaged, the door can be opened only by using vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
the outside door handle even though the inside check that there is no one left inside.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
door lock is in the unlocked position.
blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or
unlock position. When the system on a door is  After disengaging the Child-Protection Door STEERING WHEEL
engaged, that door can only be opened by using Lock system, always test the door from the
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi- TILT STEERING COLUMN
is in the unlocked position. tion.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on
system, always test the door from the inside to the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
make certain it is in the locked position.
 For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — WARNING!
the steering column. With one hand firmly on the
steering wheel, move the steering column up or I F E QUIPPED  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the The steering wheel contains a heating skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
steering column firmly in place. element that helps warm your hands in diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
cold weather. The heated steering wheel alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
has only one temperature setting. Once conditions must exercise care when using the
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The even at low temperatures, especially if used
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is for long periods.
already warm.
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel
The heated steering wheel button is located on the that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
center of the instrument panel below the radio or steering wheel covers of any type or mate-
screen, and within the Climate or Controls screen rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
of the touchscreen. to overheat.
Tilt Steering Lever  Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
 Push the heated steering wheel button a second
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
time to turn the heating element off. IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
The engine must be running for the heated
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. steering wheel to operate. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
Failure to follow this warning may result in For information on use with the Remote Start helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
serious injury or death. system, see Ú page 26. Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice 5. You can interrupt the help message or system
Recognition system’s status. prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
NOTE: and saying a Voice Command from the current
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake category.
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
grammed through the Uconnect Settings. 2
GET S TARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the device and feature compatibility and to find
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you phone pairing instructions.
have the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
a Uconnect 5 with 8.4-inch display system. passenger conversations are examples of Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS noise that may impact recognition.
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recog-
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
any point while using your Uconnect system. nition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation,
located in the headliner and aimed at the Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect driver.
Or Receive A Text
5/5 NAV, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you 1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Uconnect”. After the beep, say: must first push either the VR or Phone button, Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice 2 — Push To Answer A Phone Call
Up” word and state your command. Some
Commands.
examples of “Wake Up” words include “Hey
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again. Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and This feature allows the driver to save up to two
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar different memory profiles for easy recall through a
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. memory switch. Each memory profile saves
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are desired position settings for the following features:
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
 Driver’s seat
Uconnect System Support:
 Easy Entry/Exit Seat operation (if equipped)
 US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
 Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)  Side mirrors Driver Memory Settings Buttons
 Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-  A set of desired radio station presets
PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or NOTE:
1-800-387-9983 (French)  If equipped with power convex mirrors, these To create a new memory profile, perform the
mirror positions will not set as part of a memory following:
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
profile Ú page 45. NOTE:
 US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
 Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each Saving a new memory profile will erase the
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2. selected profile from memory.
 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveu- 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call: The driver memory settings switch is located on the
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists position (do not start the engine).
1-877-324-9091
of three buttons: 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
memory save function. adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
station presets).
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,

and then push the desired memory button (1
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
SEATS
or 2) within five seconds. The instrument instrument cluster. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
cluster display will display which memory 5. Push and release the lock button on the key of the vehicle.
position has been set. fob within 10 seconds.
WARNING! 2
NOTE: NOTE:  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
memory profile. pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10 ously injured or killed.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE seconds.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY F OB T O M EMORY MEMORY POSITION R ECALL vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of NOTE: areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
two saved memory profiles. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in killed.
NOTE: PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
Before programming your key fob you must select and using a seat belt properly.
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
through the Uconnect system Ú page 247. push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
To program your key fob, perform the following: or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position. A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and moving. A delay of one second will occur before
release the set (S) button on the memory another recall can be selected.
switch.
MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Adjustment dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
Both front seats are adjustable forward or result in loss of control which could cause a
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is collision and serious injury or death.
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
each seat. seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment WARNING!

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
 Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
release the lever. To return the seatback to its forward and hit you causing injury.
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the  To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the back and actuate the handle, then position
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar upright position. the seatback in the desired position.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
once you have reached the desired position. Then, The seat is divided into three segments. The
using body pressure, move forward and rearward outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have width of the seat. If equipped, the back of the
latched. center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
an armrest/center storage compartment.
MANUAL R EAR S EAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING!

WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top your chest. In a collision you could slide under
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or the seat belt, which could result in serious injury 2
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or death.
or collision.
POWER D RIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —

Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
I F E QUIPPED Power Seat Switches
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the
seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward Some models may be equipped with an eight-way 1 — Power Seat Switch
on the handle, lean back on the seatback and power driver's seat. The power seat switches are 2 — Power Seatback Switch
when you reach the desired position, release the located on the outboard side of the driver's seat
handle. cushion. There are two power seat switches that
are used to control the movement of the seat Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
cushion and the seatback. The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
Rear Seat Recliner Handle when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Easy Entry/Exit Seat

CAUTION!
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
or down using the power seat switch. The front of Do not place any article under a power seat or positioning to enhance driver mobility when
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the impede its ability to move as it may cause entering and exiting the vehicle.
switch. Release the switch when the desired damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on
position has been reached. where you have the driver’s seat positioned when
obstruction in the seat’s path.
Reclining The Seatback you place the ignition in the OFF position.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
Power Lumbar — If Equipped position, the driver’s seat will move about
or rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger 2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver’s seat
Release the switch when the desired position is seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
reached. The power lumbar switch is located on the (6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch return to its previously set position when you
WARNING! forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the place the ignition into the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. tion.
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could  When you remove the key fob from the ignition,
result in loss of control which could cause a the driver’s seat will move to a position
collision and serious injury or death. 0.3 inches (0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the and 2.7 inches (2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ-
Serious injury or death could result from a ously set position when you place the ignition to
poorly adjusted seat belt. the ACC or ON/RUN position.
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that  The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against when the driver’s seat position is less than
your chest. In a collision you could slide under 0.9 inches (2.27 cm) forward of the rear stop. At
Lumbar Control Switch
the seat belt, which could result in serious this position, there is no benefit to the driver by
injury or death. moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
The heated seats control buttons are On some models, the two outboard rear
setting profile Ú page 36.
located on the center instrument panel seats are equipped with heated seats.
NOTE: below the touchscreen, and are also The heated seat switches for these seats
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled located within the climate or controls are located on the rear of the center
through the programmable features in the screen of the touchscreen. console. 2
Uconnect system Ú page 247. NOTE: There are two heated seat switches that allow the
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, rear passengers to operate the seats
there will only be control buttons through the independently. You can choose from HI, MED, LO,
On some models, the front and rear seats may be touchscreen. or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions switch indicate the level of heat in use.
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
and seatbacks.
setting on.  Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
 Push the heated seat button a second time to setting on.
WARNING!
turn the MED setting on.  Push the heated seat button a second time to
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the turn the MED setting on.
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,  Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, the LO setting on.  Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical  Push the heated seat button a fourth time to the LO setting on.
condition must exercise care when using the turn the heating elements off.  Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low NOTE: turn the heating elements off.
temperatures, especially if used for long NOTE:
 The engine must be running for the heated
periods of time.
seats to operate.  The level of heat selected will stay on until the
 Do not place anything on the seat or seatback operator changes it.
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket operator changes it.  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
For information on use with the Remote Start within two to five minutes.
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the system, see Ú page 26.  The engine must be running for the heated
increased surface temperature of the seat. seats to operate.
VENTILATED S EATS — I F E QUIPPED NOTE: NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
Front Ventilated Seats seats to operate. rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
Located in the seat cushion are small For information on use with the Remote Start attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
fans that draw the air from the passenger system, see Ú page 26. your head.
compartment and move air through fine Front Head Restraints
perforations in the seat cover to help HEAD R ESTRAINTS
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
three speeds, HI, MED and LO. driver and passenger head restraints.
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
The front ventilated seats control buttons are so that the top of the head restraint is located To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
located on the center instrument panel below the above the top of your ear. head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
touchscreen, and are also located within the the adjustment button, located at the base of the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. WARNING! head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:  All occupants, including the driver, should not
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
there will only be control buttons through the the head restraints are placed in their proper the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle
touchscreen. positions in order to minimize the risk of neck as desired and release. To adjust the head
injury in the event of a crash. restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
 Press the ventilated seat button once to
restraint to the forward most position and release.
choose HI.  Head restraints should never be adjusted The head restraint will return to the rear most
 Press the ventilated seat button a second time while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle position.
to choose MED. with the head restraints improperly adjusted
 Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
or removed could cause serious injury or
choose LO. death in the event of a collision.
 Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to

turn the ventilation off.
Front Head Restraint Removal

Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
2
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
The head restraints should only be removed by
Forward Adjustment Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
NOTE: NOTE: an authorized dealer.
Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/locking If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
positions. When pulling fully forward, the head the center head restraint is not adjustable or WARNING!
restraint will spring back to the untilted, rearward removable.
most position when released.  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped WARNING! collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way  All occupants, including the driver, should not
Always securely stow removed head restraints
driver and passenger head restraints. operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
in a location outside the occupant compart-
the head restraints are placed in their proper
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the ment.
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
injury in the event of a crash.  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the adjustment button, located at the base of head
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
restraint, and push downward on the head  Head restraints should never be adjusted
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
restraint. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
seat.
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment  Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head
to gain additional clearance to the back of the IF EQUIPPED
head.
restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
lower the head restraint, push the adjustment Rear Head Restraint Removal a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
button located on the base of the head restraint To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
and push downward on the head restraint. button and the release button while pulling upward and accelerator pedals to move toward or away
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head from the driver to provide improved position with
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the the steering wheel.
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height. The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
NOTE: side of the steering column.
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
WARNING!
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
Release/Adjustment Buttons injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
1 — Release Button in a location outside the occupant compart-
2 — Adjustment Button ment.
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in Adjustable Pedals Switch
NOTE: the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
 The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has Follow the reinstallation instructions above
only one adjustment position that is used to aid prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
in the routing of a tether Ú page 323. seat.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is

in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is CAUTION!
on. If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when Do not place any article under the adjustable
the system is locked out, the following messages pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
will appear (on vehicles equipped with an cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
instrument cluster display): travel may become limited if movement is 2
 Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
Engaged pedal's path.
 Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
NOTE: MIRRORS Adjusting Rearview Mirror
 Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal. I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
 Further small adjustments may be necessary to Manual Mirror — If Equipped
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
find the best possible seat/pedal position. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, on the view through the rear window.
 For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry on the view through the rear window.
glare from vehicles behind you.
key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals reduced by moving the small control under the NOTE:
to pre-programmed positions Ú page 36. mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
WARNING! the day position (toward the windshield). driver’s rear view.
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
moving. You could lose control and have an or off through the touchscreen.
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
Tow Mode
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional
auxiliary trailer camera to be mounted on the rear
of a trailer. When the camera is connected, the
display in the Digital Rearview Mirror automatically
switches to the trailer camera.
Automatic Dimming Mirror To return to the rear view camera display toggle
through the menu options using the control
Digital Rearview Mirror buttons on the mirror.
CAUTION!
1 — On/Off Control For more information on trailer camera options,
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, 2 — Menu Button see Ú page 217.
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
3 — Left Scroll Button
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
and wipe the mirror clean. 4 — Right Scroll Button
I F E QUIPPED
Push the Menu button next to the on/off control to To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped one of the visors and lift the cover.
access the following mirror options:
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
 Brightness
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
behind while driving.  Tilt
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic  Tow Mode (if equipped)
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
Rearview Mirror mode. menu options.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/ When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
off control lever on the bottom of the mirror the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
rearward toward the driver. Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
during nighttime driving in low light applications.
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — OUTSIDE MIRRORS Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
If Equipped The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the manually folded both forward and rearward to
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to optimal view. prevent damage.
block out the sun.
NOTE: 2
1. Fold down the sun visor. If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip. under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. through the Uconnect system Ú page 247.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun WARNING!

blockage.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle Folding Mirror
or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in CAUTION!
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror. It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED

The controls for the power mirrors are located on
the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Movement Power Folding Mirror Switch
POWER F OLDING O UTSIDE M IRRORS Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
FOR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW — You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
Power Mirror Controls I F E QUIPPED
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
1 — Left Mirror Selection The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward folding.
2 — Mirror Direction Control and unfolded into the normal driving position.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
3 — Right Mirror Selection The switch for the power folding mirrors is located unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R folding mirror switch).
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select  The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R speeds.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
(right) button to select the mirror that you want to To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
adjust. them by pushing the button (this may require
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for multiple attempts). This resets them to their
four arrows for the direction that you want the ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can normal driving position.
mirror to move. cause excessive drag.
POWER C ONVEX M IRROR SWITCH —

I F EQUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls.
The switch enables the movement of the convex 2
portion of both the driver and passenger outside
mirrors.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror Trailer Towing Position

NOTE: NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering an
second time, the switch will automatically default automated car wash.
back to the larger portion of the outside mirrors A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main
after a period of time. mirror and can be adjusted manually.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
Power Convex Mirror Switch I F E QUIPPED
To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors, These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
push the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select mirror head to provide a greater vision range when
the mirror you want to adjust by using the L (left) or towing extra-wide loads. To change position
R (right) buttons. inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
To return the control to the large mirror, push the
Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED three different HomeLink® channels.
 To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
whenever you turn on the rear window
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 62.
buttons will activate the devices they are
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
I F EQUIPPED
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
This feature provides automatic outside mirror the center button Ú page 476.
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
slightly downward from the present position when HOMELINK®
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position HomeLink® Buttons For efficient programming and accurate
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory Settings, Use this QR code to access your recommended that a new battery be placed in the
this feature will be linked to the programmable digital experience. hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
settings.  HomeLink® replaces up to programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
three hand-held transmitters sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
NOTE:
that operate devices such as activate the device you are trying to program your
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
garage door openers, motor- HomeLink® button to.
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 247. ized gates, lighting, or home Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is garage before you begin programming.
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® Rolling Code Devices 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
C HANNELS To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
To erase the channels, follow this procedure: devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
position. “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 2
antenna is attached to the device. The button may 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
not be immediately visible when looking at the want to program while you push and hold the
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
device. The name and color of the button may vary garage door opener transmitter button you are
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
slightly by manufacturer. trying to replicate.
NOTE: NOTE: 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
Erasing all channels should only be performed The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
when programming HomeLink® for the first time. you normally use to operate the device. indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Do not erase channels when programming addi- Non-rolling Code Devices Once this happens, release both buttons.
tional buttons.
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
NOTE:
I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A have a rolling code. These devices will also not
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
DEVICE PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A non-rolling code final steps.
Before programming a device to one of your GARAGE DOOR OPENER Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to NOTE:
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code. activate your garage door opener motor, follow the You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
steps below: code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the NOTE:

garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” WARNING! Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
button. This can usually be found where the  Your motorized door or gate will open and signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
hanging antenna wire is attached to the close while you are programming the universal of transmission, which may not be long enough for
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. people or pets are in the path of the door or programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
2. Return to the vehicle and push the gate. U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
programmed HomeLink® button three times same manner. The procedure may need to be
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
(holding the button for two seconds each performed multiple times to successfully pair the
confined area while programming the trans-
time). If the garage door opener motor device to your HomeLink® buttons.
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
operates, programming is complete. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
confirm that the garage door opener motor when inhaled and can cause you and others to
HOMELINK® B UTTON
operates. If the garage door opener motor be severely injured or killed. To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the been previously trained, without erasing all the
rolling code procedure. channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A determine whether the new device you want to
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE program the HomeLink® button to has a Rolling
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® Code, or Non-rolling Code.
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator miscellaneous device follows the same procedure 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays as programming to a garage door opener without starting the engine.
on constantly, programming is complete. Ú page 51. Be sure to determine if the device has 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
confirm that the garage door opener motor the programming process. flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
operates. If the garage door opener motor button.
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
beginning.
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 51, and follow
all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
flash rates. When it changes, it is “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step
P ROGRAMMING programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or 2 and follow all remaining steps.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United longer in rare cases. The garage door may
States that require the transmitter signals to open and close while you are programming. SECURITY
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or 2
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter button and observe the indicator light. turn in your vehicle.
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds NOTE: To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
of transmission – which may not be long enough
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming is complete and the garage that all channels will be erased. Individual
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
door/device should activate when the channels cannot be erased.
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
HomeLink® button is pressed. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
same manner.
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® when the Vehicle Security system is active.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
buttons, repeat each step for each
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
remaining button. DO NOT erase the TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
the garage door or gate motor.
channels. If you are having trouble programming
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
solutions:
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button for programming, plug it back in at this time.
 Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener
you wish to program while keeping the Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
hand-held transmitter.
HomeLink® indicator light in view. (Canadian/Gate Operator)
 Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously
Opener to complete the training for a Rolling
button, while you press and release (cycle) trained, follow these steps:
Code.
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
until HomeLink has successfully accepted the  Did you unplug the device for programming and
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button remember to plug it back in?
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,

please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or HEADLIGHT SWITCH
assistance.
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
WARNING! the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
garage while programming the transceiver. lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if 2 — Push Fog Light Switch
people, pets or other objects are in the path of 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety 5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do NOTE:
not use a garage door opener without these Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
safety features. Headlight Switch light switch without the OFF position. In order to
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control must be rotated to AUTO position.
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
NOTE: NOTE: or a windshield mounted camera. These cameras

For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime detect vehicle specific light and automatically
switch clockwise from the parking lights and Running Lights will automatically deactivate switch from high beams to low beams until the
instrument panel lights position to the first detent when the front fog lights are turned on. approaching vehicle is out of view.
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and NOTE:
 If allowed by law in the country in which the
instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control 2
switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon- can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER nect system Ú page 247. “Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights Settings Ú page 247, as well as turning the
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of headlight switch to the AUTO position.
the steering column. may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
the hazard warning lights are activated). cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH tions on the windshield or camera lens will
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument cause the system to function improperly.
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.  If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
Multifunction Lever Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
low beams on. be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — a local authorized dealer.
I F EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP
 The Automatic High Beams will not activate until
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). To
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control opt out of the Automatic High-Beam Sensitivity
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until system provides increased forward lighting at night Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or by automating high beam control through the use Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle
the parking brake is engaged. of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror the multifunction lever six full on/off cycles
within 10 seconds of ignition ON. The system
will return to the default setting when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-P ASS The system directs the headlights to light up the AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS W ITH W IPERS
road in the best way, taking into account the speed
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. as the speed of the vehicle while the steering Headlights, it also has this
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, wheel is being turned. customer-programmable feature. When your
and remain on, until the lever is released. headlights are in the automatic mode and the
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
engine is running, they will automatically turn on
AUTOMATIC H EADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED when the vehicle is traveling above approximately
when the wiper system is on. This feature is
5 mph (8 km/h).
This system automatically turns the headlights on programmable through the Uconnect system
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the This system can be turned on/off through the Ú page 247.
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
position. Lights” Ú page 247.
Wiper system Ú page 62, and it is activated, the
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS headlights will automatically turn on after the
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on wipers complete five wipe cycles within
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel approximately one minute, and they will turn off
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To approximately four minutes after the wipers
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight completely stop.
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTO position. NOTE:
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime,
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
The engine must be running before the headlights
switch position is the parking lights and instrument to the lower nighttime intensity.
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
panel lights position (instead of the OFF position).
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch to the AUTO position.
SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam)
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The
headlights continuously and automatically adapt
to the driving conditions around bends or when
cornering based on steering wheel angle.
HEADLIGHT DELAY FRONT FOG L IGHTS — IF EQUIPPED TURN SIGNALS

To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Move the multifunction lever up or down to
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to lights or low beam headlights and push the fog activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the light switch located within the headlight switch. of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn operation.
2
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight the front fog lights off. NOTE:
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be If either light remains on and does not flash, or
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON outside light bulb.
position.
NOTE: LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
 This feature can be programmed through the Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
Uconnect system Ú page 247. without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
 The headlight delay feature is automatically signal will flash three times then automatically turn
activated if the headlight switch is left in the off.
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Fog Light Switch
LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound and a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display when the
driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn
on for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob
LIGHTS/T RAILER H ITCH L IGHT W ITH unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
BED LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED Entry feature.
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and When these lights are activated using the button
trailer hitch light are turned on by pushing the on the headlight switch, the cargo lights, trailer
cargo light button located on the lower half of the spotter lights, and trailer hitch light will remain
headlight switch. illuminated when the vehicle transmission is in
PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights will turn
off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch (Vehicles DRIVE.
Sold In Canada) When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can position, the trailer hitch light will turn on
also be turned on using the switch located just automatically. The trailer hitch light will turn off
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the bed when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE position.
light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument NOTE:
cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of Cali-
the switch a second time will turn the lights off. fornia or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror
spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror
spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in
motion, but the bed light will remain on. In all
states, including California and Mississippi, if a
bed camera is deactivated, the bed lights will turn
back on.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)

BATTERY SAVER Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob, the courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights will
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior turn on.
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
If the ignition is in the OFF position, the interior
The overhead console lights can also be operated
lights will automatically turn off when:
individually as reading lights by pushing the
2
 Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes. corresponding buttons.
 The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
 The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manually
activated by either the headlight switch or the Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
truck bed switch.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in 2 — Dome Defeat Button
the ON/RUN position. 3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is 4 — Dome On Button
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the NOTE:
headlights are turned on and left on for eight Front Courtesy/Reading Lights On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position, console, if both the Dome On and Dome Defeat
the exterior lights will automatically turn off. 1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
2 — Dome Defeat Button door ajar feature will be disabled, but the dome
INTERIOR LIGHTS 3 — Dome On Button lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
COURTESY LIGHTS available for your vehicle:
The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are  Push button on/off
turned on when any door is opened. The courtesy
 Push lens on/off
and dome lights are turned on when the Dome On
button is pushed on the overhead console. Also, if  No on/off button, only courtesy light
your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
NOTE: I LLUMINATED ENTRY

The rear courtesy/reading lights will remain on
until the switch is pushed a second time, so be The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
sure they have been turned off before exiting the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the This feature also turns on the approach lamps
ignition is placed in the OFF position, they will auto- located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
matically turn off after 10 minutes. The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
Dimmer Controls seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
switch and are located on the left side of the position from the OFF position.
instrument panel. Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) The front courtesy overhead console and door
1 — Ambient Light Control courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control button on the overhead console is pushed. The
overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off after
10 minutes to protect the battery.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
pushed.
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and
ambient light levels. NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
NOTE:
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they will
The ambient lights are only active when the head-
Dimmer Controls also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
lights or parking lights are on.
button.
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the
control knob upward to the first detent. WARNING!
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located The delay interval decreases as you rotate the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the knob until it enters the low continual speed could lead to a collision. You might not see other
steering column. The front wipers are operated by position. The delay can be regulated from a vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to icing of the windshield during freezing weather, 2
a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will warm the windshield with the defroster before
double in duration when the vehicle speed is and during windshield washer use.
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers Mist
To use the windshield washer, push the washer When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
the washer knob is released. one time and automatically shut off.
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay range, NOTE:
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever the wiper will operate for several seconds after the The mist feature does not activate the washer
washer knob is released. It will then resume the pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or Short
intermittent interval previously selected. If the the windshield. The wash function must be used in
Press For Mist)
washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three For information on wiper care and replacement,
times after the wash knob is released. see Ú page 410.
WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
Intermittent Wipers
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
The intermittent feature of this system was your climate. This rating information can be found
designed for use when weather conditions make a on most washer fluid containers.
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable.
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
CLIMATE CONTROLS
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the under the following conditions: The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
windshield and automatically activates the wipers. the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
five detent positions to activate this feature. located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with sides of the touchscreen, or on the instrument
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is panel below the radio.
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is
the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for
greater than 32°F (0°C). AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires
not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
(off) position when not using the system.
or the gear selector is moved out of the
NOTE: NEUTRAL position.
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi- equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
tion. Sensing wipers are not operational when the
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop- vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
the windshield. ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
wiper operation can resume, if it has been Temperature Controls
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 247.
A/C Button In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The
Press and release this button on the
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
touchscreen, or push the button on the
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
inside of the windshield.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C
is on. Auto Button 2
Recirculation Button Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
Press and release this button on the
your desired temperature by
touchscreen, or push the button on the
automatically adjusting the blower speed
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic Tem- faceplate, to change the system between
and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
perature Controls Recirculation mode and outside air
active during AUTO operation to improve
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
NOTE: performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon for efficiency.
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
vehicle equipment. outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
MAX A/C Button high humidity are present. Recirculation can be  Press and release this button on the touch-
used in all modes. Recirculation may be screen.
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
the touchscreen to change the current  Push the button on the faceplate.
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
setting to the coldest output of air. The Toggling this function will cause the system to
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX switch between manual mode and automatic
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the mode Ú page 68.
control selection. Continuous use of the
MAX A/C operation to exit. Pressing other settings
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
will also cause MAX A/C to exit.
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
NOTE: this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
 The MAX A/C sets the control for maximum mode may automatically adjust to optimize
cooling performance. customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
 The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
Front Defrost Button Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
CAUTION! equipped) on the faceplate or
Press and release the Front Defrost
Failure to follow these cautions can cause touchscreen, or press and slide the
button on the touchscreen, or push and
damage to the heating elements: temperature bar towards the blue arrow
release the button on the faceplate, to
button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
change the current airflow setting to  Use care when washing the inside of the rear settings.
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes on the interior surface of the window. Use a NOTE:
from the windshield and side window demist soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping  The numbers within the temperature display will
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the parallel to the heating elements. Labels can only appear if the system is equipped with an
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with be peeled off after soaking with warm water. automatic climate control system.
maximum temperature settings for best
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or  Up and down buttons are only available on vehi-
windshield and side window defrosting and
abrasive window cleaners on the interior cles equipped with a 12-inch display.
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to the surface of the window. SYNC Button
previous setting.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the Press the SYNC button on the
Rear Defrost Button window. touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
Press and release the Rear Defrost
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
button on the touchscreen, or push and
passenger temperature setting with the driver
release the button on the faceplate, to Down Buttons temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
turn on the rear window defroster and the These buttons provide the driver and passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear with independent temperature control. automatically exit this feature.
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster Push the red button (or rotate knob if NOTE:
automatically turns off after 10 minutes. equipped) on the faceplate or The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
touchscreen, or press and slide the screen.
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Blower Control Faceplate NOTE:

Blower Control regulates the amount of Push the MODE button to change the airflow Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
air forced through the climate control distribution mode. tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
system. There are seven blower speeds and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Touchscreen
available. Adjusting the blower will cause Floor Mode
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
Press one of the mode buttons to change the
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
2
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
The speeds can be selected using either the amount of air is directed through the
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the defrost and side window demister
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
buttons on the touchscreen. outlets.
outlets and demist outlets.
Faceplate Mix Mode
Panel Mode
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets and side window demister outlets. This
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn setting works best in cold or snowy
the blower control knob counterclockwise. can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center conditions that require extra heat to the
Touchscreen outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. comfort while reducing moisture on the
setting and the large blower icon to increase the There is a shut-off wheel located below the air windshield.
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow Climate Control OFF Button
pressing the blower bar area between the icons. from these outlets.
Press and release the OFF button on the
Mode Control Bi-Level Mode touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
Select Mode by pressing one of the mode Air comes from the instrument panel the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount Climate Control system on/off.
the MODE button on the faceplate, to of air is directed through the defrost and
change the airflow distribution mode. side window demister outlets.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL MAX A/C Setting On vehicles equipped with Manual Climate
controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Set the temperature control knob to the
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
MAX A/C setting to change the current
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
setting to the coldest output of air.
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Moving the temperature control knob
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
the control button to blink and then turn off.
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
windshield and side window demist
illuminates when A/C is on.
outlets. When the defrost button is
Recirculation Button selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
Push the Recirculation button to change for best windshield and side window defrosting
Temperature Controls
the system between recirculation mode and defogging.
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate Rear Defrost Button
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Push and release the Rear Defrost
Recirculation can be used when outside Control button to turn on the rear window
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or defroster and the heated outside mirrors
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
unavailable if conditions exist that could create The rear window defroster automatically turns off
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C after 10 minutes.
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display Manual Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
Temperature Controls and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Blower Control Bi-Level Mode

CAUTION!
Blower Control regulates the amount of Air comes from the instrument panel
Failure to follow these cautions can cause air forced through the climate control outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
damage to the heating elements: system. There are seven blower speeds of air is directed through the defrost and
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear available. The blower speed increases as side window demister outlets.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners you turn the blower control knob clockwise from NOTE:
2
on the interior surface of the window. Use a the lowest blower setting. The blower speed Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping decreases as you turn the blower control knob tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can counterclockwise. and warmer air from the floor outlets.
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Mode Control Floor Mode
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or Turn the mode control knob to adjust Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
abrasive window cleaners on the interior airflow distribution. The airflow amount of air is directed through the
surface of the window. distribution mode can be adjusted so air defrost and side window demister
comes from the instrument panel outlets.
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
window. Mix Mode
outlets.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
Temperature Control Panel Mode
and side window demister outlets. This
Air comes from the outlets in the setting works best in cold or snowy
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
instrument panel. Each of these outlets conditions that require extra heat to the
the air forced through the climate system.
can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
The temperature increases as you turn flow of air. The air vanes of the center comfort while reducing moisture on the
the temperature control knob clockwise. outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and windshield.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
The temperature decreases as you turn
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
the temperature control knob
from these outlets.
counterclockwise.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL To provide you with maximum comfort in the OPERATING T IPS
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
(ATC) fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
The blower will increase in speed and transition suggested control settings for various weather
Automatic Operation
into Auto mode. conditions.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Manual Operation Override Summer Operation
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. This system offers a full complement of manual The engine cooling system must be protected with
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like override features. The AUTO symbol in the front a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver ATC display will be turned off when the system is corrosion protection and to protect against engine
and passenger temperature control buttons. being used in the manual mode. overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the MS.90032) is recommended.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION —
system will achieve and automatically Winter Operation
maintain that comfort level. I F E QUIPPED To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
3. When the system is set up for your comfort Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep performance, make sure the engine cooling
level, it is not necessary to change the everyone comfortable while you keep moving system is functioning properly and the proper
settings. You will experience the greatest ahead. amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
efficiency by simply allowing the system to used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
function automatically. Winter months is not recommended, because it
beep, say one of the following commands:
may cause window fogging.
NOTE:  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
Vacation/Storage
 It is not necessary to move the temperature  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system For information on maintaining the Climate Control
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may system when the vehicle is being stored for an
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly extended period of time, see Ú page 456.
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
as possible. adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
 The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or equipped.
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.
Window Fogging Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase Set the mode control to
the front blower speed. Do not use the Glove Compartment
(Panel Mode),
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, (A/C) on, and blower The glove compartment is located on the 2
as fogging may occur. Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the passenger side of the instrument panel and
Vehicle Interior Is Very windows for a minute features both an upper and lower storage area.
Outside Air Intake
Hot to flush out the hot air.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
Adjust the controls as
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
needed to achieve
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
comfort.
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter Turn (A/C) on and
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, Warm Weather set the mode control to
slush, and snow.
(Panel Mode).
Cabin Air Filter
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
The Climate Control system filters out dust and Mode).
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
Set the mode control to Glove Compartment
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed. Cool & Humid (Mix Mode) and 1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
Conditions turn (A/C) on to (If Equipped)
keep windows clear. 2 — Upper Glove Compartment
Set the mode control to 3 — Lower Glove Compartment
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
If equipped with a covered upper glove

compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
Center Storage Compartment Center Storage Compartment
Door Storage 1 — Upper Console Handle

WARNING!
2 — Lower Console Handle
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
 This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels. the armrest could be seriously injured during
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped vehicle operation, or a collision.
Storage compartments are located in both the  In a collision, the latch may open if the total
driver and passenger rear door trim panels. weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
Center Storage Compartment —
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
If Equipped Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 lb
The center storage compartment is located (4.5 kg).
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
contains both an upper and lower storage area. USB Port
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a
USB port located that can be used to power small
electrical devices.
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to

open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains WARNING!
a power inverter. There is also a “fill line” located Do not operate this vehicle with a console
along the rear inside wall of the lower bin. Contents compartment lid in the open position. Driving
above the “fill line” may interfere with cupholder with the console compartment lid open may
placement if equipped with a premium center result in injury in a collision. 2
console.
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
Tandem Doors Open Position
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to 1 — Front Bin Open
access the cupholders, or push the rear bin to 2 — Rear Bin Open
access the coin holder/small storage bin.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin

1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped

1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
Push the release button at the front of the With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access the center seat bottom to access additional storage
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the underneath the seat.
rear lower storage bin. The console storage contains a USB port that can
be used to power small electrical devices.
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
Push Release Button To Slide Tray seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available. Bench Seat Storage USB Port
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a There is a storage drawer located in the lower
compartment is provided for the storage of one center of the instrument panel. It can be released
pair of sunglasses. by pushing the access button above it. Pull drawer
outward to the fully open position.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location

Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —

If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning. 2
Storage Drawer Access Button Opened Storage Bin
Seatback Storage — If Equipped Storage Bin (Regular Cab)

Located in the back of both the driver and The storage bin is located behind the front seats
passenger front seats are pockets that can be and runs the length of the cab.
used for storage.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch

To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor mat
(if equipped), and lift upward on the handle of the
latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Storage Bin
Seatback Storage
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped 2. Unfold both the legs using the straps. Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be
equipped with a folding load floor. 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
WARNING! 2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items side of the load floor.
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an 3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under
accident you may experience abrupt stopping, the load floor.
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects
stored on the load floor may move around with WARNING!
force and strike occupants, resulting in serious
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
or fatal injury. Load Floor Legs In Opened Position position. When stopping fast or in an accident,
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds the load floor could move to the down position
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab causing serious injury.
into position.
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Load Floor In Open Position Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab

Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position 4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor USB/AUX C ONTROL For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
back in the secured down position before you USB port and another device is plugged into the
operate the vehicle. Located on the center stack, just below the Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There you to select which device to use.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab) are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage 2
AUX port located in the middle of the USB ports.
under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
If equipped with a fold flat load floor, unsnap the
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
securing snap located at either side of the load
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid to open the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
storage compartments Ú page 74.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select 1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
the device transferring data. 2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
Crew Cab Storage

The third and fourth USB ports are located behind  “Another device is in use through the same USB
the center console, above the power inverter. port. Please disconnect the first device to use CAUTION!
These USB ports are charge only. the second device”.  Do not exceed the maximum power of
NOTE: 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
a Media USB port, a message will display on the need to be replaced.
touchscreen that the device is not supported by  Power outlets are designed for accessory
the system. plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may the power outlets as this will damage the
cause the connection to a previous device to be outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
lost. power outlet can cause damage not covered
For further information, refer to the Uconnect by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com. An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1 on top of the center stack. This power outlet works
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2 ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can position.
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch provide power for in-cab accessories designed for
Display and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display use with the standard “cigar lighter” style plug. The
radios: different scenarios are listed below when a 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is outlet indicating “12 V DC”, together with either a
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports: key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
 “A new device is now connected. Previous A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
connection was lost”. ON/RUN or ACC position for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
is connected to the battery, and can provide power
connection was lost”.
at all times.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:

CAUTION! POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Interior Power Inverters
Center Console
power from the vehicle's battery, even when If equipped, 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) power
 F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- inverters may be located inside the vehicle. These
Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's inverters can power cellular phones, electronics 2
 F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade and other low power devices requiring power up to
Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped) battery life and/or prevent the engine from 400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
 F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument starting. this power limit, as will most power tools.
Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., All power inverters are designed with built-in
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will overload protection. If the power rating of
any equipment as to not drain the battery of the discharge the battery even more quickly. Only 400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s) use these intermittently and with greater down. Once the electrical device has been
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle caution. removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
is not in use to protect the battery against The front power inverter is located in center
 After the use of high power draw accessories,
discharge. console toward the right hand side, just under the
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped).
WARNING!
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
To avoid serious injury or death: allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
 Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure. Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only
maximum) power inverter located on the rear of found on vehicles equipped with an exterior power
the center console. inverter. The switch only controls on/off operation
of the power outlet in the truck bed or, if equipped,
the RamBox. It does not control on/off operation of
the power outlets located inside the cabin of the
vehicle.
Center Stack Power Inverter (If Equipped)

Exterior Power Inverter — If Equipped
Vehicles not equipped with a RamBox may be
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped) equipped with a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
power inverter located just inside the truck bed.
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, the inverter is For information on the outlet found inside the
located to the right of the center stack, just below RamBox, see Ú page 91.
the climate controls. To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
Exterior Power Inverter (If Equipped)

NOTE: WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
 The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place
I F E QUIPPED and an LED indicator light.
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
 Due to built-in overload protection, the power LED Indicator Status:
inverter shuts down if the power rating is  No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
exceeded. device. 2
 Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
WARNING!
 Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
To avoid serious injury or death: object is detected.
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. NOTE:
 Do not touch with wet hands. Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
 Close the lid when not in use.
Wireless Charging Pad
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
electric shock and failure. The key fob should not be placed on the
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
console. This charging pad is designed to
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
is a standard that uses magnetic induction to
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
transfer power to your mobile device.
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi vehicle from starting.
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
WINDOWS NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
POWER W INDOWS up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the and release; the window will go up automatically.
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
The window controls on the driver's door control all To stop the window from going all the way up
this feature. The time is programmable within
the door windows. during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.
switch briefly.
WARNING! To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do
window to stop.
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not If the window runs into any obstacle during
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
unattended children, can become entrapped by window switch again to close the window.
the windows while operating the power window NOTE:
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious Any impact due to rough road conditions may
injury or death. trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
Power Window Switches
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
The passenger door windows can also be operated AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES lightly and hold to close the window manually.
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls Auto-Down Feature WARNING!
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or The driver and front passenger door power window There is no anti-pinch protection when the
ON/RUN position. switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window is almost closed. To avoid personal
To open the window part way (manually), push the window switch down for a short period of time, injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
window switch down briefly and release. then release, and the window will go down and all objects from the window path before
automatically. closing.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
RESET A UTO-U P MANUAL S LIDING REAR WINDOW —

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the I F E QUIPPED
window probably needs to be reset. To reset A locking device in the center of the window helps
Auto-Up: to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window Squeeze the lock to release the window. 2
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the WIND B UFFETING
window is closed. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
the window completely and continue to hold Window Lockout Switch in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
the switch down for an additional two seconds with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
after the window is fully open. POWER S LIDING REAR WINDOW — equipped) in certain open or partially open
IF E QUIPPED positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
The switch for the power sliding rear window is windows open, open the front and rear windows
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim located on the overhead console. Push the switch together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
panel allows you to disable the window controls on rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch forward occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window to close the glass. opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
controls, push and release the window lockout window.
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Opening Sunroof
Express Open/Close
SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF —  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
Push the switch rearward and release it within
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
I F EQUIPPED leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a one-half second and the sunroof will open
location accessible to children. Do not leave automatically from any position. The sunroof will
The power sunroof switches are located on the
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or open fully and stop automatically.
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights. ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly Push the switch forward and release it within
unattended children, can become entrapped one-half second and the sunroof will close
by the power sunroof while operating the automatically from any position. The sunroof will
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may close fully and stop automatically.
result in serious injury or death. During Express Open or Express Close operation,
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. the sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed. Manual Open/Close
Always fasten your seat belt properly and To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
make sure all passengers are also properly rearward to full open.
secured.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
Power Sunroof Switches  Do not allow small children to operate the the forward position.
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof Any release of the switch during open or close
parts, or any object, to project through the
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
2 — Venting Sunroof sunroof opening. Injury may result.
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated, the
sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof Ignition Off Operation

To vent open the sunroof, push and release “tilt” The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
on the vent switch. To close the sunroof from the to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
vent position, push and release “down” on the vent switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
switch. front door will cancel this feature.
Pinch Protect Feature NOTE:
2
This feature will detect an obstruction in the Ignition Off time is programmable through the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close Uconnect system Ú page 247.
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the Sunroof Maintenance
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to Hood Release
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of
NOTE: clear out any debris that may have collected in the
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result tracks.
left to release it, before raising the hood.
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual HOOD
Mode.
Sunshade Operation TO OPEN THE H OOD
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the sunshade will open automatically as the 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
sunroof opens. steering wheel at the base of the instrument
NOTE: panel.
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE H OOD Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped TAILGATE REMOVAL

Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from The key fob may be equipped with an NOTE:
the point where the props no longer hold the hood electronic release feature for the
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
open. tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
camera function.
opening. To activate, push and release
the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
WARNING! below:
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving and slowly lower into the open position. 1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it camera and or power locks (if equipped)
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
could open when the vehicle is in motion and Ú page 85.
console inside the vehicle can be used to release
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
the tailgate. An indicator light may also signal when 2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
could result in serious injury or death.
the tailgate is open. cables by releasing the lock tang from the
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be pivot.
CAUTION! stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL. NOTE:
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the support cables.
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 95
the front center of the hood to ensure that both may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
latches engage. Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
TAILGATE CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
OPENING sides are latched.
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
tailgate release pad located on the tailgate door. button.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to
the open position (if equipped). Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle. Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the Remote Keyless Entry
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket. 1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the or Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket
left side pivot. located on the rear sill.
2
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
Locking Tab
WARNING! 3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is ensuring the connector bracket does not fall
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles into the sill.
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should
extend beyond the overhanging camper
compartment and be free of leaks. Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket 5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
(provided in the glove compartment) to the glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket harness to ensure that the terminals do not
back into the sill. corrode.
Taped Tailgate Harness
BED STEP — I F EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable
Chassis Wiring Harness Wire Harness Bracket bed step on the driver’s side of the tailgate to
provide easier entry and exit into the truck bed.
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against

the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This
will prevent damaging the connector and
bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
Chassis Plug
Bed Step Location
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Bed Step Components Bed Step (Extended)

1 — Bed Step To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
2 — Foot Tab the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
Pickup Box Features
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the WARNING!
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of the 1 — Cleats
bed step, and push rearward. A small amount of Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your 2 — Upper Load Floor Indents
force will release the spring load, and extend the hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step 3 — Bulk Head Dividers
bed step out and away from the tailgate.
returns to the stowed position could result in 4 — Anchors
NOTE:
injury to your hands or fingers.
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
NOTE: A touchscreen button to indicate the

If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or WARNING! current active camera image being
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you  If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg) displayed is made available whenever
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets of material suspended above the wheelhouse, the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
that are available from an authorized dealer. supports must be installed to transfer the A touchscreen button to switch the
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of weight of the load to the pickup box floor or display to rear view camera image is
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place vehicle damage may result. The use of proper made available whenever the Cargo
lumber across the box in the indentations provided supports will permit loading up to the rated Camera image is displayed.
above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead payload.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
dividers to form the floor.  Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in camera image is made available when the vehicle
an accident causing serious or fatal injury. is not in REVERSE gear.
WARNING!
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera
 The pickup box is intended for load carrying There are stampings in the sheet metal on the image is displayed. The image will continue to
purposes only, not for passengers, who should inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and be displayed until the display timer exceeds
sit in seats and use seat belts. behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
 Care should always be exercised when oper- across the box from side to side to create separate (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to disable
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo. load compartments in the pickup box. display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced. There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available
Severe turns or rough roads may cause sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up With Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may to 1000 lb (450 kg) total. The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
result in vehicle damage. If wide building overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen that
materials are to be frequently carried, the CARGO CAMERA — IF E QUIPPED
aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid in
installation of a support is recommended. This Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo hooking up a fifth wheel camper or gooseneck
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to Camera that allows you to see an image of the trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box floor. inside of the pickup box. The image will be the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted.
(Continued) displayed in the Uconnect screen. The centerline will adjust in response to steering
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center angle inputs, and will not obstruct the gooseneck
area of the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp receiver or an approaching trailer gooseneck in the
(CHMSL). camera feed.
Activation Deactivation NOTE:

The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button, the
through the Uconnect Settings by pressing the be deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera Cargo Camera image will be displayed until the
Cargo Camera soft button, followed by the “Adjust display is deactivated. It can also be manually vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
Centerline” soft button on the touchscreen. deactivated through the Uconnect Settings and the 10 second timer runs out. The image may
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the Ú page 247. be deactivated by pressing the "X" soft button, 2
placing the ignition in the OFF position, placing the
overlay will display anytime the Cargo Camera NOTE: gear selector in PARK, or pressing the image
image is displayed.  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph defeat “X” button. On deactivation, the previous
Adjusting Centerline (13 km/h), the Cargo Camera image will be selected screen will appear.
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the displayed continuously until the touchscreen
centerline: button "X" to disable display of the Cargo BED RAIL T IE-D OWN SYSTEM —
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
Camera image is pressed. I F E QUIPPED
located in the bottom right corner of the  The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
Cargo Camera display. display of the camera image is made available CAUTION!
ONLY when the vehicle is not in reverse.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance 250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on
horizontally or vertically. builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not horizontal, or damage to the cleat or cleat rail
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press cover the lens. may occur.
the “Accept” button to set the centerline to the
newly specified position. Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With
Uconnect 5/5 NAV NOTE:
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the This feature is only available for vehicles equipped
bottom of the Uconnect display. with a RamBox.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn

the Cargo Camera system on.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the

bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
1 — Utility Rail Detent Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Adjustable Cleats 2 — Cleat Retainer Nut Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
3 — Utility Rail Cleat release button located beneath the end cap while
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail.
keep cargo properly secure. Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the nut counterclockwise several turns. Then pull the end cap screw located in the center of the end
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
in the detent and tighten the nut.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS

Push and release the lock or unlock button on the Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
and the RamBox Ú page 19. The RamBox storage watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
bins can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock 300 lb (136 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
2
and unlock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise to
lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return
the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
CAUTION!
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED  Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box before moving or driving vehicle.
storage and cargo management system consisting
of up to three features:  Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
 Integrated box side storage bins latching/hinging mechanisms.
 Cargo divider (if equipped)
 Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to CAUTION!
 Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped) heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift
Ú page 89 Failure to follow the following items could cause
due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize
damage to the vehicle:
potential for damage, secure all cargo to
prevent movement and protect inside  Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with properly secured.
appropriate padding.
 Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lb
(136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
per bin.
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, The interior of the RamBox will automatically
push and release the button located on the lid. The illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access. automatic illumination, there is a manual on/off
Lift the lid to fully open. switch located at the rear of each storage bin.
NOTE: Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights,
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if pushing the switch again will turn the lights back
the RamBox is locked. on.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal

NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in
addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock RamBox Light Switch inverter may be located inside the RamBox of your
vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by the
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to
Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to
CAUTION! allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
the left of the steering wheel. The RamBox inverter
pull up on the edge. To install, push the plug
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time can power cellular phones, electronics and
downward into drain hole.
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If other low power devices requiring power up to
the lid is required to stay open for extended 400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
periods of time, it is recommended that the bin this power limit, as will most power tools.
lights be turned off manually using the on/off
switch.
WARNING!
 Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
 Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young 2
children may not be able to escape. If trapped
in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
cation or heat stroke.
RamBox Power Inverter Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch  In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
found on vehicles equipped with an exterior power
inverter; inside the RamBox or truck bed. The Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent covers open.
switch only controls on/off operation of the exterior personal injury or damage to your vehicle:  Keep the storage bin covers closed and
power inverter; it does not control on/off operation latched while the vehicle is in motion.
of the power outlets located inside the cabin of the
 Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
vehicle.
RamBox Emergency Release Lever Divider Position 2. With the side gates open, position the divider
so the outboard ends align with the intended
As a security measure, an Emergency Release The divider position is intended for managing your
slots in the sides of the bed.
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
mechanism. around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
In the event of an individual being locked inside the bed inner panels which allow for various
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be positions to assist in managing your cargo.
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the To install the bed divider into a divider position,
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin perform the following:
cover latching mechanism. 1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Aligning Gate To Slots

3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended
slots of the bed.
Emergency Release Lever
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED

The bed divider has two functional positions: Center Handle And Lock
 Divider Position 1 — Center Handle Lock
 Storage Position 2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure

the side gates in the closed position.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER R EMOVAL
2
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on the
Storage Position underside of the cover.
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of
Side Gates Closed the cargo tie-down loops.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel

into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position, Location Of Rear Latches
perform the same steps as you would for the
divider position, except position the divider fully NOTE:
forward in the bed against the front panel. Cargo Tie-Down Loop If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the 5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
Tonneau Cover’s rear panel. CAUTION! front panel (Tri-Folded Position).
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp
wire are in the proper stowed position. If the
clamp and clamp wire are not properly stowed,
damage to the Tonneau Cover material will
result.
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel

(Intermediate Position).
Released Position Tri-Folded Position

3. From the Released Position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper upward.
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)

NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position. Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Stowed Position
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps

to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper upward. Listen for a “clicking”
sound to confirm the clamp has been properly
stowed.
2
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Stowage Strap

NOTE: 7. Once in the Tri-Folded Position, pull both front
 When folding the center and rear panels, clamp handles down to the Released Position.
the sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
 Fold the panels gently. It is not recom-
Stowed Position
mended to allow the panels to drop under 9. Utilizing two people, remove the Tonneau
their own weight. Cover.
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding. NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
CAUTION! completely, and the stowage straps are engaged,
before removing the cover from the vehicle.
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage straps Released Position
or damage to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may
occur.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER 2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to 4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
release the clamps from the Stowed Position. position to properly engage the clamps.
I NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
truck bed and push the cover forward against
the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover
centers itself when placed on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all
the way forward on the truck bed. Failure to do so
might prevent proper clamp engagement, or Stowed Position Clamped Position
interfere with the electronic tailgate release
function (if equipped). 3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of NOTE:
the box (or flange of the Ram Box rail, if Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
equipped) to the Semi-Clamped Position. improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Location Of Front Latches
Semi Clamped Position Improper Clamp Position

5. Disengage the stowage straps.

6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
Intermediate Position.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage Fully Unfolded Position

8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
Released Position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together

7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in
box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the clamped position by placing a lock through the
the Semi Clamped Position. locking hole.
Improper Clamp Position

NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
Semi Clamped Position clamped to the truck bed flange. Locking Hole
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
CAUTION!
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER C LEANING
position to properly engage the clamps.
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover from
the vehicle and/or damage to the vehicle/
Tonneau Cover.
Clamped Position
101
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
3
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Oil Pressure Gauge

WARNING!
DESCRIPTIONS — GAS E NGINE  The pointer should always indicate the oil
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
pressure when the engine is running. A
1. Tachometer continuous high or low reading under others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions normal driving conditions may indicate a coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
per minute (RPM x 1000). lubrication system malfunction. Immediate dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
service should be obtained from an autho- Ú page 415.
2. Voltmeter
rized dealer.
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
5. Speedometer
gauge indicates the electrical system CAUTION!
voltage. The pointer should stay within the  Indicates vehicle speed.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
normal range if the battery is charged. If the 6. Temperature Gauge damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
pointer moves to either extreme left or right
 The gauge pointer shows engine coolant reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
and remains there during normal driving,
temperature. The pointer positioned within vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the electrical system should be serviced.
the normal range indicates that the engine the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
3. Instrument Cluster Display cooling system is operating satisfactorily. the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
display shows the instrument cluster higher temperature when driving in hot service.
display messages Ú page 109. weather, up mountain grades, or when
 The display always shows one of the main towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to 7. Fuel Gauge
menu item after ignition is placed on. exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
ating range.
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
 The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
3
PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
DESCRIPTIONS — GAS E NGINE  The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned within
1. Tachometer the normal range indicates that the engine damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions cooling system is operating satisfactorily. reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
per minute (RPM x 1000). vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
2. Instrument Cluster Display higher temperature when driving in hot
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
weather, up mountain grades, or when
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
display shows the instrument cluster service.
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
display messages Ú page 109.
ating range.
 The display always shows one of the main 5. Fuel Gauge
menu item after ignition is placed on. WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
3. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling position.
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized  The fuel pump symbol points to
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats the side of the vehicle where the
Ú page 415. fuel door is located.
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
3
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING!

3. Instrument Cluster Display
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
1. Tachometer others could be badly burned by steam or boiling display messages Ú page 109.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
 The display always shows one of the main
per minute (RPM x 1000). dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
menu item after ignition is placed on.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature 4. Oil Pressure Gauge
 This gauge shows the engine coolant CAUTION!  The pointer should always indicate some oil
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely pressure when the engine is running. A
show higher temperatures when driving in continuous high or low reading under
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in normal driving conditions may indicate a
reads greater “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle.
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red Warning lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
Light turns on while driving, safely bring the service should be obtained from an autho-
off until the pointer drops back into the normal
vehicle to a stop, and turn off the engine. rized dealer.
range. If the pointer remains on the “h,” turn the
DO NOT operate the vehicle until the cause
engine off immediately and call an authorized
is corrected.
dealer for service.
5. Speedometer 7. Fuel Gauge NOTE:

 Indicates vehicle speed.  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the  The gauge may take up to five seconds to
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
ON/RUN position. the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is  The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
required to maintain normal vehicle opera-
tion and emissions compliance. If some- fuel filler door is located.  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF update after a refill if the temperature of the 3
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa- heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
tion is available in the instrument cluster gauge to update after a period of run time.
display section under the heading of DEF Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the
Warning Messages. gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 5. Fuel Gauge  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
1. Tachometer ON/RUN position. heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions  The fuel pump symbol points to Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the
per minute (RPM x 1000). the side of the vehicle where the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
2. Instrument Cluster Display fuel filler door is located. several drives.
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this 3
NOTE:
display shows the instrument cluster
 The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
display messages Ú page 109.
a large amount of full reserve. So the level Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
 The display always shows one of the main sensor will indicate a full reading even before display, which offers useful information to the
menu item after ignition is placed on. the tank is completely full. To put it another way, driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
3. Speedometer there’s additional storage capacity in the tank closing of a door will activate the display for
above the Full mark that’s not represented in viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
 Indicates vehicle speed.
the gauge. You may not see any movement in in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles designed to display important information about
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of (322 kilometers) in some cases. your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is interactive display located on the instrument
 The gauge may take up to five seconds to
required to maintain normal vehicle opera- panel, your instrument cluster display can show
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
tion and emissions compliance. If some- you how systems are working and give you
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF warnings when they are not. The steering wheel
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa- main menus and submenus. You can access the
tion is available in the instrument cluster specific information you want and make selections
display section under the heading of DEF and adjustments.
Warning Messages.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
CONTROLS
 Speedometer
The instrument cluster display features a driver
 Vehicle Info
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.  Driver Assist — If Equipped
 Fuel Economy
 Trip Info
 Trailer Tow
 Audio Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
 Messages
1 – Up Arrow Button
 Screen Set Up 2 – Right Arrow Button
 Commercial Settings — If Equipped 3 – Down Arrow Button
The system allows the driver to select information 4 – Left Arrow Button
by pushing the following instrument cluster display
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls control buttons located on the left side of the  Up Arrow Button
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls steering wheel:
Push and release the up arrow button to
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
 Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to

access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the right arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
 Down Arrow Button Oil Life Reset Procedure Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
Push and release the down arrow button to 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
scroll downward through the main menu items, ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
submenu screen, and vehicle settings. ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine). the engine).
 Left Arrow Button
2. Push and release the down arrow button to 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
Push and release the left arrow button to times within ten seconds.
scroll downward through the main menu to
access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
“Vehicle Info.” 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the 3
return to the main menu. ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
ignition to the OFF position.
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up
OIL L IFE R ESET or down to select “Oil Life.” NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change If the indicator message illuminates when you start
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
select “Reset”.
message will display in the instrument cluster reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
display after a single chime has sounded, to 5. Push and release the down arrow button to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. select “Yes,” then push and release the DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
The engine oil change indicator system is duty right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
cycle based, which means the engine oil change Push and release the up or down arrow
100%.
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your button until the desired selectable menu icon is
personal driving style. 6. Push and release the up arrow button to highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
exit the instrument cluster display screen. Speedometer
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display Push and release the up or down arrow
controls for the following procedure. button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the right arrow button to cycle the
display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info Driver Assist — If Equipped The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
Push and release the up or down arrow The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
following:
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push systems.  Distance Setting Change
and release the right arrow button to enter the Push and release the up or down arrow  System Cancel
submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in  Driver Override
directional prompts to access or reset any of the the instrument cluster display.  System Off
following Vehicle Info submenu items: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature  ACC Proximity Warning
 Tire Pressure
The instrument cluster display displays the current  ACC Unavailable Warning
 Coolant Temperature ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status. LaneSense — If Equipped
 Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the The instrument cluster display displays the current
 Oil Temperature
steering wheel) until one of the following displays LaneSense system settings. The information
 Oil Pressure displayed depends on LaneSense system status
in the instrument cluster display:
 Exhaust Brake — If Equipped and the conditions that need to be met.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
 Turbo Boost — If Equipped Fuel Economy
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
 Diesel Particulate Filter — If Equipped “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Push and release the up or down arrow
 Oil Life Adaptive Cruise Control Ready button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
 Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
and Hold the right arrow button to reset
 Battery Voltage setting has not been selected, the display will read
Average Fuel Economy.
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
 Gauge Summary  Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
 Engine Hours
steering wheel) and the following will display in the  Average Fuel Economy Value
instrument cluster display:  Range To Empty
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 121.
Trip A/Trip B  Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK Messages
button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence
Push and release the up or down arrow Ú page 236. Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the button until the Messages Menu item is
instrument cluster display. Push and release the  Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument highlighted. This feature shows the number of
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pres- stored warning messages. Push and release the
right arrow button to enter the submenus of Trip
sure for a connected trailer with sensors that
A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will right or left arrow button to cycle through
match the active trailer profile. When a low tire
display the following: stored messages.
is present, the low tire value will be displayed in
 Distance red, and the affected low tire will have a red Screen Setup Menu Item 3
 Average Fuel Economy glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed on the
Push and release the up or down arrow
center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display
 Elapsed Time button until the Screen Setup menu item is
screen.
Push and hold the right arrow button to reset all Audio
information. and release the right arrow button to enter the
Push and release the up or down arrow Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
Trailer Tow button until the Audio Menu icon/title is allows you to change what information is displayed
Push and release the up or down arrow highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This in the instrument cluster as well as the location
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is menu will display the audio source information, that information is displayed.
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push including the Song name, Artist name, and audio Current Gear
and release the right or left arrow button to source with an accompanying graphic.
 Off
cycle through the following trailer tow information: Phone Call Status
 On
 Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
Odometer
the OK button to reset the distance. pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.  Unit Without Decimal
 Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
NOTE:  Unit With Decimal
 Braking Output
The call status will temporarily replace the
 Trailer Type
previous media source information displayed on
 ITBM Gain the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Favorite Menu Upper Left and Upper Right Left Side and Right Side — If Equipped
Audio (Show/ Battery Coolant
Speedometer Vehicle Info None Range
Hide) Current MPG Voltage — If Time Temperature
Driver Assist Equipped Transmission
Fuel Economy Average MPG Menu Icon
(Show/Hide) — Screen Setup Trailer Trip — If Temperature
(Show/Hide) Average MPG Trip A Distance
If Equipped Equipped Oil Fuel Filter Life
Oil Life
Commercial Oil Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Trip Info Trailer Tow Oil Pressure —
Settings — If Temperature — Temperature —
(Show/Hide) (Show/Hide) If Equipped
Equipped If Equipped If Equipped
Lower Left and Lower Right— If Equipped
Vehicle Exhaust Brake Fuel Filter Life
Messages Settings — If — If Equipped — If Equipped Battery
None Time
Equipped Voltage
Outside Temp Oil Life Average MPG
Upper Center
NOTE: Range To Turbo Boost —
None Trip B Distance Trip A Distance Trip A Distance
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the right Empty If Equipped
arrow button to choose whether to show or hide Outside Temp Compass Trailer Trip Current MPG Compass Trailer Trip
this menu in the instrument cluster display. Range To
Time Audio Oil
Empty Trip B Distance Oil Pressure
Upper Left and Upper Right Temperature
Oil Life — Current MPG Average MPG Menu Title Transmission Exhaust Brake
None Trip B Distance Trailer Brake
If Equipped Speedometer Temperature — If Equipped
Outside Temp Trailer Brake — Turbo Boost — Coolant Fuel Filter Life
— If Equipped If Equipped If Equipped Temperature — If Equipped
Coolant
Range To Compass —
Temperature — Restore Defaults
Empty If Equipped
If Equipped  Cancel
 Restore
Commercial Settings — If Equipped exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly tion (CCV) filter element. The procedure for
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the clearing and resetting the "Perform Service"
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM indicator message is located in the appropriate
recall additional features when the transmission is
manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust Service Information.
in PARK (P).
system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate  Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now
Push and release the up or down arrow Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction — "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
button until Commercial Settings displays in the on your part. Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed in
instrument cluster display. the instrument cluster display if the exhaust
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and WARNING! particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
3
enter the Commercial Settings submenu. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive
Commercial Settings allows you to access the over materials that can burn. Such materials short duration and low speed driving cycles,
following features (if equipped): might be grass or leaves coming into contact your Cummins® diesel engine and exhaust
with your exhaust system. Do not park or after-treatment system may never reach the
 Backup Alarm
operate your vehicle in areas where your conditions required to remove the trapped
 ParkSense exhaust system can contact anything that can Particulate Matter (PM). If this occurs, the
 Aux Switches burn. “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
 PIN Setup
in the instrument cluster display. If this
NOTE: Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
message is displayed, you will hear one chime
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
to assist in alerting you of this condition
an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset. engine. The following messages may display in
your instrument cluster display: By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds
DIESEL M ESSAGES AND WARNINGS —  Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emis-
for as little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the
condition in the particulate filter system and
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL E NGINE sions maintenance at a set interval. To help
allow your Cummins® diesel engine and
remind you when this maintenance is due, the
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages exhaust after-treatment system to remove the
instrument cluster display will display “Perform
trapped Particulate Matter (PM) and restore the
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all diesel Service”. When the “Perform Service” message
system to normal operating condition.
emissions standards, resulting in one of the lowest is displayed in the instrument cluster display it is
emitting diesel engines ever produced. To achieve necessary to have the emissions maintenance
these emissions standards, your vehicle is performed. Emissions maintenance may
equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventila-
 Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process NOTE:  Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes)
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing During Warm-up — This message will display
is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by during start-up when the ambient temperature
condition until regeneration is completed. 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
 Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm
This message indicates that the DPF shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) up protection feature that may limit engine
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is and reduced engine power. Only an authorized performance after cold starting at low ambient
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in dealer will be able to correct this condition. temperatures. The length of time engine speed
alerting you of this condition. is limited is dependent upon engine coolant
CAUTION! temperature. Engine speed may be briefly
 Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now —
This message indicates regeneration has been See an authorized dealer, as damage to the limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant
disabled due to a system malfunction. At this exhaust system could occur soon with continued temperature below freezing conditions, and
point the engine Powertrain Control Module operation. may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approxi-
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument mately two minutes under more severe cold
panel will display a MIL light. conditions.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
 Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi-
CAUTION! The vehicle will display messages when a derate cate the vehicle coolant level is low
(engine power reduction) is activated to protect the Ú page 399.
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the engine during start-up in cold ambient
exhaust system could occur soon with continued temperatures. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
operation.
 Engine Power Reduced During Warm-up — This Messages
message will display during start-up when the There are four different messages which are
 Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C) displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
— This message indicates the PCM has derated and -10°F (-23°C). system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF,
the engine to limit the likelihood of permanent  Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds)
has experienced component failures, or when
damage to the after-treatment system. If this During Warm-up — This message will display tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
condition is not corrected and a dealer service is during start-up when the ambient temperature limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treat- is between -10°F (-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C). the DEF system is not serviced within less than
ment damage can occur. To correct this condi- 200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
tion it will be necessary to have your vehicle
serviced by your local authorized dealer.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display: to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at following warnings will display:
 DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).  Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
when the low level is reached, during vehicle NOTE: will display when the fault is initially detected,
start-up, and with increased frequency during A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be each time the vehicle is started, and periodically
vehicle operation. It will be accompanied by a required to restore normal vehicle operation. during driving. The message will be accompa-
single chime. Approximately 5 gallons (19 Although the vehicle will start normally and can be nied by a single chime. We recommend you
Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank when placed in gear after this message has been initially drive to your nearest authorized dealer and
this message is initially displayed. on pickup have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
3
displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since
applications, and approximately 7 gallons (26 the vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at  5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
Liters) are required on chassis-cab applications. a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). System See Dealer — This message will display
 Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning if the DEF system has not been serviced after
This message will continuously display if the Messages the “Service DEF System – See Dealer”
“DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and message is displayed. This message will contin-
the frequency of occurrence of the chime will There are five different messages which are uously display until the mileage counter reaches
increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic
DEF is added to the tank. system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, chime. The message will continue to countdown
has experienced component failures, or when until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is
 5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
Refuel Refill DEF — This message will continu- serviced. We recommend you drive to your
limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle
ously display when the counter reaches zero, the DEF system is not serviced within less than
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. serviced immediately.
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum NOTE:
speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following Under some circumstances this mileage counter
conditions to occur: may start with a value of less than 150 miles
(241 km). For example, if recurring faults are
 If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
detected in a time interval of less than 40 hours,
 If the vehicle is idled for an extended period the counter may restart at the value where it
of time, approximately one hour or greater. stopped when a previous fault was temporarily
 If the system detects that the level of fuel in remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km).
the tank has increased.
 5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This When load reduction is activated, the message
Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This message message will display when the fault is initially “Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
will continuously display when the mileage detected, each time the vehicle is started, and Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied periodically during driving. The message will be cluster.
by a periodic chime. accompanied by a single chime. We recom- These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum mend you drive to your nearest authorized low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
conditions to occur: as possible. sustain.
 If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted. BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER NOTE:
 If the vehicle is idled for an extended period MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD  The charging system is independent from load
of time, approximately one hour or greater. reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED nostic on the charging system continuously.
 If the system detects that the level of fuel in
the tank has increased. This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of indicate a problem with the charging system
 5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
the electrical system and status of the vehicle Ú page 120.
Dealer — This message will continuously display,
battery.
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
Although the vehicle can be started and placed In cases when the IBS detects charging system equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are affected by load reduction:
maximum speed of 5 mph. Your vehicle will deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
 Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
require towing, see an authorized dealer for take place to extend the driving time and distance
service. of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
turning off non-essential electrical loads.  HVAC System
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can Load reduction is only active when the engine is  115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
still be started. However, the vehicle will only running. It will display a message if there is a risk
 Audio and Telematics System
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph. of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or

more of the following conditions:
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
“Battery Saver Mode”) The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
During a trip: instrument panel together with a dedicated
electrical power to the vehicle system because
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
the electrical loads are larger than the capability  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: These indications are indicative and precautionary
of charging system. The charging system is still
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte- and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
functioning properly.
rior). Always refer to the information in this chapter in
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
 Check what may be plugged in to power
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales 3
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior will display first if applicable. The system check
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
menu may appear different based upon
Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving condi-  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). equipment options and current vehicle status.
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).  Check the audio settings (volume). Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
 Installing options like additional lights, upfitter After a trip:
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms RED WARNING LIGHTS
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was
and similar devices. Air Bag Warning Light
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
 Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review This warning light will illuminate to
long parking periods). specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
 The vehicle was parked for an extended period currents). turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
of time (weeks, months).  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, check when the ignition is placed in the
 The battery was recently replaced and was not driving time and parking time). ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
charged completely. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
 The vehicle should have service performed if air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
 The battery was discharged by an electrical load the message is still present during consecutive fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
left on when the vehicle was parked. trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
 The battery was used for an extended period
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
with the engine not running to supply radio, soon as possible.
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
Brake Warning Light NOTE: The light also will turn on when the parking brake
The light may flash momentarily during sharp is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
This warning light monitors various brake
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level position.
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake conditions. The vehicle should have service NOTE:
light turns on it may indicate that the performed, and the brake fluid level checked. This light shows only that the parking brake is
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock necessary. cation.
Brake System reservoir. Battery Charge Warning Light
WARNING!
If the light remains on when the parking brake has This warning light will illuminate when the
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is battery is not charging properly. If it stays
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates dangerous. Part of the brake system may have on while the engine is running, there may
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You be a malfunction with the charging
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / immediately. possible.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has This indicates a possible problem with the
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System electrical system or a related component.
been corrected. If the problem is related to the (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD Door Open Warning Light
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along This indicator will illuminate when a door
may be felt during each stop. with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS is ajar/open and not fully closed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking system is required.
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual NOTE:
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level chime.
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
in the master cylinder has dropped below a should then turn off unless the parking brake is
specified level. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Engine Coolant Temperature Oil Pressure Warning Light
Warning Light Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to
This warning light will illuminate to This warning light warns of an indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
indicate a problem with the ETC system. overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
If a problem is detected while the vehicle engine coolant temperature is too high, vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
is running, the light will either stay on or this indicator will illuminate and a single possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
flash depending on the nature of the problem. chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the chime will sound when this light turns on.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is 3
completely stopped and the transmission is placed minutes or until the engine is able to cool; corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off. whichever comes first. is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over checked under the hood.
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
Oil Temperature Warning Light
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
possible. This warning light will illuminate to
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
indicate the engine oil temperature is
NOTE: temperature reading does not return to normal,
high. If the light turns on while driving,
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake turn the engine off immediately and call for service
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
pedals are pressed at the same time. Ú page 379.
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Hood Open Warning Light return to normal levels.
running, immediate service is required and you
This warning light will illuminate when the Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
may experience reduced performance, an
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your This warning light indicates when the
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on driver or passenger seat belt is
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ NOTE: unbuckled. When the ignition is first
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
check. If the light does not come on during starting, chime. position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer. a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 323.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light — If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
If Equipped driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
This warning light will illuminate when the
system is not functioning and service is required as
Trailer Brake has been disconnected. This light will flash at a fast rate for soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
approximately 15 seconds when the system will continue to operate normally,
vehicle security system is arming, and assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
Transmission Temperature Warning then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
Light — If Equipped disarmed. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
This may occur with strenuous usage Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
Warning Light — If Equipped Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or Warning Light — If Equipped
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system. This warning light will indicate when the
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
Contact a local authorized dealer for ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
service Ú page 193. Light in the instrument cluster will come
WARNING! on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
Air Suspension Fault Warning RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Light — If Equipped activated. It should go out with the engine running.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is This light will illuminate when a fault is If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, detected with the air suspension system. with the engine running, a malfunction has been
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
components and cause a fire. remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
Light at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
CAUTION! authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
problem diagnosed and corrected.
Continuous driving with the Transmission light will turn on when the ignition is
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
eventually cause severe transmission damage position and may stay on for as long as
or transmission failure. four seconds.
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-  When the LaneSense system senses the lane Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
cator Light come on momentarily each time the has been approached and is in a lane departure If Equipped
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
RUN position. from solid white/green to flashing yellow This warning light will illuminate when the
Ú page 207. fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking filler cap to disengage the light. If the
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light light does not turn off, please see an
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. authorized dealer.
This warning light will illuminate when the
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an windshield washer fluid is low. Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator 3
ESC event.
Warning Light (MIL)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Low Fuel Warning Light The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light — If Equipped Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
When the fuel level reaches
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light will Diagnostic System called OBD II that
Each time the ignition is turned to turn on, and remain on until fuel is monitors engine and automatic
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC added. transmission control systems. This warning light
system will be on, even if it was turned off will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
previously. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel position before engine start. If the bulb does not
Warning. come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Low Coolant Level Warning Light to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The LaneSense system provides the
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
driver with visual and steering torque
vehicle coolant level is low. cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
out of its lane unintentionally without the
the light stays on through several typical driving
use of a turn signal.
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift normally and will not require towing.
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light — Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
alert serious conditions that could lead to If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Cruise Control System is not
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
indicate when a rear axle locker fault has functioning properly and service is
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
been detected. required. Contact an authorized dealer.
occurs.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
WARNING! Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
This light will illuminate when there is a
Light — If Equipped fault in the sway bar disconnect system.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher This warning light will illuminate to
temperatures than in normal operating indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive Warning System. Contact an authorized Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
slowly or park over flammable substances such dealer for service Ú page 313. Warning Light
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could Service LaneSense Warning Light — The warning light switches on and a
result in death or serious injury to the driver, If Equipped message is displayed to indicate that the
occupants or others. tire pressure is lower than the
This warning light will illuminate when the recommended value and/or that slow
LaneSense system is not operating and pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
CAUTION! requires service. Please see an tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
authorized dealer. guaranteed.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Should one or more tires be in the condition
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel This warning light will illuminate to signal mentioned above, the display will show the
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, a fault with the 4WD system. If the light indications corresponding to each tire.
severe catalytic converter damage and power stays on or comes on during driving, it
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is means that the 4WD system is not
required. functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

CAUTION! proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The TPMS has been optimized for the original
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the even if underinflation has not reached the level to equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure and warning have been established for the tire
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using telltale. size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS system operation or sensor damage may result
authorized dealer as soon as possible. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system when using replacement equipment that is not
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket 3
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
and then remain continuously illuminated. This become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle tire sealant it is recommended that you take
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
a different size than the size indicated on the
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sensor function checked.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
for those tires.
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
installation of replacement or alternate tires or Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from Indicator Light — If Equipped
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the This light will illuminate when the air
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should suspension system is set to the Alternate
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and Trailer Height setting Ú page 168.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Cargo Light — If Equipped Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when This light indicates when the front, rear,
This light will illuminate when the Bed the cargo light is activated by pushing the or both axles have been locked. The
Lowering mode procedure is complete cargo light button on the headlight telltale will display the lock icon on the
Ú page 168. switch. front and rear axles to indicate the
current lock status.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator
Air Suspension Payload Protection Light — If Equipped Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Indicator Light — If Equipped Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when a
This indicator light will illuminate to derate (engine power reduction) is The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if
indicate that the maximum payload may activated for protection of the the vehicle is low on DEF Ú page 410.
have been exceeded or load leveling turbocharger in cold ambient
cannot be achieved at its current ride temperatures.
height. Protection mode will automatically be NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
selected in order to “protect” the air suspension Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
system, air suspension adjustment is limited due Light — If Equipped power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
to payload. This indicator light will illuminate when mode and the front and rear driveshafts
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been are disengaged from the powertrain.
activated, and is in full strength mode
Indicator Light — If Equipped Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 147.
This light will blink and alert the driver This light indicates when the rear axle
that the vehicle is changing to a higher Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off lock has been activated Ú page 160.
ride height Ú page 168. Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering that Forward Collision Warning is off. 4WD Lock Indicator Light
Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
This light will blink and alert the driver is in the 4WD LOCK mode. The front and
that the vehicle is changing to a lower rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
ride height Ú page 168. together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed Ú page 160.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped TOW/HAUL Indicator Light GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle This indicator light will illuminate when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked Target Light — If Equipped
together forcing the front and rear This will display when the ACC is set and
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — a vehicle in front is detected
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide If Equipped Ú page 193.
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 160. This indicator light will illuminate to 3
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
been activated Ú page 307. No Target Detected Indicator Light —
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD HIGH mode. The front and If Equipped
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the Adaptive
together forcing the front and rear The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will Cruise Control is SET and there is no
wheels to rotate at the same speed. illuminate when there is water detected vehicle in front detected Ú page 193.
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when damage.
This indicator light will illuminate when
Snowplow Mode has been activated Wait To Start Light — If Equipped the cruise control is set to the desired
Ú page 238.
This indicator light will illuminate for speed Ú page 191.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when duration may be longer based on colder Light — If Equipped
the front sway bar is disconnected. operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start This indicator light will illuminate when
until telltale is no longer displayed Ú page 134. the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
NOTE: activated, and has switched to Automatic
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the mode Ú page 147.
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped Turn Signal Indicator Lights Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO mode is When the left or right turn signal is This indicator light will illuminate when
active. activated, the turn signal indicator will the cruise control is ready, but not set
flash independently and the Ú page 191.
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up Light — If Equipped
the front fog lights are on. (right).
This indicator shows when the HDC
NOTE: feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either be armed when the transfer case is in the
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates turn signal on. 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
solid green when both lane markings then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these conditions are not
have been detected and the system is  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
“armed” and ready to provide visual and either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure  If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
occurs Ú page 207. side of the activated turn signal will also illumi- LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
nate to provide additional light when turning. When the LaneSense system is ON, but
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
This indicator light will illuminate when WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS illuminates solid white. This occurs when
the parking lights or headlights are only left, right, or neither lane line has
turned on. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
Light — If Equipped system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
This light will illuminate when the vehicle an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
equipped with ACC has been turned on detected lane line Ú page 207.
but not set Ú page 193.
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS If any of these systems require service, the OBD II ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
This indicator light will illuminate to information to assist your service technician in Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
indicate that the high beam headlights making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually connection port to allow access to information
are on. With the low beams activated, be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized related to the performance of your emissions
push the multifunction lever forward dealer for service as soon as possible. controls. Authorized service technicians may need
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high to access this information to assist with the
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward CAUTION! diagnosis and service of your vehicle and 3
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause emissions system Ú page 246.
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever further damage to the emission control
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to system. It could also affect fuel economy and WARNING!
pass" scenario. driveability. The vehicle must be serviced  ONLY an authorized service technician should
before any emissions tests can be performed. connect equipment to the OBD II connection
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated running, severe catalytic converter damage service your vehicle.
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This and power loss will soon occur. Immediate  If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
system monitors the performance of the service is required. OBD II connection port, such as a
emissions, engine, and transmission control driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent  Be possible that vehicle systems,
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine including safety related systems, could be
emissions well within current government impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
regulations. occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
 Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,

but do not crank or start the engine.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS NOTE: vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions start this test over.
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
control system. Failure to pass could prevent 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the recheck with the above test routine may then
vehicle registration. ON position, you will see the Malfunction indicate that the system is now ready.
For states that require an Inspection and Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two normal vehicle operation you should have your
functioning and is not on when the things will happen: vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
ready for testing. then return to being fully illuminated until MIL is on with the engine running.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was This means that your vehicle's OBD II
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery system is not ready and you should not
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system proceed to the I/M station.
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
your vehicle may fail the test. fully illuminated until you place the ignition
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, in the off position or start the engine. This
which you can use prior to going to the test station. means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, ready and you can proceed to the I/M
you must do the following: station.
131
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE WARNING!
TIP START F EATURE
ENGINE  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
or in a location accessible to children, and do
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, The starter motor will continue to run and will
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten automatically disengage when the engine is
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
your seat belts. running.
RUN position. A child could operate power
The starter should not be operated for more than windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION 4
10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds
between such intervals will protect the starter from  Do not leave children or animals inside parked This feature allows the driver to operate the
overheating. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
may cause serious injury or death. the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
WARNING! in the passenger compartment.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK START/STOP B UTTON
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
lock the vehicle. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
driving range.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with STOP Button
NOTE:
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- 1. The transmission must be in PARK.
 This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the  If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, 3. The system takes over and attempts to start
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
selector. unless the Manual Park Release has been acti- starter will disengage automatically after
vated Ú page 378. 10 seconds.
(Continued)
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine NOTE: AUTOPARK — R OTARY S HIFTER AND
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button again. START/STOP button is pushed once with the
8-SPEED T RANSMISSION O NLY
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
NOTE: will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph on the following pages occur. It is a back up system
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. and should not be relied upon as the primary
erator pedal. Ú page 132. method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With PARK.
Button Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push NEUTRAL Position) are outlined on the following pages.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position. to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, WARNING!
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
without starting the vehicle and use the the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
START/STOP button must be held for two
accessories, follow these directions: CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position. that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to the instrument cluster display and near the
remain in the ACC position until the gear place the ignition to the ACC position. gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a precaution, always apply the parking brake
twice to the OFF position.
second time to place the ignition to the ON/ when exiting the vehicle.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the RUN position.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), designed to replace the need to shift your
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
Not In Park” message and the engine will should not be relied upon as the primary
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
the PARK position, or it could roll. into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then 4WD Low — If Equipped
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions NOTE: vehicle in 4WD Low.
are met: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the displayed in the instrument cluster.
8-speed transmission “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
Additional customer warnings will be given when
not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be
 Vehicle is not in PARK all of these conditions are met:
returned to “P” to select desired gear.
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the  Vehicle is not in PARK
 Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC vehicle may AutoPark.  Driver’s door is ajar
4
NOTE: AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is  Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
driver turns the ignition switch off.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the WARNING! PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may cluster display and near the shifter. As an added
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
AutoPark. precaution, always apply the parking brake when
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph exiting the vehicle.
are met: (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always
I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. If the engine fails to start after you have followed
 Vehicle is not in PARK
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less the floor and hold it there while the engine is
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
 Driver’s door is ajar the engine is flooded.
 Brake pedal is not pressed
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, The starter should not be operated for more than
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, but not have enough power to continue running 25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, when the ignition button/key is released. If this between such intervals will protect the starter from
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator overheating.
Starting” procedure. pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once WARNING!
WARNING! the engine is running smoothly.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into If the engine shows no sign of starting after a vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
the throttle body air inlet opening in an 10 second period of engine cranking with the may cause serious injury or death.
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure. the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- COLD WEATHER OPERATION lock the vehicle.
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
converter and once the engine has started, To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. use of an externally powered electric engine block
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, others could be seriously or fatally injured.
recommended.
booster cables may be used to obtain a start Children should be warned not to touch the
from a booster battery or the battery in AFTER S TARTING parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
another vehicle. This type of start can be selector.
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 376. The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
CAUTION! STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. your seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine 4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
prior to the engine starting, remove your foot vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing
Start the engine with the transmission in the from the brake pedal and push the ENGINE the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before START/STOP button again. the engine off. The ignition will remain in the
shifting to any driving range. ACC position.
Tip Start Feature NOTE: 5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
 Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
the accelerator pedal. row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is  Under cold weather conditions, the engine may remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
running. not immediately crank if the “Wait To Start” tell- position) if the engine is turned off when the 4
tale is illuminated. This is normal operation. For transmission is not in PARK.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
the vehicle will automatically crank when the NOTE:
This feature allows the driver to operate the
“Wait To Start” time has elapsed Ú page 136. If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
not running) position and the transmission is in
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE PARK, the system will automatically time out after
in the passenger compartment.
START/STOP BUTTON 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition return to
Normal Starting the OFF position.
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
Not In Park” message and the engine will
3. The system takes over and attempts to start remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the the PARK position, or it could roll.
starter will disengage automatically after
25 seconds.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS — Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except: CAUTION!
WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION) 1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button with Do not crank the engine for more than
the driver’s foot on the brake will move the 25 seconds at a time or starter motor damage
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
ignition from OFF or ACC to ON/RUN, and will may result. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF,
illuminate the “Wait To Start” telltale. The position and wait at least two minutes for the
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition switch
engine will not immediately crank, this is starter to cool before repeating start procedure.
positions without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories follow these steps: normal operation.
2. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for a 5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
period of time that varies depending on the oil pressure.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to engine temperature. 6. Release the parking brake and drive.
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a instrument cluster will additionally display a NOTE:
second time to change the ignition to the gauge or bar whose initial length represents  Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
ON/RUN position. the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third will decrease until it disappears when the Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
time to return the ignition to the OFF position. “Wait to Start” time has elapsed. improve engine warm-up.
 The engine will not automatically crank after the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure — CAUTION! engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes off if a door
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, or the hood is ajar.
66° F (–18° C to 19° C) DO NOT START the engine before you drain the  If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
NOTE: water from the fuel filters to avoid engine ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
The temperature displayed in the instrument damage Ú page 406. Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
manifold air temperature Ú page 109. When 4. After the engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes position for at least five seconds and then back
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the off, the engine will automatically crank. ON. Repeat steps 1 through 6 of “Keyless Enter
“Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air
intake air heater system is active. Temperature 0° F To 66° F (–18° C to 19° C).”
EXTREME COLD W EATHER 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
position and watch the instrument panel
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped cluster lights. MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F TO
with several features designed to assist cold 66°F (–18°C TO 19°C)
weather starting and operation: CAUTION!
NOTE:
 The engine block heater is a resistance heater If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, The temperature displayed in the instrument
installed in the water jacket of the engine just DO NOT START the engine before you drain the cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
above and behind the oil filter. It requires a water from the fuel filters to avoid engine manifold air temperature Ú page 109. When
110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a damage Ú page 406. engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
“Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the
NOTE: 4. Place the ignition switch in the START position intake air heater system is active. 4
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed and crank the engine. Do not press the Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords accelerator during starting. procedure except:
are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
1. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for
 A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings CAUTION! a period of time that varies depending on the
aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a engine temperature.
built-in thermostat. Do not crank the engine for more than 25
seconds at a time or starter motor damage may 2. While the “Wait To Start” telltale is on, the
 An intake air heater system both improves result. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF instrument cluster will additionally display a
engine starting and reduces the amount of position and wait at least two minutes for the gauge or bar whose initial length represents
white smoke generated by a warming engine. starter to cool before repeating start procedure. the full “Wait To Start” time period. Its length
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE — will decrease until it disappears when the
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has “Wait To Start” time has elapsed.
ENGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
turned off.
ABOVE 66° F (19° C) CAUTION!
6. Release the parking brake.
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
starting the engine. DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
1. Always apply the parking brake.
damage Ú page 406.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.
3. After the “Wait To Start” telltale goes off, place driver’s foot should be fully removed from the NOTE:
the ignition switch in the START position. Do brake pedal prior to pushing the start button If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting,
not press the accelerator during starting. again in order for the ignition to move directly to additional engine run time may be required to
off. maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory
CAUTION!  If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left level.
Do not crank the engine for more than ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To 1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the
25 seconds at a time or starter motor damage Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air ignition must be turned to the OFF position for
may result. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF at least five seconds and then to the ON/RUN
position and wait at least two minutes for the position for at least five seconds and then back position to recycle the intake air heater.
starter to cool before repeating start procedure. ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting Proce- NOTE:
dure – Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
66°F (–18°C to 19°C).” mance will result if intake air heater is not recycled.
4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil
Pressure Warning Light has turned off. STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE 2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more than
5. Release the parking brake and drive. MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE B ELOW two minutes pass between the time the “Wait
NOTE: 0°F (-18°C) To Start” telltale turns off and the engine is
started, recycle the intake air heater by turning
 Engine idle speed will automatically increase to In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it
the ignition switch to the OFF position for at
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater
least five seconds and then back to the
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to twice before attempting to start the engine. This
ON/RUN position.
improve engine warm-up. can be accomplished by turning the ignition off for
at least 5 seconds and then back to the ON/RUN 3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
 Automatic equipped vehicles with optional
position after the “Wait To Start” telltale has exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ – If the start button is
turned off, but before the engine is started. air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is
pushed once while in PARK with the ignition off
However, excessive cycling of the intake air heater complete, the intake air heater will shut off.
and driver’s foot on the brake pedal, the vehicle
will automatically crank and start after the Wait will result in damage to the heater elements or 4. If the engine is cranked for more than
to Start time has elapsed. If it is desired to abort reduced battery voltage. 10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
the start process before it completes, the
NOTE: The engine is equipped with an automatic electric

air preheating system. If the instructions in this
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
 Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry manual are followed, the engine should start in all Observe the following when the engine is
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to conditions. operating:
improve engine warm-up.  All message center lights are off.
WARNING!
 When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa)
into the fuel system. If your engine has run out of vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up at idle.
fuel Ú page 408. may cause serious injury or death.
 Voltmeter operation:
 If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left  When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi- The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at 4
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and various engine temperatures. This cycling
by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position lock the vehicle. operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
for at least five seconds and then back ON. intake manifold heater system. The number of
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat
– Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F to 66°F
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is operation can run for several minutes, and then
(-18°C to 19°C)” Ú page 136.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
STARTING FLUIDS others could be seriously or fatally injured. stabilize.
Children should be warned not to touch the The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
WARNING! parking brake, brake pedal or the gear the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a
selector. noticeable reduction in blower motor speed.
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never be
used in the Cummins® diesel engine (see  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel, flammable or in a location accessible to children, and do
liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
canister, air intake piping, or turbocharger inlet in with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or
an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
a flash fire and explosion causing serious windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
personal injury and engine damage.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS NOTE:  Under some circumstances increased engine

 Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or noise may be audible in the seconds following a
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F cold start. This is most likely to occur when using
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in
(0°C) may require special considerations. The fuel that isn't blended for the ambient tempera-
a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
following charts suggest these options: ture present. This may occur on an unseason-
 Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a
Fuel Operating Range ably cold day or when a truck is fueled in a
blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number warmer climate and driven to a colder climate.
NOTE: 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces The noise can typically be prevented by using
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY. the temperature at which wax crystals form in Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as
fuel. recommended (see Fuel Operating Range
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the Chart).
pump at the fuel station.
Engine Oil Usage
 The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 400.
Diesel Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage Winter Front Cover Usage
Ú page 465. A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used
 If Climatized or Diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is in ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
not available, and you are operating below especially during extended idle conditions. This
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or total grille opening in varying ambient
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart). cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the
full open position to allow air flow to the charge air
Fuel Operating Range Chart cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler.
When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
*Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
only be used where extended arctic conditions cold weather cover is available from your Mopar®
(0°F/-18°C) exist. dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage temperature below freezing conditions, and may If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
be limited to 1000 RPM for up to approximately on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
two minutes under more severe cold conditions. hours, the system will automatically enter an
battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For
NOTE: emissions operating mode that will increase the
the same decrease in temperature, the engine
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant engine idle speed to 900 RPM. While in this mode,
requires twice as much power to crank at the same
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine which is designed to help maintain the diesel
RPM. The use of 120 Volt AC powered battery
idle speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after particulate filter, the engine idle speed will return
blankets will greatly increase starting capability at
two minutes of idle, if the following conditions are to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small
low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are
met: change in engine tone or a slight change in engine
available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
performance while accelerating may also be
Engine Warm-Up  Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). 4
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is  Automatic transmission is in PARK. This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine  Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil  Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle. Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up. voltage monitoring Idle-Up feature. If a load is
 Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly
NOTE: placed on the electrical system while the truck is in
improve warm-up rate and will help keep the
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can park, this feature will attempt to maintain normal
engine close to operating temperature during
result in excessive white smoke and poor engine system voltage by automatically increasing engine
extended idle.
performance. No-load engine speeds should be idle speed. You may notice several consecutive
kept under 1,000 RPM during the warm-up period, ENGINE IDLING increases in idle speed, up to a maximum of
especially in cold ambient temperature conditions. 1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to utilize
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm-up be harmful to your engine because combustion maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed
protection feature that may limit engine chamber temperatures can drop so low that the will return to normal when either the electrical load
performance after cold starting at low ambient fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.
temperatures. The length of time engine speed is combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
limited is dependent upon engine coolant piston rings, engine valves, and injector nozzles. NOTE:
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, For instrument cluster display messages related to
to 1000 RPM after starting with coolant diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the the vehicle's exhaust system Ú page 109.
engine.
Idle-Up Feature 3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the Diesel equipped vehicles also have an exhaust
CANCEL button, push the On/Off button, or after-treatment system to reduce emissions
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
press the brake pedal. utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and a
help increase cylinder temperatures and provide
Selective Reduction Catalyst (SCR). The SCR
additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may
still cause the exhaust aftertreatment system to NOISE reduces Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) using the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system. DEF is injected directly
not properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle Diesel engines can create noises that may seem into the SCR through a dosing module. This
time should be avoided. concerning. The nature of a diesel engine is process will create a clicking sound and at times,
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control buttons compression ignition where compressed air and will make noise even with the vehicle shut off. This
to increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the fuel are mixed and ignited. Weather, barometric is normal as the DEF dosing module is purging
vehicle's interior. pressure, altitude, and temperature will affect how DEF. If at any time the Check Engine Light is on,
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking fuel is ignited in the engine. Engines will sound please visit an authorized dealer.
brake applied, and the engine running, push different from day to day or previous model years.
the On/Off button to the ON position, then Clicking, ticking, or light knocking is normal and will STOPPING THE ENGINE
push the SET (-) button. change from day to day, as the engine breaks in,
and can vary with changes in ambient Idle the engine a few minutes before routine
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To temperature. Clicking sound from under the hood shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine
increase the RPM, push and hold the RES (+) shortly after vehicle shutdown is normal as three to five minutes before shutting it down. This
button and the idle speed will increase to actuators such as the EGR valve are cycled. Fuel idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
approximately 1,500 RPM. To decrease the pump noise may increase during low speed/light to carry excess heat away from the combustion
RPM, push and hold the SET (-) button and the load conditions when ambient temperature is chamber, bearings, internal components, and
idle speed will decrease to approximately above 100°F (38°C), and when fuel tank level is turbocharger. This is especially important for
1,100 RPM. below 10% which is a normal condition of the fuel turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to
system and controls strategy. the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
4
I DLE SHUTDOWN PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE OPERATING P RECAUTIONS
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will S PEED Avoid Overheating The Engine
automatically shutdown when the truck has been This feature allows the owner to set a maximum The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze)
idling for a set period of time when the engine is at vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and (a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water)
operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set must not exceed the normal range of the
5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes. between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 87 mph temperature gauge 240°F (116°C) with a
See an authorized dealer to enable this feature. (140 km/h). 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
NOTE: NOTE: Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)
The idle shutdown timer is disabled while the PTO DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value temperature indicated during operation will be to
is active. greater than what the vehicle tires are rated for. the left of center in the normal range of the gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil  Sudden change, outside the normal operating
Pressure range, in the engine operating temperature.
Continual operation at low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature below the normal range When the engine is at normal operating  Excessive smoke.
on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be harmful to the temperature, the minimum oil pressures required  Oil pressure drop.
engine. Low engine coolant (antifreeze) are:
temperature can cause incomplete combustion
which allows carbon and varnish to form on piston Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa) ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa) The engine block heater warms the engine, and
can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
and causing rapid wear to the engine. cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
CAUTION! outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS The engine block heater cord is routed behind the
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
To reduce potential for engine and transmission front bumper and accessible through the right hole
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
overheating in high ambient temperature of the air dam.
could result in immediate and severe engine
conditions, take the following actions: The engine block heater must be plugged in at
damage.
 City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis- least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle on the engine.
speed. Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a
 Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Parts tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for
 Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
All engine failures give some warning before the storage when not in use for the Winter months.
gear. parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in During Winter months, remove the heater cord
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.
 Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily. engine requires service. Some important clues are: NOTE:
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely. The block heater will require 110 Volt AC and
 Sudden loss of power. 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
 Unusual engine noises.
 Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Block Heater Usage  Use the appropriate transmission gear to

CAUTION! prevent engine lugging.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
engine block heater usage is recommended. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral  Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
Oil in the engine or damage may result. indicators.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C),
engine block heater usage is required.  Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
NOTE:  Vary throttle position at highway speeds when
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — A new engine may consume some oil during its first carrying or towing significant weight.
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
GASOLINE ENGINE should be considered a normal part of the break-in NOTE:
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often no load operation will extend the time before the 4
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
vehicle. during the break in period. Add oil as required.
and power may be seen at this time.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — For additional vehicle break-in requirements
Ú page 232.
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are DIESEL ENGINE Because of the construction of the Cummins®
desirable.
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within require a break-in period due to its construction. loaded operating conditions which allow the
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good Normal operation is allowed, providing the engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low following recommendations are followed: the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
 Warm up the engine before placing it under
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory load.
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated  Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
climate conditions under which vehicle operations periods.
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 468.
PARKING BRAKE NOTE:

WARNING!
 When the parking brake is applied and the
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the transmission is placed in gear, the Brake  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is for the parking brake. Always apply the
leave the transmission in PARK. detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. parking brake fully when parked to guard
The foot-operated parking brake is located below Fully release the parking brake before against vehicle movement and possible injury
the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To attempting to move the vehicle. or damage.
apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking  This light only shows that the parking brake is  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull applied. It does not show the degree of brake access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
the parking brake release handle. application. tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the number of reasons. A child or others could be
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade seriously or fatally injured.
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
the parking brake before placing the gear selector or in a location accessible to children, and do
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake A child could operate power windows, other
should always be applied whenever the driver is controls, or move the vehicle.
not in the vehicle.
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
Parking Brake Release brake failure and a collision.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition  Always fully apply the parking brake when
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
instrument cluster will illuminate. damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not
parking brake released, a brake system recommended and could lead to engine
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system damage.
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE For optimum braking power it is recommended to
use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) The exhaust brake feature can also be used to
Exhaust Brake Switch
reduce the engine warm-up time. To use the 4
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking)
feature is to supply negative (braking) torque from Once the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated exhaust brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle
the engine. Typically, the engine braking is used and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph must be stopped or moving less than 5 mph
for, but not limited to, vehicle towing applications (8 km/h); the exhaust brake will automatically (8 km/h), the Exhaust Brake Indicator must be on,
where vehicle braking can be achieved by the operate when the driver removes pressure from and the coolant temperature must be below
internal engine power, thereby sparing the the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is most 180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
mechanical brakes of the vehicle. effective when the engine RPM is higher. The 60°F (16°C).
automatic transmission will downshift more Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
aggressively in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust
 Vehicle driving control. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology
brake is enabled to increase brake performance.
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust
 Reduced brake fade. braking characteristics during downhill descents.
WARNING!
 Longer brake life. Although it can apply full exhaust braking force if
 Faster cab warm-up. Do not use the exhaust brake feature when needed, Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake may
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the not apply obvious braking if the vehicle speed is
The exhaust brake feature will only function when increased engine braking can cause the rear not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
the driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full
brake button until the Exhaust Brake Indicator is with the possible loss of vehicle control, which Exhaust Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.
illuminated. Normal (Full Strength) exhaust brake may cause an accident possibly resulting in
mode is indicated by a yellow Exhaust Brake personal injury or death.
Indicator.
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled

by pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center WARNING! WARNING!
stack) again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust  The transmission may not engage PARK if the  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
Brake has been turned on. The Exhaust Brake vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
Indicator in the instrument cluster display will complete stop before shifting to PARK, and key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
change from Yellow to Green when Automatic verify that the transmission gear position indi-
“Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled. Pushing the  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
exhaust brake button again will toggle the exhaust access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
brake mode to off. dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
Children should be warned not to touch the
You must press and hold the brake pedal while NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
shifting out of PARK. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing sion gear selector.
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
WARNING! quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
something. Only shift into gear when the
for the parking brake. Always apply the position. A child could operate power
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
pressing the brake pedal.
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
move the transmission gear selector out of
always come to a complete stop, then apply
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
sure the transmission is in PARK before
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
exiting the vehicle.
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
(Continued) sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM selector position and the actual transmission gear
following precautions are not observed: This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that (for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK the position indicator will blink continuously until
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. the requested shift can be completed.
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The electronically controlled transmission adapts
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
idle speed. NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle with environmental and road conditions. The
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your is stopped or moving at low speeds. transmission electronics are self-calibrating; 4
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION — be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
I F E QUIPPED and precision shifts will develop within a few
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
electronic gear selector located on the instrument
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently pedal when shifting between these gears.
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
leaving the vehicle without placing the rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
the OFF position. low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
NOTE: once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the DRIVE range for normal driving.
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, NOTE:

REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
WARNING!
downshifts can be made using the Electronic allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the GEAR ating. This is especially important when the engine for the parking brake. Always apply the
“-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering wheel) is cold. parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
while in the DRIVE position will select the highest PARK (P) guard against vehicle movement and possible
available transmission gear, and will display that injury or damage.
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc This range supplements the parking brake by
Ú page 153. Some models will display both the locking the transmission. The engine can be  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
while in ERS mode. while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking move the transmission gear selector out of
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake sure the transmission is in PARK before
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an exiting the vehicle.
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
on an uphill grade. complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
NOTE: verify that the transmission gear position indi-
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
transfer case is in a drive position. blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
When exiting the vehicle, always:
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector  Apply the parking brake.
(Continued)
 Shift the transmission into PARK.
Gear Ranges
 Turn the engine off.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
 Remove the key fob.
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
The following indicators should be used to ensure

WARNING! WARNING! that you have properly engaged the transmission
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with into the PARK position:
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-  Look at the transmission gear position display
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing dren to be in a vehicle unattended is and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or and is not blinking.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose others could be seriously or fatally injured.
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the
control of the vehicle and hit someone or Children should be warned not to touch the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
something. Only shift into gear when the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly sion gear selector. REVERSE (R)
pressing the brake pedal.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. 4
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could (or in a location accessible to children), and do Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN to a complete stop.
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while position. A child could operate power NEUTRAL (N)
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
always come to a complete stop, then apply prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the CAUTION! PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle WARNING!
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
against unwanted movement.
this can damage the drivetrain. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
 Before moving the transmission gear selector
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the practices that limit your response to changing
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
(Continued) damage to the gear selector could result. of the vehicle and have a collision.
During extremely cold temperatures NOTE:

CAUTION! (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation In cases where the instrument cluster message
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any may be modified depending on engine and indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL transmission temperature as well as vehicle engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
can cause severe transmission damage. speed. Normal operation will resume once the desired location (preferably, at an authorized
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable dealer).
For Recreational Towing Ú page 240. level. 1. Stop the vehicle.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 381. Transmission Limp Home Mode 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
Transmission function is monitored electronically not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
DRIVE (D) for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
This range should be used for most city and that could result in transmission damage, engine turns off.
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts Transmission Limp Home mode is activated. In this
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The mode, the transmission may operate only in
transmission automatically upshifts through all certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle 5. Restart the engine.
forward gears. performance may be severely degraded and the 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such engine may stall. In some situations, the problem is no longer detected, the
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading transmission may not re-engage if the engine is transmission will return to normal operation.
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the NOTE:
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range instrument cluster will inform the driver of the Even if the transmission can be reset, we
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear more serious conditions, and indicate what actions recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
range Ú page 153. Under these conditions, using may be necessary. your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
a lower gear range will improve performance and In the event of a momentary problem, the dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
extend transmission life by reducing excessive transmission can be reset to regain all forward condition of your transmission. If the transmission
shifting and heat build-up. gears by performing the following steps: cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode

The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
highest available gear when the transmission is in a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through performance and reduce the potential for
the lower gears normally. transmission overheating or failure due to
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at excessive shifting.
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears. ERS Control 4
Tapping the GEAR “–” switch (on the steering 1 — GEAR “+” Switch
wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current 2 — GEAR “–” Switch
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the GEAR “–” or GEAR “+” switch will change the To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR
top available gear. “+” switch until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
WARNING! TOW/HAUL Switch

Do not downshift for additional engine braking The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
causing a collision or personal injury. second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
The electronically controlled transmission provides NOTE:

WARNING! a precise shift schedule. The transmission After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat ating. This is especially important when the engine
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision is cold.
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the shifts will develop within a few hundred miles PARK (P)
possible loss of vehicle control, which may (kilometers).
This range supplements the parking brake by
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when locking the transmission. The engine can be
injury or death. the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
pedal when shifting between these gears.
6-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION — brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
I F EQUIPPED REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
Pickup models may use either AS69RC Manual downshifts can be made using the otherwise the load on the transmission locking
transmission, or the 68RFE transmission (which Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
has no PTO access cover). Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
The transmission gear position display (located in steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission select the highest available transmission gear, and grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc. Ú page 153. Some models will When exiting the vehicle, always:
right side of the steering column. You must press
display both the selected gear limit, and the actual  Apply the parking brake.
the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of
PARK Ú page 149. To drive, move the gear current gear, while in ERS mode.  Shift the transmission into PARK.
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE Gear Ranges  Turn the engine off.
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting  Remove the key fob.
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
out of PARK. NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute  Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
for the parking brake. Always apply the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all (or in a location accessible to children), and do
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped
guard against vehicle movement and possible the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or
injury or damage. always come to a complete stop, then apply ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
the parking brake, shift the transmission into windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
(key removal) position (or, with Keyless CAUTION! 4
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
Enter ‘n Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.  Before moving the transmission gear selector
position), the transmission is locked in PARK,
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or securing the vehicle against unwanted
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than movement.
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure could result.
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
control of the vehicle and hit someone or key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
something. Only shift into gear when the  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with this can damage the drivetrain.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
pressing the brake pedal. dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
(Continued) dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure range Ú page 153. Under these conditions, using
that you have properly engaged the transmission WARNING! a lower gear range will improve performance and
into the PARK position: Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the extend transmission life by reducing excessive
 When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifting and heat build-up.
toward you and move it all the way counterclock- practices that limit your response to changing If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
wise until it stops. traffic or road conditions. You might lose control operating limits, the powertrain controller will
of the vehicle and have a collision. modify the transmission shift schedule and expand
 Release the gear selector and make sure it is
fully seated in the PARK gate. the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due
 Look at the transmission gear position display CAUTION! to overheating.
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL danger of overheating, the Transmission
gear selector will not move out of PARK. can cause severe transmission damage. Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the
REVERSE (R) transmission may operate differently until the
For Recreational Towing Ú page 240.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. transmission cools down.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 381. NOTE:
to a complete stop. Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
NEUTRAL (N) DRIVE (D) vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a
This range should be used for most city and steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The can impose a significant additional heat load on
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
transmission automatically upshifts through all the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
forward gears. to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a
if you must exit the vehicle.
grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading generation.
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
During cold temperatures, transmission operation Transmission Limp Home Mode 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
may be modified depending on engine and 5. Restart the engine.
Transmission function is monitored electronically
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
that could result in transmission damage, problem is no longer detected, the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
Transmission Limp Home mode is activated. In this transmission will return to normal operation.
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
mode, the transmission remains in FOURTH gear
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
(for 68RFE transmission) or THIRD gear (for NOTE:
warm Ú page 159. On Pickup models with 68RFE
AS69RC transmission) regardless of which forward Even if the transmission can be reset, we
transmission, top overdrive gear is also inhibited
gear is selected. If an AS69RC-equipped truck recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
until the transmission fluid is warm, and during
enters Limp Home mode at highway speeds, it will your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or 4
initially engage FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
to a speed where third gear can be engaged. PARK, condition of your transmission. If the transmission
direct gears only. On trucks with AS69RC
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be required.
inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F (5°C),
illuminated. Limp Home mode allows the vehicle to
and during very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
be driven to an authorized dealer for service
below), operation may briefly be limited to third The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
without damaging the transmission.
gear only. During this condition, the ability of the highest available gear when the transmission is in
vehicle to accelerate under heavily loaded In the event of a momentary problem, the
DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission
conditions may be reduced. In all cases, normal transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will
operation will resume once the transmission gears by performing the following steps:
not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through
temperature has risen to a suitable level. 1. Stop the vehicle. the lower gears normally.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at Overdrive Operation
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the WARNING!
The automatic transmission includes an
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate Do not downshift for additional engine braking electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and
automatically, shifting between all available gears. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could SIXTH gears). The transmission will automatically
Tapping the GEAR “-” switch will activate ERS lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are
mode, display the current gear in the instrument causing a collision or personal injury. present:
cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear.
Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–” or GEAR  The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
“+” switch will change the top available gear. Trans- 1 2 3 4 5 6 D  The transmission fluid has reached an
mission adequate temperature.
Gear  The engine coolant has reached an adequate
Limit temperature.
Display  The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
Actual  The driver is not heavily pressing the
Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 accelerator.
Allowed
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
NOTE: a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
To select the proper gear position for maximum shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
Electronic Range Select deceleration (engine braking), simply push and activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
1 — GEAR “+” Switch hold the GEAR “–” switch. The transmission will performance and reduce the potential for
shift to the range from which the vehicle can best transmission overheating or failure due to
2 — GEAR “–” Switch
be slowed down. excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
CAUTION! mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR
transmission will automatically downshift (for
“+” switch until the gear limit display disappears When using ERS for engine braking while engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or
from the instrument cluster. descending steep grades, be careful not to during steady braking maneuvers.
overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
needed to prevent engine overspeed.
Torque Converter Clutch not cause damage to the transmission. The

torque converter will refill within five seconds
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
after starting the engine.
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
may result in a slightly different feeling or response There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in
during normal operation in the upper gears. When the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
the vehicle speed drops or during some which can be used to power various electronic
accelerations, the clutch automatically devices and Power Take Off (PTO). If equipped, it
disengages. will take the place of the sixth auxiliary switch.
TOW/HAUL Switch NOTE: Connections to the switches are found under the 4
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the  The torque converter clutch will not engage,
hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL until the transmission fluid and engine coolant Power Distribution Center.
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] You have the ability to configure the functionality of
second time restores normal operation. Normal of driving). Because engine speed is higher the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster
operation is always the default at engine start-up. when the torque converter clutch is not display. All switches can now be configured for
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is setting the switch type operation to latching or
pushed each time the engine is started. not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. momentary, power source of either battery or
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
WARNING! control, when the transmission is sufficiently cycles.
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is NOTE:
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased able to shift into and out of Overdrive. Holding last state conditions are met when switch
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to  If the vehicle has not been driven for several type is set to latching and power source is set to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the days, the first few seconds of operation after ignition.
possible loss of vehicle control, which may shifting the transmission into gear may seem For further information on using the auxiliary
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s
injury or death. draining from the torque converter into the Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com
transmission. This condition is normal and will and choosing the appropriate links.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case position, see the information
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise CASE (8-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — below:
Cancellation system that cannot be turned off. This I F E QUIPPED 2WD
system is designed to address exhaust and engine
noise. The system relies on four microphones This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
and engine noise, and assists an onboard Case Switch), which is located on the instrument surfaced roads.
frequency generator, which creates counteracting panel. 4WD HIGH
sound waves in the audio system’s speakers. This Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages
drive. The system is deactivated when the windows four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear
are rolled down. wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — only.
IF EQUIPPED 4WD LOW
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque
shifted transfer case. (increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front
Four-Position Transfer Case wheels, allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at
This electronically shifted transfer case provides the same speed. This range provides additional
four positions: traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) (40 km/h) in this range.
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) N (Neutral)
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
 N (Neutral) and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 240.
When additional traction is required, the transfer If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
WARNING! case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be 1. The current position indicator light will turn
 You or others could be injured or killed if you used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, off.
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the 2. The selected position indicator light will flash
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
desired position on the four-wheel drive control until the transfer case completes the shift.
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the switch. 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain, For specific shifting instructions Ú page 162. for the selected position will stop flashing and
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the remain on.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
should always be applied when the driver is
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions Are Not Met: 4
not in the vehicle.
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
1. The indicator light for the current position will
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
remain on.
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a NOTE:
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the continue to flash.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
center of the four-wheel drive Control Switch and is
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without 3. The transfer case will not shift.
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used
for recreational towing only Ú page 240. NOTE:
indicated, before exiting the vehicle. Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD transfer case position have been met. To retry the
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument selection, push the current position, wait five
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD)
cluster and indicate the current and desired seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift
for normal street and highway conditions on dry,
transfer case selection. When you select a requirements Ú page 162.
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in
different transfer case position, the indicator lights
two-wheel drive will have greater fuel economy
will do the following:
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the Because four-wheel drive provides improved control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning switch must be in the ON/RUN position with the
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road engine either running or off. This shift cannot be
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive conditions permit. completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
system is not functioning properly and that service position.
Shifting Procedure
is required. NOTE:
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
WARNING!  If any of the requirements to select a new between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
Always engage the parking brake when powering transfer case position have not been met, the wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light transfer case will not shift. The position indi- the selected position indicator light will flash and
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake cator light for the previous position will remain the original position indicator light will remain on.
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause on and the newly selected position indicator At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
personal injury or death. light will continue to flash until all the require- wheels to complete the shift.
ments for the selected position have been met.
 If all the requirements to select a new transfer 2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
case position have been met, the current posi- NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
tion indicator light will turn off, the selected posi- When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
tion indicator light will flash until the transfer noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
damage to driveline components.
case completes the shift. When the shift is detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the complete, the position indicator light for the
engine speed is approximately three times that of Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
selected position will stop flashing and remain 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a on.
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the You can use either of the following procedures:
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). 2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
depends on tires of equal size, type and control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can be
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain. done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
Preferred Procedure  The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi- This electronically shifted transfer case provides
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to tion for a shift to take place and for the position four positions:
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. will not take place and no position indicator  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on lights will be on or flashing.  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
the transfer case control switch.  N (NEUTRAL)
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
4. After the desired position indicator light is on For additional information on the appropriate use
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into CASE (6-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — of each transfer case position, see the information
gear. I F E QUIPPED below:
2WD
4
Alternate Procedure The electronic shift transfer case is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
which is located on the instrument panel. normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
surfaced roads.
position and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL. 4WD HIGH
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
control switch. maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
speed. This range provides additional traction for
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
gear.
4WD LOW
NOTE: Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
 If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter- low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to Four-Position/Part-Time Transfer Case the front wheels, forcing the front and rear wheels
attempting the shift, then the desired position to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
indicator light will flash continuously while the additional traction and maximum pulling power for
original position indicator light is on, until all loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
requirements have been met. 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral) For specific shifting instructions Ú page 165. If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are Are Not Met:
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 1. The indicator light for the current position will
used for flat towing behind another vehicle Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions remain ON.
Ú page 240. on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
tire wear and damage to the driveline components. continue to flash.
WARNING! NOTE: 3. The transfer case will not shift.
You or others could be injured or killed if you The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control NOTE:
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N be used for recreational towing only Ú page 240. the necessary requirements for selecting a new
(Neutral) position disengages both the front and Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights transfer case position have been met. To retry the
rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will selection, turn the control switch back to the
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission current position, wait five seconds, and retry
(4WD and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be selection. To find the shift requirements
cluster and indicate the current and desired
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. Ú page 165.
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator lights The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed will do the following: electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
(two-wheel drive) for normal street and highway during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads. 1. The current position indicator light will turn system is not functioning properly and that service
OFF. is required.
When additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be 2. The selected position indicator light will flash
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, until the transfer case completes the shift.
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the for the selected position will stop flashing and
four-wheel drive Control Switch to the desired remain ON.
position.
Shifting Procedure control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition

WARNING! switch must be in the ON/RUN position with the
NOTE: engine either running or off. This shift cannot be
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light  If any of the requirements to select a new completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake transfer case position have not been met, the position.
may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
NOTE:
personal injury. The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require- between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
NOTE: ments for the selected position have been met. wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the selected position indicator light will flash and
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause the original position, make certain all shift the original position indicator light will remain on. 4
damage to driveline components. requirements have been met, wait five seconds At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the and try the shift again. wheels to complete the shift.
engine speed is approximately three times that of  If all the requirements to select a new transfer 2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a case position have been met, the current posi-
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the NOTE:
tion indicator light will turn OFF, the selected
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
position indicator light will flash until the
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles transfer case completes the shift. When the
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
depends on tires of equal size, type and shift is complete, the position indicator light for
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in the selected position will stop flashing and Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain. remain ON. 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
You can use either of the following procedures:
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
conditions permit. control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can be
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
Preferred Procedure  The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi- N (Neutral)
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 tion for a shift to take place and for the position N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift used for flat towing behind another vehicle
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. will not take place and no position indicator Ú page 240.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on lights will be on or flashing.
the transfer case control switch. 4L
MANUALLY SHIFTED T RANSFER Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into C ASE — I F EQUIPPED the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
gear. front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
The transfer case provides four positions: Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
Alternate Procedure  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
 Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H) 25 mph (40 km/h).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
 N (Neutral) This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
2H position for normal street and highway
position and the engine running, shift the  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.
transmission into NEUTRAL.
For additional information on the appropriate use When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case of each transfer case position, see the information positions can be used to lock the front and rear
control switch. below: driveshafts together and force the front and rear
4. After the desired position indicator light is on 2H wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into accomplished by simply moving the gear selector
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
gear. to the desired positions once the appropriate
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads. speed and gear requirements are met.
NOTE: Ú page 167 for further information.
 If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
4H
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and
attempting the shift, then the desired position locks the front and rear driveshafts together
4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
indicator light will flash continuously while the forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
original position indicator light is on, until all same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery
driveline components.
requirements have been met. road surfaces only.
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the WARNING! shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and You or others could be injured or killed if you vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully position. Do not pause in transfer case Neutral.
either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N NOTE:
2H or N (Neutral) positions on some models. (Neutral) position disengages both the front and
 Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will
equipped with an automatic transmission may
speed is approximately three times that of the allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
require shutting the engine off to avoid gear
2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
clash while completing the shift. If difficulty
care not to overspeed the engine and do not applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
occurs, shift the transmission into N (Neutral), 4
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted off. Complete the range shift to the desired posi-
depends on tires of equal size, type and Transfer Case tion.
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will  Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to 2H TO 4H vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty
the drivetrain. may occur due to the mating teeth not being
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
NOTE: vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in properly aligned. Several attempts may be
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/ required for teeth alignment and shift comple-
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will tion to occur. The preferred method is with the
damage to driveline components. engage/disengage faster if you momentarily vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
Because four-wheel drive provides improved release the accelerator pedal after completing the attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road transfer case lever. (3 to 5 km/h).
conditions permit.  Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
2H OR 4H TO 4L transmission is in gear.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be expe- NOTE:
rienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detri-
temperatures. mental to the vehicle or occupants.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard NOTE:
position of the suspension and is meant for normal  Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
driving. It will automatically adjust to maintain the Trailer Height (ATH) when unloaded.
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that
rear ride height as conditions change.
the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels  For further information Ú page 227.
are driving. Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level truck, to WARNING!
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED be used as required while trailer towing. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
DESCRIPTION height as conditions change.
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading – The air suspension authorized dealer for service.
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride
system will continue to load level after the vehicle
height system. The main purpose of this system is
has been turned off for 10 minutes without
to maintain the truck’s rear ride height level. There
are two selectable heights that can be chosen
compressor activation. This allows for easy AIR SUSPENSION MODES
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of
based on your operating conditions. The air suspension system has multiple modes to
the truck by maintaining the ride height. After
The system requires that the ignition be in the 10 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to the protect the system in unique situations:
ON/RUN position or the engine running with zero ON/RUN position for the air suspension to re-level Tire/Jack Mode
vehicle speed for all user requested changes and due to addition/removal of load in the vehicle. If To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
load leveling. the air suspension system is disabled using the system has a feature which allows the automatic
settings menu (Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode, leveling to be disabled Ú page 109 or
Alignment Mode, or Bed Lowering Mode) the Ú page 247.
system will remain disabled when the vehicle is
turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can be
NOTE:
accomplished via the settings menu or driving the This mode is intended to be enabled with the
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode, engine running.
Alignment Mode, Transport Mode and Bed
Lowering Mode.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch

Transport Mode I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY NOTE:

The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the MESSAGES Height (NRH) has been achieved and the LED will
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and When the appropriate conditions exist, a message turn off.
disable the automatic load leveling system will appear in the instrument cluster display  Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
Ú page 109 or Ú page 247. Ú page 109. minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
NOTE: An audible chime will be heard whenever a system the vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the
error has been detected. interface.
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running. See an authorized dealer for system service if  Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
Wheel Alignment Mode normal operation does not resume. minated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the 4
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode OPERATION interface.
must be enabled Ú page 109 or Ú page 247.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button  Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will
NOTE: once while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is
This mode is intended to be enabled with the the vehicle to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will disabled by driving the vehicle, or by deselecting
engine running. illuminate the LED. the mode via the interface.
Bed Lowering Mode
NOTE:  Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster will
This setting is used to lower the rear suspension to The LED will continuously blink until vehicle be illuminated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled
the lowest possible height and disable the air Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved by driving the vehicle, or deselecting the mode
suspension system. It enables easier loading/ and the LED will turn on. via the interface.
unloading of the truck and makes it easier to hook
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again
up trailers Ú page 109 or Ú page 247.
will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system, the
vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
system operation requirements are met. See an
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON CAUTION!

MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)  Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking
damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear
front and rear differentials. These differentials,
axle before attempting situations or navi-
when engaged, mechanically lock together the axle
gating terrain, which could possibly cause the
shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate.
vehicle to become stuck.
This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum
and prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking
front and rear differentials should only be engaged The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations AXLE Lock Selector buttons.
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with 1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the are locked should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement
due to the reduced ability to turn and speed 2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked NOTE:
limitations. 3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
unlocked position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle
still provides torque biasing capability for
moderate low traction environments.
CAUTION! During the command to lock the axle, the indicator
light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock
 Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard
command has been successfully executed, the
surfaced roads. The ability to steer the vehicle
light will remain on solid.
is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
occur when the axles are locked on hard
surfaced roads.
(Continued)
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD When both the axles are locked, to unlock the front This system is controlled by the electronic control
LOW, 4WD HIGH or two-wheel drive Ú page 160. axle, push the REAR LOCK button while in 4WD sway bar switch located below the instrument
Push the REAR LOCK button while traveling less LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go panel.
than 10 mph (16 km/h). The REAR LOCK indicator out when the axle is unlocked.
light will remain on when the rear axle is locked. NOTE:
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
Left to right wheel speed difference may be to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indi- turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to
cator light is flashing after placing the vehicle in a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short
the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, distance may be required to release the torque
drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to lock and unlock the axles. 4
expedite the locking action. To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK
button. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out
WARNING! when the rear axle is unlocked.
SWAY BAR Disconnect Button
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
off-road driving only. Locking the front axle Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
during on-road driving will reduce the steering POWER WAGON ONLY The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
ability. This could cause a collision and you may Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
be seriously injured. disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
allows greater front suspension travel in off-road flash during activation transition, or when
To lock the front axle, push the FRONT/REAR LOCK situations. activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h) sway bar should remain in On-Road mode during
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
in 4WD LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator normal driving conditions.
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches
light will be solid when the front axle is locked. (48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)
NOTE: in the rear. A major advantage to increasing ride
The rear axle must be locked before the front axle height is the positive effect it has on approach/
will lock. departure and break over angles.
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
WARNING! may require that the vehicle be driven onto level lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on ground or rocked from side to side. recreational areas.
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, BAR button again. Management, or local Department of Natural
which could result in serious injury or death. The Resources are a wealth of information and usually
front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability WARNING! have maps with marked trails.
and assists in maintaining control of the vehicle.
The system monitors vehicle speed and will
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
On-Road mode, vehicle stability is reduced.
attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds Steel skid plates protect the major driveline
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph
over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a components of the truck including the fuel tank,
(29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
flashing off road light and solid on road light. transfer case and steering damper. In addition,
(29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the
Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or
(22 km/h), the system will attempt to return to and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows
death. Contact your local service center for
the Off-Road mode. the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road
assistance.
situations that would be considered impassable by
a normal truck.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4WD HIGH or 4WD LOW and push the SWAY SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
BAR button to obtain the Off-Road position
Ú page 160. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash WAGON ONLY The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can
drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
OFF-R OAD D RIVING T IPS AND V EHICLE ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground.
This distance up the ramp divided by the
NOTE:
CHARACTERISTICS wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of
to left and right suspension height differences. capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow 429 (connected sway bar) or an RTI of 538
This condition is due to driving surface differences you to explore those wilderness trails where few (disconnected sway bar), which means you can
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying articulate one front wheel 22 inches (56 cm) or
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left recreation. Before you venture out, you should 27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while the other three
contact your local governmental agency to wheels remain in contact with the ground.
determine the designated Off-Road Vehicle (ORV)
Water Fording Characteristics The Basics Of Off-Road Driving

CAUTION!
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability You will encounter many types of terrain driving
to cross a body of still water, where the powertrain off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This and area before proceeding. There are many types combustible materials. The heat from your
vehicle has high water fording characteristics with of surface conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.
the ability to cross a pool of water, without rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every
stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a maximum surface has a different effect on your vehicle's When To Use Low Range
speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
When driving off-road, shift into 4WD LOW for
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
additional traction or to improve handling and
5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering
control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the
of 1.3 degrees. wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid 4
lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to
sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most
CAUTION! operate in a higher power range. This will allow you
cases there are no road signs, posted speed limits
to idle over obstacles and down hills, with
or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). improved control and less effort. Also, use 4WD
own good judgment on what is safe and what isn't.
Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle LOW in rain, ice, snow, mud, and sand to get heavy
When on a trail you should always be looking
at greater depths. loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4WD
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
HIGH traction will not do the job.
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle while remembering what you are currently driving DRIVING IN S NOW, MUD AND SAND
Operation over.
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving
Many off-road driving conditions require the in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less
WARNING!
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two responsive to steering, acceleration and braking
footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down inputs. Therefore you should accelerate slowly,
stepped objects, using light brake pressure with cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt
light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or in an off-road situation. vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow
lurching. This technique is also used when you constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep vehicle's momentum.
incline.
 Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control entering any mud hole, get out and determine CROSSING OBSTACLES (R OCKS AND
and traction at slower speeds, shift the trans- how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles
mission to a low gear and shift the transfer case and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if OTHER HIGH POINTS)
to 4WD LOW if necessary. Do not shift to a lower stuck. While driving off road, you will encounter many
gear than necessary to maintain headway.  Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and through with full tire pressure. When crossing different types of obstacles. Before proceeding
traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, soft sandy spots in a trail, maintain your review the path ahead to determine the correct
try turning your steering wheel no more than a vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to approach and your ability to safely recover the
quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum. maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward
momentum. If you are going to be driving on until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
CAUTION! large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
braking may cause skidding and loss of control. tire pressure will drastically improve your trac- WARNING!
tion and handling, while driving on the soft sand, Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
but you must return the tires to normal air pres- system loading which could cause you to loose
 Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
sure before driving on pavement or other hard control of your vehicle.
around the tires and is very difficult to get
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires
through. You should use 4WD LOW with a gear
back up prior to reducing the pressure.
low enough to maintain your momentum Using A Spotter
without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop, try CAUTION!
turning your steering wheel no more than a There are many times where it is hard to see the
quarter turn quickly back and forth for addi- Reduced tire pressures may cause tire obstacle or determine the correct path.
tional traction. Mud holes pose an increased unseating and total loss of air pressure. To Determining the correct path can be extremely
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a difficult when you are confronting many obstacles.
They are normally full of debris from previous reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and In these cases have someone guide you over,
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they
can see the obstacle, watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use Getting High Centered
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout
When approaching large rocks, choose a path If you get hung up or high centered on an object,
you just created. You should now be able to drive
which ensures you drive over the largest with your get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the
out following the trench you just created at a
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the
45-degree angle.
obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and underbody and what is the best direction to
thicker than the side wall and is designed to take recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in
WARNING!
the abuse. Always look ahead and make every contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
effort to cross the large rocks with your tires. There is an increased risk of rollover when rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep point when you let the vehicle down. You can also
CAUTION! sides. try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
 Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
the object. 4
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage. Crossing Logs CAUTION!
 Never attempt to drive over a rock which is To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
large enough to contact the door sills.
front tire to be on top of the log while the other just increases the risk of underbody damage.
starts to climb the log. While climbing the log,
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid HILL C LIMBING
Or Rut spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes. Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
large rut, the angled approach is the key to understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach CAUTION! limitations. Hills can cause serious problems.
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each Some are just too steep to climb and should not be
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater attempted. You should always feel confident with
tire go through the obstacle independently. You diameter than the running ground clearance or
need to use caution when crossing large obstacles the vehicle and your abilities. You should always
the vehicle will become high centered. climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large
obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough climb a hill on an angle.
to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left
 Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach usually provide enough traction to complete the
a hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the WARNING!
if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
down? What is on top and the other side? Are vehicle brakes. braking. Descending a grade too fast could
there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles cause you to lose control and be seriously
on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle WARNING! injured or killed.
if something goes wrong? If everything looks
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
good and you feel confident, then change trans-
around on a steep grade. Driving across an  Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case
incline increases the risk of a roll over, which avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary,
into 4WD LOW and proceed with caution. You
may result in severe injury or death. know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
should use first gear and 4WD LOW for very
incline places more weight on the downhill
steep hills.
 Driving Downhill – Before driving down a steep wheels, which increases the possibilities of a
 Driving Uphill – Once you have determined your downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface
hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a
ability to proceed and have shifted into the has good traction with firm and stable soils. If
safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is
appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the possible transverse the incline at an angle
the grade too steep to maintain a slow
straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy heading slightly up or down.
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a
constant throttle and apply more power as you
straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep WARNING!
the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle
grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause
descends too fast? If you feel confident in your Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
you to lose control. If the front end begins to
ability to proceed then make sure you are in rollover, which may result in severe injury.
bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all
4WD LOW with the transmission in FIRST gear
four tires back on the ground. As you approach
(manually select FIRST gear on automatic trans-
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and
missions) and proceed with caution. Allow
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start
engine braking to control the descent and apply
to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the
off the accelerator and maintain headway by
tires to lock.
turning the steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will
 If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you DRIVING THROUGH WATER CAUTION!
stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
and immediately apply the brake. Restart the water. Water crossings should be avoided if transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can
engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly possible and only be attempted when necessary, in occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of
down the hill allowing the compression braking a safe responsible manner. You should only drive water. Water can cause permanent damage to
of the engine and transmission to help regulate through areas which are designated and approved. engine, driveline or other vehicle components
your speed. If the brakes are required to control You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the and your brakes will be less effective once wet
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid environment. You should know your vehicle's and/or muddy.
locking or skidding the tires. abilities and be able to recover it if something goes
wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested  Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you 4
WARNING!
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls approach any type of water you need to deter-
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low necessary, get out and walk through the water
never attempt to turn around. To do so may and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in 4WD LOW or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which and proceed very slowly with a constant slow depth, approach angle, current and bottom
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,
straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, water higher than the bottom of the axle recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a
always drive straight up or down. differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle safe crossing is the water depth, current and
fluids for signs of water ingestion. bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level
on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when
determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
 Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or ance. You should never attempt to cross flowing You will need to experiment to determine what is
Other Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded water which is deeper than the vehicle's running right for your situation. It is easier and faster to let
or other standing water areas normally contain ground clearance. Even the slowest current can air out than it is to replace it. Start high and lower
murky or muddy waters. These water types push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of it as required. Remember you must return the tires
normally contain hidden obstacles and make it control if the water is deep enough to push on to normal air pressure before driving on road or at
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, the large surface area of the vehicle's body. highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or Before you proceed determine the speed of the return the tires to their normal on road air
muddy water holes are where you want to hook current, the water's depth, approach angle, pressure.
up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If then cross at an angle heading slightly CAUTION!
you are able to determine you can safely cross, upstream using the low and slow technique.
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire
than proceed using the low and slow method.
damage and may cause tire unseating with total
WARNING!
loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
CAUTION!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure,
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the out of control. This could put you and your abrupt maneuvers.
radiator. passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
VEHICLE RECOVERY
 Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or AIRING DOWN FOR O FF-R OAD DRIVING
Other Flowing Water – Flowing water can be If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
fast running stream or river even in shallow your ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing recovery should always be given consideration
water. Fast moving water can easily push your the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, before attempting a questionable obstacle. You
vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control. improving its surface area for better flotation and should never go off-road driving without the ability
Even in very shallow water, a high current can ability to mold or form to the ground contour. to recover your vehicle from a situation. Having
still wash the dirt out from around your tires Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require another vehicle with you usually works best for
putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle heavier vehicles require higher pressures than situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
damage with slower water currents in depths softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. something? Would it be easier to go forward or to
greater than the vehicle's running ground clear- go backward?
Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an anchor  Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your  Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of commonly used methods. This simply involves vehicle from minor situations if you have a
vehicle damage during the recovery process? shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The tow
Answering these questions will help you determine while applying throttle after each shift. During hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the
the best method of recovery. If you can still move this process, for additional traction, try turning abusive force generated during vehicle
the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick your steering wheel quickly left and right no recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the more than a quarter turn. If you are stuck in vehicle component as an attachment point.
first choice. If you have ample room, an additional mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during Using tow straps requires coordination between
vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impact on this process to clean the debris from the tread the two drivers. Good communication and line
the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the and improve the traction. You want to create a of sight are required for a safe recovery. First 4
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build connect the tow strap to the correct attachment
vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you points on both vehicles. There should be a least
great care needs to be taken during the recovery, out. Remember to ease off and on the acceler- 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehi-
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If ator before and after the shift. If after a few rock cles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary
you are severely hung up on something you should cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try join two tow straps together using a 1.5 inch
jack the vehicle up and stack something under the another method of recovery. Continuous rock hard wood dowel. This will keep the straps from
wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to becoming knotted and is safer than using a
without causing further damage. This should be your vehicle and the environment. clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow
tried before attempting any recovery method. vehicle back-up, leaving two to three feet worth
CAUTION! of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using
CAUTION! light throttle, should accelerate tightening the
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at
strap providing the pulling force needed to free
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first an excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires
the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should
clearing the object, may result in additional faster than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
assist in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by
underbody damage.
slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as
the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle becomes
free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle
should signal they are free and should hit their
brakes stopping both vehicles.
The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to
throttle without using the brakes, once signaled hold more than the vehicle's weight and provide WARNING!
by the other driver. This sequence is important a direction of pull as straight as possible. Use Winch cables are under high tension when in
to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the block and tackle if necessary to improve the use and can become a projectile if they fail.
pulling vehicle. angle of pull or increase the winch's pulling Never stand over or straddle the winch cable.
force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap Never jerk or overload the winch cable. Never
WARNING! around its base and hook the cable to the strap. stand in front of the vehicle while winching.
If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in Failure to follow these instructions can result in
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot find serious or fatal injury.
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal
an anchor point within reach try using your
objects could become projectiles if a strap
spare tire by burying it. Once you have deter-
breaks, which could cause severe injury. Never
mined an anchor point hook up the cable, AFTER D RIVING O FF-ROAD
leave more than 2 to 3 feet (0.60 to 1 meter) of
ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable Off-road operation puts more stress on your
slack in the strap. More slack than this greatly
left on the drum, and place a floor mat or some- vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
thing else over the strung out cable. Placing off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters)
something over the strung out cable helps keep damage. That way you can get any problems taken
away from a strapping or winching situation.
the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place care of right away and have your vehicle ready
the vehicle in FIRST gear and apply a very light when you need it.
 Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Addi- throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful
tional Information) – Winching is most  Completely inspect the underbody of your
not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the
commonly used in the following situations: vehicle. Do not try to guide the cable into the vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
there is no support vehicle available, a high drum. If it starts to bunch up on one end, let it. suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
controlled force is required to recover the You can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or use a winch cable as a tow strap and always clean as required.
vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to stand back while winching.
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force
with a great deal of control. It allows you to walk
the vehicle out of the situation in a slow
controlled manner. This control works well for
avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you
decide it is time to use the winch look for a good
 Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-

ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if The limited-slip differential provides additional slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
required, and torque to the values specified in traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
the Service Manual. particularly when there is a difference between the the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
traction characteristics of the surface under the
 Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery (IF EQUIPPED)
surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
 After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or the driving effort to the rear wheel having the THINGS T O K NOW B EFORE U SING Y OUR
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, 4
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
better traction. WINCH
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as General Winch Information
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
possible.
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle
the accelerator will supply maximum traction. recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical
WARNING!
When starting with only one rear wheel on an power from the vehicle charging system to power a
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may excessively slippery surface, slight momentary motor that winds the winch rope onto the winch
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. application of the parking brake may be necessary drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a
You might not have full braking power when you to gain maximum traction. winch is capable of generating very high forces and
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get WARNING! without reading and understanding the complete
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary. winch Owner's Manual.
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the through the rear wheel remaining on the ground.
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate- You could lose control of the vehicle.
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
Tensioning The Winch Rope Low Voltage Interrupt 1. Remote Control: The remote control provides
the interface between the winch operator and
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before Your winch is equipped with a device that will
the winch. The remote control provides the
use. Follow the instructions below to tension the interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging
ability to power the winch in, out, and stop the
rope: system voltage drops to a low level. The winch will
winch. To operate the winch, the toggle switch
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this device is
is pushed down to power the winch in and up
on the winch drum. tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the vehicle
to power the winch out. The winch will stop if
should be operated at high idle for a few minutes
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point. the switch is left in the neutral (center)
to allow the vehicle charging system to recover
position.
before continuing to winch.
CAUTION! 2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load UNDERSTANDING T HE FEATURES OF vehicle charging system.
required to tension the winch rope. Y OUR WINCH 3. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will
be located on the bumper assembly) allows
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the remote control to be attached to the
the rope while winding the rope. Always use control pack to allow the winch to function.
care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one 4. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch
side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum allows the rope to be stored on the winch
drum. and transmits force to the rope. The winch is
equipped with an integral brake that will stop
rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor
CAUTION! is stopped.
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in

the direction indicated on the drum rotation Winch Components
decal on the winch.
5. Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the OPERATING Y OUR WINCH
winch to be connected to an anchor to provide multi-purpose snatch block allows you to
a pulling force. This synthetic rope is highly (1) increase the winch's pulling power; WARNING!
flexible, lightweight, and it floats. and (2) change your pulling direction
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch without damaging the winch rope. Proper use of Failure to observe any of these warnings
drum to be disconnected from the winch motor the snatch block is covered in “Before You Pull.” regarding proper winch usage may result in
to allow the rope to be pulled from the winch by Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a severe injury.
hand. safe means of connecting the looped  Always use supplied hook strap to hold the
ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks. hook when spooling wire rope in or out.
The shackle's pin is threaded to allow
CAUTION!  Never use as a hoist.
easy removal. 4
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of  Never use to move persons.
on the hook. tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the  Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
operator an attachment point for the capacity.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor
points and objects, as well as protects living trees.  Always wear heavy leather gloves when
synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
handling the synthetic rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided
with the synthetic rope and must be used with the  Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in
The following accessories are necessary to attach synthetic rope at all times to protect the rope from tension or under load.
the winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and potential abrasion wear. The sleeve has a loose fit  Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
for safe winching. so it can easily be positioned along the synthetic under load, synthetic rope is in tension, or
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear rope to protect from rough surfaces and sharp rope drum is moving.
protective gloves while operating the corners.
 Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load
winch or handling the winch rope. Avoid
and keep others away during winching.
loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in the rope and other  Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
moving parts. synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening
during operation and when spooling.
(Continued)
General Information
WARNING! CAUTION!
Practice using your winch before you get stuck.
 Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Some key points to remember when using your  Always inspect winch installation and
Always use a choker chain, wire choker rope or winch are: synthetic rope condition before operating the
tree trunk protector on the anchor. winch. Frayed, kinked or damaged rope must
 Always take your time to assess the situation and
be replaced immediately. Loose or damaged
 Never attach a recovery strap to the winch plan your pull carefully. winch installation must be corrected immedi-
hook to increase the length of a pull.
 Always take your time when using a winch. ately.
 Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the  Use the right equipment for the situation.  Always be sure any element which can inter-
recovery strap attached directly to the winch
 Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the fere with safe winching operations is removed
hook.
synthetic rope to slip through your hands when prior to initiating winching.
 Never use bungee or kinetic straps that handling the rope.
 Always keep remote control lead clear of the
develop tremendous and potentially
 Only the operator should handle the synthetic drum, synthetic rope and rigging.
dangerous amounts of force when stretched.
rope and remote control.
 Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or
 Always disconnect the remote control when  Think safety at all times. loose connections. Replace if damaged.
not in use.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch  Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar
 Never winch when there are less than 10
through the rollers. Watch and listen to winch
wraps of synthetic rope around the winch CAUTION! for proper snugness.
drum.
 Always know your winch: Take the time to fully  Never power hook through fairlead. Could
 Always pass remote control through a window read and understand the included Installation cause damage.
to avoid pinching lead in door, when using and Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to
remote inside a vehicle. Winching Techniques, in order to understand
 Never leave the remote control plugged into your winch and the winching operation.
the winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting (Continued)
idle.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and

synthetic rope for damage. Do not use the WARNING!
winch if the mount is loose or rope shows  Never touch winch rope or hook while
excessive wear, frays, or damage. someone else is at the control switch or during
winching operation.
 Never touch winch rope or hook while under
tension or under load.
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out

Free Spool Lever enough wire rope to reach your anchor point. 4
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook while you work.
strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor
point. Attach the hook strap to the hook (if not
Winch Rope attached).
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of
the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the
winch to disengage. Freespooling conserves
battery power.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
Hook Strap
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your 8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by
established your anchor point, secure the vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor rotating the clutch lever on the winch to
tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around point that will enable you to pull straight in the engage.
the object. direction the vehicle will move. This allows the NOTE:
synthetic rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disen-
spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as gaged.
possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power. 9. Connect the remote control to the winch
control box, located on the front fascia/
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk bumper. Be careful not to let the remote
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
of the strap or chain and through the hook, choose to control the winch from inside your
being careful not to over tighten (tighten and vehicle, always pass the remote through a
back-off 1/2 turn). window to avoid pinching the cord in the door.
Always disconnect the remote control when
not in use.
Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will
withstand the load.
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is
critical to winching operations. An anchor must be Clevis/D-Shackles
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural
anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the Winch Box Remote Control Connector
cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are
available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be
sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the Do not approach or move the blanket once ten-
remote control switch, slowly wind the rope sion is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into
until no slack remains. Once the rope is under the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or re-
tension, stand well clear of it and never step move the blanket, slack the tension on the
over it. rope first.
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your
intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in the
immediate vicinity surrounding the winching
operation is completely aware of your
intentions before you pull. Declare where the
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum spectators should not stand — never behind or 4
in front of the vehicle and never near the
synthetic rope or snatch block. Your situation
may have other "no people" zones.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension

11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections
are secured and free of debris before
continuing with the winching procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be
neatly wound around the spooling drum.
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
Improper winding can cause damage to the
synthetic rope. In certain situations you may decide to throw a
heavy blanket or similar object over the rope. A
heavy blanket can absorb energy should the No People Zones
synthetic rope break. Place it on the rope mid-
way between the winch and the anchor point.
Do this before the rope is put under tension.
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles NOTE: 15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the
engine on and light tension already on the  Avoid overheating the winch motor. For vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the
synthetic rope, begin winching slowly and extended winching, stop at reasonable vehicle's brakes and shift the transmission to
steadily. Be sure that the rope is winding intervals to allow the winch motor to cool PARK. Release tension in the synthetic rope.
evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. down. 16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle from the anchor.
 What to look for under load: The synthetic
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the
winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on rope must always spool onto the drum as 17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person
stable ground. If you are able to drive the indicated by the drum rotation decal on the handling the synthetic rope should walk the
vehicle, the winching operation is complete. winch. As you power-in, make sure the rope in and not let it slide through the hand,
synthetic rope winds evenly and tightly on control the winch at all times.
the drum. This prevents the outer rope
wraps from drawing into the inner wraps,
binding and damaging the synthetic rope.
Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up rope slack.
Shock loads can momentarily far exceed
the winch and synthetic rope ratings. During
side pulls the synthetic rope tends to stack
up at one end of the drum. This stack can
become large enough to cause serious
damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as
Using The Remote Control straight ahead as possible and stop Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
winching if the synthetic rope comes close
to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an WARNING!
uneven stack, spool out that section of the
rope and reposition it to the opposite end of To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
the drum, which will free up space for inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
continued winching.
NOTE: power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling

How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote situation. You will have to assess what technique is
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all
Arrange the synthetic rope so it will not kink or times.
tangle when spooled. Be sure any synthetic rope How To Change The Pulling Direction
already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and
evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if
necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light
tension and spool the rope back and onto the
winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Hook In Stored Position 4
Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote 19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the
control from the winch. Pinch the hook between remote control cord from the control box and
your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook store in a clean and dry place. Winching
strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb and operations are now complete. Put the cap on
forefinger to keep tension on the synthetic rope. the solenoid plug-in.
Walk the synthetic rope towards the fairlead, care- Change Pulling Directions
NOTE:
fully spooling in the remaining rope by pulsing the Always store the remote control in a protected, All winching operations should have a straight line
remote control switch. clean, dry area. from the winch to the object being pulled. This
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of minimizes the synthetic rope collecting on one side
the hawse fairlead. RIGGING TECHNIQUES of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and
damaging synthetic rope. A snatch block, secured
Various winching situations will require application to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable
of other winching techniques. These could range you to change your pulling direction while still
from too little distance to achieve maximum pull allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind
using straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling properly onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a
tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the CAUTION!
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends Prolonged operation of the steering system at
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases
of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
mechanical advantage and that increases your
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn). the steering fluid temperature and it should be
pulling power.
avoided when possible. Damage to the power
Double Line HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING steering pump may occur.
The standard power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and maneuverability in HYDRAULIC POWER S TEERING FLUID
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
C HECK
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under service interval is not required. The fluid should
these conditions, you will observe a substantial only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
increase in steering effort, especially at very low noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. functioning as anticipated. Check fluid level when
the engine is cold and off. Coordinate inspection
NOTE: efforts through an authorized dealer.
Wire Rope Routing
 Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
Because pulling power decreases with the number wheel travel are considered normal and do not WARNING!
of layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system. Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
can use a snatch block to double line out more
and with the engine off to prevent injury from
rope. This decreases the number of layers of  Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
synthetic rope on the drum, and increases pulling steering pump may make noise for a short reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer's
power. Start by feeding out enough synthetic rope amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick recommended power steering fluid.
to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your fluid in the steering system. This noise should
vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through be considered normal, and it does not in any
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using way damage the steering system.
the snatch block, pull out enough synthetic rope to
reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a To Activate

CAUTION! time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Do not use chemical flushes in your power is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
steering system as the chemicals can damage unavailable, and vice versa.
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
your power steering components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
CRUISE C ONTROL off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
Warranty. When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over should be turned off when not in use.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper 20 mph (32 km/h). WARNING!
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
fluid from all surfaces Ú page 471. side of the steering wheel. in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
4
the system or cause it to go faster than you
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED want. You could lose control and have an
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise accident. Always leave the system off when you
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control are not using it.
(ACC) system:
 Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a To Set A Desired Speed
constant preset speed. Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main- and release. Release the accelerator and the
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead. vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
Cruise Control Buttons speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL
NOTE:
SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating the set
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not 1 — On/Off Button speed.
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not 2 — CANCEL
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be 3 — RES (+)
aware of the feature selected. 4 — SET (-)
A cruise indicator light, along with set speed will  If the button is continually pushed, the set To Resume Speed
also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster speed will continue to adjust until the button is
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
display when the speed is set. released, then the new set speed will be estab-
button and release. Resume can be used at any
NOTE: lished.
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed To Accelerate For Passing To Deactivate
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) While the Cruise Controls is set, press the
button. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
To Vary The Speed Setting is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed erasing the set speed from memory.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
When Cruise Control is set, you can increase the The following conditions will also deactivate the
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease The transmission may downshift on hills to
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
speed by pushing the SET (-) button. maintain the vehicle set speed.
memory:
U.S. Speed (mph) The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
 Vehicle parking brake is applied
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
 Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or  Stability event occurs
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive  Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an without Cruise Control.
adjustment of 1 mph.  Engine overspeed occurs
 If the button is continually pushed, the set WARNING! Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in
speed will continue to adjust until the button is the OFF position, erases the set speed from
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the memory.
released, then the new set speed will be estab- system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
lished. vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
Metric Speed (km/h) you could lose control and have an accident. Do
 Pushing the RES (+), or SET (-) button once will not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
subsequent tap of the button results in an slippery.
adjustment of 1 km/h.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) WARNING! WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
convenience provided by Cruise Control while nience system. It is not a substitute for active while following a vehicle ahead and hold
traveling on highways and major roadways. driver involvement. It is always the driver’s the vehicle for approximately two seconds
However, it is not a safety system and not designed responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, in the stop position. At this point, there will
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function and weather conditions, vehicle speed, be an “ACC May Cancel Soon” chime and
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most warning to the driver. When ACC is
with ACC Ú page 191. importantly, brake operation to ensure safe cancelled, the system will release the
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged operation of the vehicle under all road condi- brakes and the driver must take over
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the tions. Your complete attention is always braking. The system can be resumed 4
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a required while driving to maintain safe control when the vehicle ahead drives off by
radar sensor and a forward facing camera of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- releasing the brake and pushing the
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you ings can result in a collision and death or resume button on the steering wheel.
to maintain a set speed. serious personal injury.
You should switch off the ACC system:
NOTE:  The ACC system:
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
exceed the original set speed) automatically to stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
maintain a preset following distance, while  When entering a turn lane or highway off
disabled vehicle).
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
conditions into account, and may be uphill or downhill slopes.
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
tions.
sion Warning system.
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi-  Does not always fully recognize complex
at a constant speed.
cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of driving conditions, which can result in
the feature selected Ú page 476. wrong or missing distance warnings.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Push the ACC on/off button until one of the Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
following appears in the instrument cluster display:
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
operate the ACC system. Adaptive Cruise Control Off 20 mph (32 km/h).
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read When the system is turned on and in the ready
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Ready.”
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed When the system is off, the instrument cluster
setting has not been selected, the display will read display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button is pushed,
tions:
the display will read “ACC SET.”
 When in 4WD Low
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.  When brakes are applied
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button The ACC screen may display once again if any of  When the parking brake is applied
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off Button the following ACC activity occurs:  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
3 — CANCEL  System Cancel REVERSE or NEUTRAL
4 — Distance Button  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
 Driver Override
5 — RES (+) speed range
 System Off
6 — SET (-)  When the brakes are overheated
 ACC Proximity Warning
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu  ACC Unavailable Warning
 When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
The instrument cluster display will show the The instrument cluster display will return to the last speed
current ACC system settings. The information it display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.  When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
displays depends on ACC system status. mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate NOTE: If either system is set when the vehicle speed is

Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
ACC enabled. To change between the different the current speed of the vehicle.
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns NOTE:
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
To turn the system off, push and release the  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
At this time, the system will turn off and the beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
Speed Cruise Control mode.
instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” WARNING! in the instrument cluster display.
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
WARNING! In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
4
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) be controlling the distance between your vehicle
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
system on when not in use is dangerous. You and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
could accidentally set the system or cause it to only be determined by the position of the accel-
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
go faster than you want. You could lose control erator pedal.
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
and have a collision. Always leave the system off vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure To Cancel
when you are not using it. to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which Speed Cruise Control systems:
To Set A Desired ACC Speed mode is selected.
 The brake pedal is applied.
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push  The CANCEL button is pushed.
the SET (-) button and release. The instrument If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to  An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
cluster display will show the set speed.
20 mph (32 km/h).  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
NOTE: position.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
20 mph (32 km/h). System (ESC/TCS) activates.
 The vehicle parking brake is applied.
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
 Driver door is opened at low speeds. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph To Vary The Speed Setting
 A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
being used.
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. After setting a speed, you can increase the set
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
(overheated). speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)
 The trailer brake is applied manually (if
equipped).  While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
 Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
system: Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
adjustment of 1 mph.
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
 Driver door is opened at low speeds vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
To Turn Off ments until the button is released. The new set
WARNING!
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
memory if: The Resume function should only be used if display.
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a Metric Speed (km/h)
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button set speed that is too high or too low for
is pushed prevailing traffic and road conditions could  Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
pushed sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
warnings can result in a collision and death or adjustment of 1 km/h.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position
serious personal injury.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
 4WD Low is engaged
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
To Resume ments until the button is released. The new set
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (+) speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
button and then remove your foot from the display.
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will display the last set speed.
When ACC Is Active The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if until:
the engine’s braking power does not slow the  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the the set speed.
brake system will automatically slow the  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
vehicle. view of the sensor.
 The ACC system applies the brake down to a full  The distance setting is changed.
stop when following a vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,  The system disengages.
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
after coming to a full stop. Distance Settings however, the driver can always apply the brakes 4
 The ACC system maintains set speed when 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) manually, if necessary.
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) NOTE:
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing system applies the brakes.
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
operation and necessary to maintain set speed. predicts that its maximum braking level is not
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC To adjust the distance setting, push the Distance sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
system will cancel if the braking temperature button and release. Each time the button is occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
exceeds normal range (overheated). pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
(longer). When the farthest distance is set, pushing while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
Setting The Following Distance In ACC the Distance button again will reset to the shortest force.
The specified following distance for Adaptive distance.
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the NOTE:
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
distance setting between four bars (longest), three
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle display is a warning for the driver to take action
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
is detected in the same lane, the instrument and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle autonomously.
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
speed automatically to maintain the distance
instrument cluster display.
setting, regardless of the set speed.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel This message can sometimes be displayed while
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system message will display on the instrument cluster driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
automatically defaults to the longest setting (four display and produce a warning chime. The driver or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
bars). The setting can be overridden by pushing the must now manually operate the vehicle’s recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Distance button on the steering wheel. accelerator and brakes. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
Overtake Aid WARNING! warning may temporarily occur.
When driving with ACC engaged and following a When the ACC system is resumed, the driver NOTE:
vehicle, the system will provide an additional must ensure that there are no pedestrians, If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is Failure to follow these warnings can result in a Control is still available.
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn collision and death or serious personal injury. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
signal and will only be active when passing on the
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
ACC Operation At Stop in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF the forward side of the rearview mirror.
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will VEHICLE” WARNING To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if important to note the following maintenance
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two items:
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
sound when conditions temporarily limit system  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within performance. the windshield.
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,  Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
also become temporarily blinded due to tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these  Do not attach or install any accessories near the
warning chime. The driver must now manually
cases, the instrument cluster display will display sensor, including transparent material or after-
operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a and the system will deactivate. system failure or malfunction.
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
When the condition that deactivated the system is This message can sometimes be displayed while unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
no longer present, the system will return to the driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/ later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left persists, see an authorized dealer.
function by simply reactivating it. these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE: camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur. NOTE:
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver  Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
should examine the windshield and the camera kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
located on the back side of the inside rearview performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstructions in the field of view.
sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
 Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
obstruction.  Height modifications can limit module perfor- 4
When the condition that created limited mance and functionality.
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor functionality is no longer present, the system will  Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. return to full functionality. camera/radar field of view.
NOTE:  Any modifications to the vehicle that may
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more are not recommended.
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, In certain driving situations, ACC may have
sound when conditions temporarily limit system mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
performance. This most often occurs at times of forward facing camera inspected at your autho- late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and rized dealer. and may need to intervene. The following are
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily examples of these types of situations:
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and there may be an internal system fault or a
the system will have degraded performance. temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
TOWING A TRAILER TURNS AND BENDS LANE CHANGING

ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. system may decrease the vehicle speed and in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not acceleration for stability reasons, with no target illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking. vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
curve the system will resume your original set vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
OFFSET DRIVING speed. This is a part of normal ACC system action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that functionality. completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle NOTE: distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
merging in from a side lane. There may not be On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset necessary.
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, USING ACC ON HILLS
which can cause your vehicle to brake or When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
accelerate unexpectedly. in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
Lane Changing Example
Offset Driving Condition Example
ACC Hill Example

NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects or
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in IF EQUIPPED
detected until they have moved fully into the lane. situations where the vehicle you are following exits The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your and audible indications of the distance between
ahead. lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a
stationary object as it did not previously detect detected obstacle when backing up or moving
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
to apply the brakes if necessary.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 206.
4
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
Narrow Vehicle Example the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the sensors can detect obstacles from approximately the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
The sensors can detect obstacles from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches depending on the location, type and orientation of the detected obstacle.
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the the obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
horizontal direction, depending on the location, NOTE:
type and orientation of the obstacle. The dually flares are only protected when the The warning display will turn on indicating the
vehicle is in REVERSE. There is no detection for the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
NOTE:
flares when the vehicle is moving forward. when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has
been detected.
six rear sensors to assist in detection around the
dually flares. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2
second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
NOTE: ENABLING A ND D ISABLING F RONT The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
A ND/OR R EAR PARKSENSE requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts Front ParkSense can be enabled and switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
disabled with the Front ParkSense system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist switch is pushed, and the system requires service,
audible alert (chime) after approximately three switch.
the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. the Rear ParkSense switch.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
programmable through the Uconnect system instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
Ú page 247. graphic with an “Off” message overlay over the
system that is off (Front or Rear system). This
The chime volume settings include low, medium, vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
and high. The factory default volume is medium. vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/ CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
ParkSense System has detected a faulted cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. result in the system not working properly. The
condition, the instrument cluster display will show Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE could provide a false indication that an obstacle
Required" or the "Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message. PRECAUTIONS is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a NOTE:  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster  Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
display, along with the display overlay “Wipe are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches
Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display keep the ParkSense system operating properly. (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
overlay will read “Service.” Under this condition, do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra- close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
ParkSense will not operate.
tions could affect the performance of Park- “Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sense. Required” message to be appear in the instru-
Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display
 When you move the gear selector to the ment cluster display.
make sure the outer surface and the underside of
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense  On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will should be disabled when the tailgate is in the
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle
show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate
the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as could provide a false indication that an obstacle
see an authorized dealer.
the vehicle is in REVERSE. is behind the vehicle.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
Required" appears in the instrument cluster
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
display, see an authorized dealer.
system provides a haptic warning in the form of

WARNING! CAUTION! torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully unable to recognize every obstacle, including LaneSense system will also provide a visual
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be small obstacles. Parking curbs might be warning through the instrument cluster display to
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other temporarily detected or not detected at all. prompt the driver to remain within the lane
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before Obstacles located above or below the sensors boundaries.
backing up. You are responsible for safety and will not be detected when they are in close The driver may manually override the haptic
must continue to pay attention to your proximity. warning by applying torque to the steering wheel at
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in any time.
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
serious injury or death.
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time When only a single lane marking is detected and 4
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball mended that the driver looks over his/her marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle shoulder when using ParkSense. system provides a visual warning through the
when the vehicle is not used for towing. instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage remain within the lane. When only a single lane
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
will be much closer to the obstacle than the not be provided.
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the LANESENSE OPERATION
NOTE:
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could The LaneSense system is operational at speeds When operating conditions have been met, the
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
depending on its size and shape, giving a false (180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
indication that an obstacle is behind the detect lane markings and measure vehicle audible and visual warning to the driver when the
vehicle. position within the lane boundaries. driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
When both lane markings are detected and the wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no return their hands to the wheel.
turn signal has been applied OR the driver departs
the lane on the opposite side of the applied turn
signal (if the left turn signal is applied and the
vehicle departs to the right), the LaneSense
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have has been approached and is in a lane departure
The LaneSense button is located on the situation, the visual warning in the instrument
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
switch panel below the Uconnect display. cluster display will show the left lane line
is solid white.
flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense telltale
NOTE: changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is
located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on). System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
NOTE:
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
The LaneSense system will retain the last system Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when  When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- Telltale
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. Sense Telltale is solid white when only the NOTE:
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE left lane marking has been detected and the The LaneSense system operates with similar
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the behavior for a right lane departure when only the
The LaneSense system will indicate the current instrument cluster display if an unintentional right lane marking has been detected.
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster lane departure occurs on the left side.
display.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
 When the LaneSense system is on and both the situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. has been approached and is in a lane departure
lane markings have been detected, the system The LaneSense telltale changes from solid situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the green to solid yellow. At this time torque is off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
instrument cluster display and a torque warning applied to the steering wheel in the opposite solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane direction of the lane boundary. torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray For example: If approaching the left side of the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. For example: If approaching the left side of the
green. lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid

Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale Yellow Telltale Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS NOTE: NOTE:

Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the camera function. (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
Manual Activation Of The Rear View displayed continuously until deactivated via the
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
Camera touchscreen button "X", the transmission is
configure through the Uconnect system
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
Ú page 247.
OFF position.
NOTE: 1. Press the "Controls" button located on the  The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
 When enabled the system operates above bottom of the Uconnect display. the camera image is made available ONLY when
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" icon to turn the
(180 km/h).
Rear View Camera system on. Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
 Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
 The system will not apply torque to the steering When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
wheel whenever a safety system engages Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, exited and the previous screen appears again.
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Warning, etc.). Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA to another gear, unless the vehicle speed exceeds AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into the Rear View Camera image is pressed. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is button is made available to indicate the current
Uconnect display along with a caution note to
activated through the "Backup Camera" button in active Camera image being displayed whenever
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
the tailgate handle. display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located in
button to switch the display to Cargo Camera WARNING! the center of the tailgate handle.
image is made available whenever the Rear View Drivers must be careful when backing up even NOTE:
Camera image is displayed. when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
camera image is made available when the vehicle be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
is not in REVERSE gear. vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before lens.
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on Zoom View
your surroundings and must continue to pay
the backup camera image to illustrate the width of When the Rear View Camera image is
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
the vehicle and its projected backup path based on being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
the steering wheel position. The active guidelines
result in serious injury or death.
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
4
will show separate zones that will help indicate the selector position, Zoom View is available.
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
CAUTION!
corresponding settings can be adjusted within upper left of the display screen, the image will
Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center of only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView the icon a second time will return the view to the
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a camera is unable to view every obstacle or standard Backup Camera display.
hitch/receiver. The following table shows the object in your drive path.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
approximate distances for each zone:  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
Distance To The Rear driven slowly when using ParkView to be able view will display the standard Backup Camera
Zones to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
Of The Vehicle
recommended that the driver look frequently gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
0 - 1 ft over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. automatically resume.
Red
(0 - 30 cm)
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
1 ft - 6.5 ft the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
Yellow
(30 cm - 2m) the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
6.5 ft or greater
Green
(2 m or greater)
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available NOTE: If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or  Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview overlaid on the image in the Rear View to illustrate
REVERSE. camera function. the width of the vehicle. The view will also include
NOTE: the side view mirrors and its projected back up
 The Surround View Camera system has
path based on the steering wheel position.
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, programmable settings that may be selected
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph through the Uconnect system Ú page 247. There are different colored zones to indicate the
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the
Press this button on the touchscreen to chart below:
icon will appear gray. enter the Surround View Camera menu in
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be the Uconnect system. Distance To The Rear Of
Zone
visible. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear The Vehicle
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), View and Top View is the default view of the 0 - 1 ft
Red
see Ú page 220. system. (0 - 30 cm)
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image 1 ft - 6.5 ft
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out Yellow
(30 cm - 2 m)
IF EQUIPPED of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
The Surround View Camera system allows you to (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
see an on-screen image of the surroundings and ignition is placed in the OFF position. The “X”
the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs whenever button on the touchscreen disables the display of Modes Of Operation
the gear selector is in REVERSE or when enabled the camera image. Standard Rear View can be manually activated by
through the Uconnect system. The Top View of the If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls
vehicle will also show if any doors are open. The will close and display the previous screen after menu within the Uconnect system.
image will be displayed on the Uconnect display shifting out of REVERSE. Top View
along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings”. After five seconds, this note will The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
disappear. The Surround View Camera system is Rear View and Front View in a split screen display.
comprised of four cameras located in the front There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors. at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View Top View Plus Rear View NOTE:
screen will change based on vehicle options. If not This is the default view of the system in If the Backup Camera view was selected through the
equipped with a Cargo Camera or Trailer Reverse REVERSE and is always paired with the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear
Guidance, the Backup Camera soft button will be Top View of the vehicle with optional View screen will return to the Surround View menu.
displayed. If equipped with a Cargo Camera but no active guidelines for the projected path If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo Camera soft when enabled. through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system,
button will be displayed. If equipped with both a exiting out of the display screen will return to the
Cargo Camera and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Rear Cross Path View
Controls menu.
Cargo/Trailer Reverse Guidance soft button will be The Rear Cross Path will give the driver a Cargo Camera
displayed. wider angle view of the Backup Camera
system. The Top View will be disabled The Cargo Camera will provide a full
screen view of the cargo area. 4
when this is selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show what is NOTE:
immediately in front of the vehicle and is If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
always paired with the Top View of the Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo
vehicle. Camera screen will return to the Surround View
screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually activated
Front Cross Path View
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect display,
The Front Cross Path will give the driver a exiting out of the display screen will return to the
wider angle view of the front camera Controls menu.
ParkSense Camera View system. The Top View will be disabled Trailer Reverse Guidance
when this is selected.
NOTE: The Trailer Reverse Guidance will provide
Backup Camera View a full screen view of the cargo area and
 Front tires will display on the image when the
tires are turned. The Backup Camera will provide a full trailer.
screen rear view with Zoom View.
 Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
 Top View will show which doors are open.
 Open front doors will cancel the outside image.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror Split If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available The system is deactivated in the following
Screen View button within the Trailer until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or conditions if it was activated manually from the
Reverse Guidance screen will display a REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
split screen to allow the driver to see both (13 km/h). button, Backup Camera button, Cargo Camera
sides of the trailer at the same time. This view allows NOTE: button or Forward Facing Camera button:
the driver to pan left/right to better frame the trailer  The "X" button on the display is pressed
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
in the image.
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph  Vehicle is shifted into PARK
NOTE: (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the  Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected icon will appear gray.
through the Surround View screen; exiting out of  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be 10 seconds
the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return to
visible.
the Surround View screen. NOTE:
Zoom View Deactivation
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera,
When the Rear View Camera image is being The system is deactivated in the following Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is acti-
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph conditions if it was activated automatically: vated manually, and the vehicle is shifted into
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE REVERSE, deactivation methods for automatic
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon (with camera delay turned on), the camera activation are assumed.
in the upper left of the display screen, the image image will continue to be displayed for up to The camera delay system is turned off manually
will zoom in to four times the standard view. 10 seconds, unless the vehicle speed exceeds through the Uconnect Settings menu Ú page 247.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into NOTE:
to the standard Back Up Camera display. PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in tion. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image. builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
view will display the standard Back Up Camera  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the Surround
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will View Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again. see an authorized dealer.
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline — 2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
If Equipped Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an horizontally or vertically. the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen that 3. Once the desired position is achieved, press Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid in the “Accept” button to set the centerline to the placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or
hooking up a fifth-wheel camper or gooseneck newly specified position. above 8 mph (13 km/h).
trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of NOTE:
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. Deactivation
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
The centerline will adjust in response to steering The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically
angle inputs, and will not obstruct the gooseneck and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
be deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
receiver or an approaching trailer gooseneck in the display is deactivated. It can also be manually
icon will appear gray.
4
camera feed. deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
 While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will
Activation Cargo Camera Zoom View
not be visible.
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated When the Cargo Camera image is being
through the Uconnect settings by pressing the Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines —
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
Cargo Camera soft button, followed by the If Equipped
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
“Dynamic Centerline” soft button on the selector position, Zoom View is available. The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view
touchscreen. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the upper left of the display screen, the image will guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire
overlay will display anytime the Cargo Camera zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing lines can be activated/deactivated through the
image is displayed. the icon a second time will return the view to the Uconnect Settings.
standard Cargo Camera display. Activation
Adjusting Centerline
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay the following ways:
centerline:
view will display the standard Cargo Camera view.  Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear
located in the bottom right corner of the the Controls screen or Apps menu
from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
Cargo Camera display. automatically resume.  Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
located in the upper left corner of the Back Up
camera display
Once activated, the camera image will remain on Activation

as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph WARNING!
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be
(13 km/h). activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance Drivers must be careful when backing up even
Deactivation button on the Backup/Cargo Camera Display. when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the Deactivation
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
following conditions: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
 The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except camera delay turned on), the camera image will backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
when vehicle is in 4WD Low continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds your surroundings and must continue to pay
 The “X” button on the display is pressed. unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the result in serious injury or death.
 The vehicle is shifted into PARK. ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position. touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of
NOTE: the camera image. CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through  To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
Camera image will be displayed until the “X” button manually activated Surround View, Backup should only be used as a parking aid. The
is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF Camera, or Cargo Camera, the below deactivation Surround View Camera is unable to view every
position. conditions apply: obstacle or object in your drive path.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped  The “X” button on the display is pressed
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the  The vehicle is shifted into PARK driven slowly when using Surround View to be
driver in backing up a trailer by providing able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position
adjustable camera views of the trailer and It is recommended that the driver look
surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on  The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
the side mirrors and the images will be displayed 10 seconds
Surround View.
side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and right
camera images are swapped and mirrored on the
touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind
the vehicle as though the driver is using the side
mirrors.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED Set Up
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes
 The bottom wedge of the Top View will be TRAILER SURROUND VIEW C AMERA an installation kit with a Trailer Surround View
displayed in black. Module and four Trailer Surround View Cameras
SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED
 The Rear Cross Path soft button will be grayed that must be installed on your trailer prior to
out. The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows connecting to your vehicle. See the installation
you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings instructions included with the Trailer Surround
 The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top View/ and the Top View of a trailer using four mountable View installation kit for more information.
Rear View and Full Screen of Backup Camera cameras. This occurs whenever the More Cams
view. NOTE:
soft button is selected, or when enabled through
The trailer will be connected to the vehicle via the
 Black video will be displayed for the right side of the Uconnect system. The image will be displayed
12-way connector, and the installation location 4
the Top and Rear View, and full screen of the on the Uconnect display along with a caution note
varies for Conventional or Gooseneck trailers.
Backup Camera view when the Rear View “Check Entire Surroundings”. After five seconds,
Camera is not connected. this note will disappear. For Conventional trailers, the connection from the
rear fascia goes to the receptacle in the bumper.
To access all camera options when the vehicle is in NOTE:
REVERSE, select the "More Cams" button on the  Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only avail-
surround view screen. able for vehicles equipped with the Surround
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), View Camera system.
see Ú page 220.  The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 247.
Conventional Trailer Connection

1 — Rear Fascia Connector
2 — Receptacle
For Gooseneck trailers, the connection from the Once the Trailer Surround View Module and Setting Description
rear fascia goes to the rear chassis inline. cameras are installed and the trailer is connected
to the vehicle via the 12-way connector, the Trailer Input the total length of
Trailer Length
Surround Camera settings can be accessed. The the trailer
Trailer Surround Camera settings can be accessed Input the total width of
Trailer Width
through Uconnect Settings by pressing the Trailer the trailer
soft button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera
Input the height of the
Settings. The system requires input of the trailer Camera Height
mounted camera
dimensions prior to use of the system.
Choose the trailer type
NOTE: Trailer Type
from menu
 If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimen-
sions have not been entered in the Trailer
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected two
Surround settings page, the system will default
Gooseneck Trailer Connection options are available: Conventional or Gooseneck/
to the settings page.
5th Wheel.
1 — Rear Chassis Inline  If a trailer is not connected and any soft button
Activation
2 — Rear Fascia Connector is selected, a message will appear: “Connect
Trailer Equipped With Trailer Surround View The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated
System”. through the Uconnect system when the vehicle is
NOTE: in PARK, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE.
 When the 12-way connector goes to the rear Inputting Trailer Values
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
chassis, there is a black cap on the bumper For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to
Surround View Camera showing the Top View and
receptacle for protection. function, all fields must be entered. When a value
Backup Camera is the default view of the system.
 In order to make the connection from the rear
is needed the screen will display “Required”.
Press the More Cams soft button and press the
chassis to the bumper, the cap must be Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras. Press
unplugged from the bumper and put on the rear Trailer Surround Camera soft button to access Top
chassis after making the 12-way connection View and Rear View of the trailer.
and vise versa.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image Right View
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out Pressing the Right View soft button will
of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for give the driver a wider angle view of the
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph right side trailer camera and is paired
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the with the Top View of the trailer.
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The “X”
button on the touchscreen disables the display of Full Screen Camera View
the camera image. To display a full screen image of the Trailer
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image Surround View mounted cameras, select one of
will close and display the previous screen after the following options from the Trailer Cameras
screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right, Trailer Front,
shifting out of REVERSE. Trailer Top and Rear Camera View 4
Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen view will
Modes Of Operation NOTE: return the system to the previous screen.
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear NOTE:
two different camera displays: distorted. If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected
 Top View split screen with one selected Rear View through the More Cameras menu, an option to
mounted camera Pressing the Rear View soft button will return to the More Cameras menu will display. If
 Full screen view of a selected mounted camera show the Top View and Rear View in a the Trailer Surround Camera was manually acti-
split screen display. vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround system, exiting out of the display screen will return
View screen and select the Trailer tab to access the to the Controls menu.
Front View
Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera
soft button to access the default Top View and Pressing the Front View soft button will Trailer Reverse Guidance
Rear View of the trailer. show you what is immediately in front of Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
the trailer and is paired with the Top View soft key will provide a split screen view of
Top View
of the trailer. the cargo area and trailer, and provides
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect the option to pan left or right. For more
Left View
system with Top View and Rear View in a split information, see Ú page 212.
screen display. Pressing the Left View soft button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
left side trailer camera and is paired with
the Top View of the trailer.
Deactivation NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated
CAUTION!
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically: manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,  To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround
deactivation methods for automatic activation are View should only be used as a parking aid. The
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
assumed. Trailer Surround View Camera is unable to
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
The camera delay system is turned off manually view every obstacle or object in your drive
image will continue to be displayed for up to
through the Uconnect system Ú page 247. path.
10 seconds, unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into NOTE:  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance driven slowly when using Trailer Surround
tion. There is a touchscreen button “X” to builds up on the camera lenses, clean the View to be able to stop in time when an
disable the display of the camera image. lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE cloth. Do not cover the lenses. driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
(with camera delay turned off), the Trailer when using Trailer Surround View.
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
Surround View Camera mode is exited and the see an authorized dealer.
last known screen appears again. AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
The system is deactivated in the following WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX
conditions if it was activated manually from the Drivers must be careful when backing up even Cameras, which display rearview and side view
Uconnect controls menu via the Trailer Surround when using the Trailer Surround View Camera. images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Camera soft button: Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
 The “X” button on the display is pressed be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
NOTE:
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
 Vehicle is shifted into PARK with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
 Ignition is placed in the OFF position your surroundings and must continue to pay equipped with a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
 Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for attention while backing up. Failure to do so can (CHMSL) and Surround View Camera system.
10 seconds result in serious injury or death.
Activation NOTE:
WARNING!
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the  If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
Backup Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped) is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue In case of engine runaway due to flammable
button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX screen along with the message “Camera fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks
button located in the upper left corner of the System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited being sucked into the engine, do the following to
rearview display. On vehicles with Surround View out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand help avoid personal injury and/or vehicle
Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can be corner. This will return the display back to the damage:
activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first previously displayed screen.  Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
pressing the More Cams button in the Surround  Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX  Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin-
feature.
camera can also be activated when the vehicle is
 The display will always default to the Trailer
guisher, direct the spray from the fire extin- 4
in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button. guisher into the grille on the driver side so that
Camera display AUX 1. the spray enters the engine air intake.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or
AUX 2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE The inlet for the engine air intake is located
behind the drivers side headlamp and receives
AUX 1 Camera Button Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting air through the grille.
diesel engines, where the engine consumes its
own lubrication oil and runs at higher and higher
RPM until it overspeeds to a point where it destroys
AUX 2 Camera Button itself due to either mechanical failure or engine
seizure through lack of lubrication.
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the “X”
in the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This
will return the display back to the previously
displayed screen.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE WARNING!

NOTE:
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
ENGINE  Never have any smoking materials lit in or fuel tank is full.
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the  Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
or the tank is being filled.
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is
the fuel door and remove the fuel filler cap by  Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument
turning it counter-clockwise. is running. cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured
properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
 A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas WARNING!
containers on the ground while filling.
 Always place container on the ground before
filling.
CAUTION!  Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
 Damage to the fuel system or emissions container when you are filling it.
control system could result from using an
 Use only approved containers for flammable
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
liquid.
Fuel Filler Cap  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
 Do not leave container unattended while
NOTE: ties into the fuel system. filling.
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
 A static electric charge could cause a spark
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. and fire hazard.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE NOTE:

WARNING!
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that filler pipe seals the system.  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator will display in You could be burned. Always place fuel
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
the instrument cluster telltale display area containers on the ground while filling.
while refueling.
Ú page 109. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If 3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
the problem continues, the message will appear “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
CAUTION!
the next time the vehicle is started. 4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
4
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
1. Open the fuel filler door. In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel,
once refueled, place the ignition in the ON position
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID
for 30 seconds, then turn the ignition OFF and wait Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
30 seconds. Repeat this procedure three times, Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent
prior to cranking the engine. diesel emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
WARNING!
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines)
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or that are harmful to our health and the environment
the tank is being filled. to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it
Fill Locations This is in violation of most state and federal
converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location natural components of the air we breathe. You can
(Continued) operate with the comfort that your vehicle is
contributing to a cleaner, healthier world
environment for this and generations to come.
System Overview Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage NOTE:

This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very  Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
(DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission kept in temperatures between 10°F and 90°F your vehicle.
requirements. (-12°C and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one  Another factor is that outside temperature can
The DEF injection system consists of the following year. affect DEF consumption. In cold conditions,
components: DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at can stay on a fixed position and may not move
 DEF tank
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The for extended periods of time. This is a normal
 DEF pump system has been designed to operate in this function of the system.
 DEF injector environment.  There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
 Electronically-heated DEF lines NOTE: that automatically works when necessary. If the
When working with DEF, it is important to know DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate
 DEF control module
that: normally until it thaws.
 NOx sensors
 Any containers or parts that come into contact DEF FILL PROCEDURE
 Temperature sensors with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
 SCR catalyst stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron NOTE:
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they For the correct fluid type Ú page 468.
 UQS Sensor
are subject to corrosion by DEF. Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side
For system messages and warnings Ú page 109. of the vehicle or in fuel door).
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
NOTE: completely.
 Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
clicking noise. This is normal operation. The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster)
will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
 The DEF pump will run for a period of time after
Ú page 109.
engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This
is normal operation.
 At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase in  After the indication appears on the instrument
the DEF gauge due to the tank thawing. The cluster display Ú page 109 fill the DEF tank
gauge and level sensor are working properly and with no more than 4 gallons (15 liters).
are just updating with proper thawed DEF.
 Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result
CAUTION!
in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level  To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
readings. the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
Refilling With Nozzles the DEF tank after filling.
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
Fill Locations Proceed as follows:
temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
4
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location  Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler tube, start however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off (the the system could be damaged.
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is full). DO
NOT proceed with the refilling, to prevent  When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
NOTE: spillage of DEF. ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
 The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to
rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
 Extract the nozzle.
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
Refilling With Containers
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the Proceed as follows: can result in severe damage to your engine,
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.  Check the expiration date. including but not limited to failure of the fuel
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately  Read the advice for use on the label before pump and injectors.
update after a refill if the temperature of the pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF (Continued)
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF tank tank.
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and
allow the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level
for several drives.
Extra care should be taken when filling with Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
CAUTION! portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
 Never add anything other than DEF to the tank level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster. (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons suspension components sometimes specified by
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or (7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when purchasers for increased durability does not
any other petroleum-based product. Even a your DEF gauge is reading ½ full. necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
very small amount of these, less than
100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. per VEHICLE LOADING TIRE SIZE
78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
entire DEF system and will require replace- GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
ment. If owners use a container, funnel or (GVWR) Replacement tires must be equal to the load
nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either capacity of this tire size.
be new or one that has only been used for The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, RIM S IZE
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose. options and cargo. The label also specifies
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
size listed.
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF
splashes or wells back in the filler neck.
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. I NFLATION P RESSURE
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube. PAYLOAD This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), load weight a truck can carry, including the weight CURB W EIGHT
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures below
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
an extended period of time with temperatures front and rear axles. The load must be distributed front and rear curb weight values are determined
below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could not exceeded. before any occupants or cargo are added.
be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF
tank.
LOADING CAUTION!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The actual total weight and the weight of the front The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 226.
ready for operation. change the way your vehicle handles. This could
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a cause you to lose control. Overloading can Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not shorten the life of your vehicle. The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of of all cargo, consumables and equipment
the vehicle should then be determined separately (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over TRAILER TOWING trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" 4
the front and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may In this section you will find safety tips and condition.
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axle information on limits to the type of towing you can The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
has been exceeded but the total load is within the reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from trailer, carefully review this information to tow your entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the load as efficiently and safely as possible. the scale.
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and WARNING!
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving. recommendations in this manual concerning If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
vehicles used for trailer towing. or more, it is recommended to use a
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
and the way the brakes operate.
The following trailer towing-related definitions will weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
assist you in understanding the following your vehicle and cause a collision.
information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight-distributing (load equalizing)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front with GAWR requirements.
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front while traveling.
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not WARNING!
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 226.  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to hitch system may reduce handling, stability
WARNING! and braking performance and could result in a
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
It is important that you do not exceed the collision.
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous Weight-Carrying Hitch
 Weight-distributing systems may not be
driving condition can result if either rating is A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
and have a collision. ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow additional information.
small and medium sized trailers.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of A weight-distributing system works by applying
the load on your vehicle. leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
Trailer Frontal Area tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
ADJUSTMENT weight distribution bars connected.
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension 4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
this is height H2.
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
NOTE: distributing bars per the manufacturers’
Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer recommendations so that the height of the
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
in the engine running position while attaching a (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension above normal ride height [H1]). 4
system. It may not be possible to enter Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly loaded. 6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight distributing hitch to confirm
2. Measure the height from the top of the front
manufacturer’s recommendations have been
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
met.
this is height H1.
Measurement Example 2500/3500

Example Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch H2-H1 28
(Incorrect) (H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measuring Height (H) NOTE:

For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500 (Non-Air 5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight NOTE:
Suspension) distributing bars per the manufacturer’s For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to recommendations so that the height of the with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
the trailer (do not connect the trailer). front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 Fifth-Wheel Hitch
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
2. Measure the height of the top of the front above normal ride height [H1]). The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow
height H1. 6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the manufacturer’s recommendations have been
weight distribution bars connected. met. Your truck may be equipped with a fifth-wheel hitch
4. Measure the height of the top of the front option. Refer to the separately provided fifth-wheel
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating
Measurement Example 2500/3500 instructions.
height H2.
Example Height (mm)
Gooseneck Hitch
H1 1030
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling
H2 1058 arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of
H2-H1 28 a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the
hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM

T RAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg) 4
Fifth-Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 35,250 lb (15,989 kg) / 5,287 lb (2,398 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
 ramtruck.ca (Canada)
 rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT TOWING REQUIREMENTS WARNING!

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
drivetrain components, the following guidelines overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
are recommended. can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
CAUTION! sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first or tires.
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
 Safety chains must always be used between
The engine, axle or other parts could be
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
damaged.
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
Weight Distribution a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph tongue and allow enough slack for turning
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full corners.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
 The tongue weight of the trailer. a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
ment put in or on your vehicle. Servicing” Ú page 384. When towing a trailer, vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
NOTE: wheels.
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer WARNING!
 GCWR must not be exceeded.
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional  Make certain that the load is secured in the (Continued)
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options trailer and will not shift during travel. When
must be considered as part of the total load on trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
your vehicle. For the maximum combined weight of dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
occupants and cargo for your vehicle Ú page 443. difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
(Continued)
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation

WARNING! pressures before trailer usage. WARNING!
 Total weight must be distributed between the  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the damage before towing a trailer Ú page 439. hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
following four ratings are not exceeded: brake system and cause it to fail. You might
 For the proper tire replacement procedures
not have brakes when you need them and
 GVWR Ú page 439. Replacing tires with a higher load
could have an accident.
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's
 GTW
GVWR and GAWR limits.  Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
 GAWR distance. When towing, you should allow for
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
additional space between your vehicle and the
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system 4
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
utilized. or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of result in an accident.
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
Towing Requirements — Tires and possible personal injury.
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a  An electronically actuated trailer brake CAUTION!
compact spare tire. controller is required when towing a trailer with
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
towing while using a full size spare tire. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
not required.
the safe and satisfactory operation of your higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers distances.
vehicle Ú page 439.
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) — The user interface consists of the following: The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of
If Equipped Manual Brake Control Lever 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer
braking).
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. activate power to the trailer's electric brakes GAIN
NOTE: independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
This module has been designed and verified with manual brake control lever is activated while the control for the specific towing condition and should
electric trailer brakes and new electric over brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
may not be compatible with ITBM. The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on load, road conditions and weather.
when braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal. Adjusting GAIN
Only the trailer stop lamps will come on when the NOTE:
manual brake control lever is applied. This should only be performed in a traffic free envi-
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection (30–40 km/h).
status. 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
If no electrical connection is detected after the working condition, functioning normally and
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
button or sliding the manual brake control lever will necessary.
display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light will not be connections according to the trailer
displayed. manufacturer's instructions.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button the Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light will plugged in, the trailer connected message
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever flash. should appear in the instrument cluster
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) display (if the connection is not recognized by
the ITBM, braking functions will not be
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
screen. Type appears on the screen. trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on setting.
enter “TRAILER TOW”. a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a
Brake Type appears on the screen. control lever completely.
heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH 4

Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Brakes Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
* The suggested selection depends and may

change depending on the customer preferences WARNING! CAUTION!
for braking performance. Condition of the trailer Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
brakes, driving and road state may also affect the the ITBM system may result in reduced or the ITBM system may result in reduced or
selection. complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
Display Messages increase in stopping distance or trailer instability increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury. which could result in damage to your vehicle,
The trailer brake control interacts with the
trailer, or other property.
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer
Ú page 109.
NOTE: NOTE:
 An aftermarket controller may be available for  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
systems. To determine the type of brakes on device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
your trailer and the availability of controllers, into water.
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
 Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it area.
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
installed. Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And 1 — Backup Lamps
Wiring 2 — Running Lamps
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer 3 — Left Stop/Turn
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are 4 — Ground
required for motoring safety. 5 — Battery
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and 6 — Right Stop/Turn
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved Four-Pin Connector 7 — Electric Brakes
trailer harness and connector.
1 — Ground
NOTE: 2 — Park Trailer Light Check
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring 3 — Left Stop/Turn This feature will run the trailer lights through a
harness. sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
4 — Right Stop/Turn
The electrical connections are all complete to the available in the instrument cluster under the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer Trailer Tow menu Ú page 113.
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
When activated the feature will enable all of the The sequence will only activate if the following TOWING TIPS
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes conditions are met:
for time to walk around and verify functionality. The Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
 Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
following exterior lights will remain on for the stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
Package
entirety of the sequence: located away from heavy traffic.
 Vehicle is in PARK
 Park/Running Lamps Automatic Transmission
 Vehicle is not in motion
 Side Marker Lamps (if equipped) The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
 Ignition in ACC or RUN transmission controls include a drive strategy to
 License Lamp
 Remote start is inactive avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
 Signature Lamp (if equipped) frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
 Brakes are not applied
 Low Beams TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range 4
 Left turn signal is not applied (using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
 Fog Lamps (if equipped)
 Right turn signal not applied control).
 Daytime Running Lamps
 Hazard switch is not applied NOTE:
During this time the following lights will sequence, Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
each activating for three seconds: The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur: range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light) the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
 Brakes are applied
2. Left turn signal improve performance and extend transmission life
 Vehicle is shifted from PARK by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
3. Right turn signal This action will also provide better engine braking.
 Vehicle is no longer stationary
4. Reverse Lamps
 Left turn signal activated from stalk Tow/Haul Mode
5. High Beam
 Right turn signal is activated from stalk To reduce potential for automatic transmission
This light check sequence will continue for a total overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
 Hazard switch is activated
of five minutes. driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
 Any button on the key fob is pushed (using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
 Ignition button is pushed control) on more severe grades.
 High Beam stalk position is changed
 Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
Cruise Control — If Equipped NOTE: BEFORE PLOWING

 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow  Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
 When using the Cruise Control, if you experience the recommendations contained within the current fluid level.
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), Body Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer,  Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
disengage until you can get back to cruising installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor- tightness.
speed. mation. There are unique electrical systems that  Check the runners and cutting edge for exces-
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light must be connected to properly ensure operator sive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½
loads to maximize fuel efficiency. safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems. inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow
Air Suspension System WARNING!
plowing position.
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the  Check that snowplow lighting is connected and
vehicle, the air suspension system can be used Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could functioning properly.
Ú page 168. adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
NOTE: airbag will perform as described earlier in this
The vehicle must remain in the engine running AVAILABILITY
manual.
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling For Information about snowplow applications visit
of the air suspension system. www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body
CAUTION! Builder’s Guide.
SNOWPLOW The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if 1. The maximum number of occupants in the
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory exterior lamps are not properly installed. truck should not exceed two.
installed option. These packages include 2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
components necessary to equip your vehicle with a GAWR should never be exceeded.
snowplow.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition
of options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow OVER THE ROAD OPERATION W ITH GENERAL MAINTENANCE
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed S NOWPLOW ATTACHED Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
either the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). These weights causes the engine to operate at higher than Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
are specified on the Safety Compliance normal temperatures. Therefore, when battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
Certification Label on the driver's side door transporting the plow, angle the blade completely When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
opening. and position it as low as road or surface conditions drivetrain damage, the following precautions
NOTE: permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The should be observed.
Detach the snowplow when transporting operator should always maintain a safe stopping
 Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when
passengers. distance and allow adequate passing clearance.
plowing small or congested areas where speeds 4
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to OPERATING T IPS are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At
specifications at the factory without consideration higher speeds operate in 4WD HIGH.
for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.  Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
The operator should be familiar with the area and use 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy
and end of the snowplow season. This will help
surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use snow for extended periods of time to avoid
prevent uneven tire wear.
extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or transmission overheating.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
under poor visibility.  Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
is parked.
has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
equipment following the recommendations while shifting the transmission.
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive
Towing Condition Four-Wheel Drive Models
Ground Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in N (Neutral)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 168. If
the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow
these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL CAUTION! CAUTION!

DRIVE MODELS  Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will  Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the cause severe transmission damage. Damage vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
drivetrain will result. from improper towing is not covered under the to the transfer case.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Before recreational towing, the transfer case
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the  Do not disconnect the driveshaft because must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow fluid may leak from the transmission, causing transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow damage to internal parts. the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into N
this procedure: (Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage will
NOTE: result, if the transfer case is not in N (Neutral) 4
RECREATIONAL TOWING — during towing.
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  The transmission must be placed in PARK for
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, NOTE: recreational towing.
following the dolly manufacturer's Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
instructions. cases must be shifted into N (Neutral) for recre- requirements can cause severe transmission
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. ational towing. Automatic transmissions must be and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to improper towing is not covered under the New
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
the following for the proper transfer case N Vehicle Limited Warranty.
automatic transmission in PARK.
(Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,  Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION! fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob. damage to internal parts.
 DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for with only one set of wheels on the ground  Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
towing, to secure the front wheels in the (front or rear) will cause severe transmission bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
straight position. and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all be damaged.
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
(Continued)
Shifting Into N (Neutral) NOTE: 9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly

If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. For vehicles with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push
vehicle for recreational towing.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal. and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
WARNING! the engine shuts off.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
You or others could be injured or killed if you  With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transmissions the shifter will automatically
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer transfer case lever into N (Neutral). select PARK when the engine is turned off.
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully  With electronic shift transfer case, push and
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N 11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle
hold the transfer case N (Neutral) button. the ignition to the RUN mode and back to the
(Neutral) position disengages both the front and Some models have a small, recessed “N”
rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will OFF mode. Remove the key fob from the
button (at the center of the transfer case ignition.
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic switches) that must be pushed using a ball-
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake point pen or similar object. Other models 12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
should always be applied when the driver is not have a rectangular N (Neutral) switch, suitable tow bar.
in the vehicle. below the rotary transfer case control knob. 13. Release the parking brake.
The N (Neutral) indicator light will blink
while the shift is in progress. The light will NOTE:
CAUTION! stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift With electronic shift transfer case:
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain to N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is  Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) completed and the N (Neutral) light stays be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
before recreational towing to prevent damage to on, release the N (Neutral) button. and must continue to be met until the shift has
internal parts. 5. Release the parking brake. been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply ensure that there is no vehicle movement. until all requirements are met or until the N
the parking brake.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic (Neutral) button is released.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. transmission in DRIVE.
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a 4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into 5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
shift to take place and for the position indicator NEUTRAL. transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the  With manual shift transfer case, shift the transmissions the shifter will automatically
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and transfer case lever to the desired position. select PARK when the engine is turned off.
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. 6. Release the brake pedal.
 With electronic shift transfer case with
 A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light rotary selector switch, push and hold the 7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
indicates that shift requirements have not been transfer case N (Neutral) button until the N
met. 8. Start the engine.
(Neutral) indicator light turns off. After the N
 If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release 9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
the engine should be started and left running for the N (Neutral) button. After the N (Neutral) 10. Release the parking brake.
a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors button has been released, the transfer case 11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
4
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This will shift to the position indicated by the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
process allows the air suspension to adjust the selector switch. operates normally.
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for  With electronic shift transfer case with
temperature effects. push-button selector switch, push and hold NOTE:
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral) the switch for the desired transfer case With electronic shift transfer case:
position, until the N (Neutral) indicator light  Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
Use the following procedure to prepare your
turns off and the desired position indicator met before pushing the button to shift out of N
vehicle for normal usage:
light turns on. (Neutral), and must continue to be met until the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving shift has been completed. If any of these
it connected to the tow vehicle. NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral), requirements are not met before pushing the
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. turning the engine off is not required, but may be button or are no longer met during the shift, the
3. Press and hold the brake pedal. helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed auto- N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
matic transmission, the engine must remain until all requirements are met or until the button
running, since turning the engine off will shift the is released.
transmission to PARK (and the transmission must
be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
NEUTRAL).
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING!
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the Driving through water more than a few inches/  Driving through standing water limits your
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and centimeters deep will require extra caution to vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
 A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light Flowing/Rising Water through standing water, drive slowly and
indicates that shift requirements have not been lightly press on the brake pedal several times
met. WARNING! to dry the brakes.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where  Failure to follow these warnings may result in
DRIVING TIPS water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road passengers, and others around you.
DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
Acceleration
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. CAUTION!
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other Failure to follow this warning may result in
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to  Always check the depth of the standing water
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon before driving through it. Never drive through
passengers, and others around you.
occurs when there is a difference in the surface standing water that is deeper than the bottom
traction under the rear (driving) wheels. of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water  Determine the condition of the road or the
WARNING! Although your vehicle is capable of driving through path that is under water and if there are any
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is shallow standing water, consider the following obstacles in the way before driving through
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden Cautions and Warnings before doing so. the standing water.
pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. WARNING!
through standing water. This will minimize
Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there  Driving through standing water limits your wave effects.
is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed (Continued)
loose sand, etc.). 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
(Continued)
If you must back down a hill, back straight down  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
CAUTION! using REVERSE gear. Never back down in ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
 Driving through standing water may cause NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill. steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo- When driving over sand, mud, and other soft required, and torque to the values specified in
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the Service Manual.
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the  Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky wheels. These things could be a fire hazard. They might
or foamy in appearance) after driving through hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
standing water. Do not continue to operate pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
driving.
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
 After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
as this may result in further damage. Such After Driving Off-Road 4
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Off-road operation puts more stress on your brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
Limited Warranty. vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can off-road, it is always a good idea to check for possible.
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause damage. That way you can get any problems taken
serious internal damage to the engine. Such care of right away and have your vehicle ready WARNING!
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle when you need it.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
Limited Warranty.  Completely inspect the underbody of your cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, You might not have full braking power when you
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
Care should be taken when attempting to climb clean as required. your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle  If you experience unusual vibration after driving
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
cautiously. rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
246
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect require software updates to improve the usability  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
3 With 5-inch Display Ú page 269. and performance of your systems or to reduce the behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
For detailed information about your Uconnect potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access authorized dealer immediately.
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your to your vehicle systems.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display system, refer The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to NOTE:
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
NOTE: most recent version of vehicle software (such as
directly regarding software updates.
Uconnect screen images are for illustration Uconnect software) is installed.
 To help further improve vehicle security and
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
for your vehicle.
vehicle owners should:
 It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
CYBERSECURITY possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
systems, including safety related systems,
be equipped with both wired and wireless able Uconnect software updates.
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
could occur that may result in an accident  Only connect and use trusted media
send and receive information. This information
involving serious injury or death. devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly. USBs, CDs).
 ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and possibly contain malicious software, and if cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless installed in your vehicle, it may increase the intercept information and private communications
communications. Vehicle software technology possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. without your consent Ú page 129.
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, (Continued)
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
MULTIMEDIA 247
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the For Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument top on faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect
panel. These buttons allow you to access and system allows you to access all of the available
change the Customer Programmable Features. programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
For Uconnect 5, press the Vehicle button on the
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or touchscreen, then press the Settings tab on the
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ system allows you to access all of the available
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn programmable features.
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control NOTE: 5
knob one or more times to select or change a  Only one touchscreen area may be selected
setting. at a time.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
and Mute buttons on the faceplate. settings may vary.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn When making a selection, press the button on the
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
tap the screen to turn the screen on. the desired menu, press and release the preferred
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu setting option until a check mark appears next to
or certain option on the Uconnect system. the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio. Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
Faceplate Buttons the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
248 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Language
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display brightness for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
Display Mode
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and
Display Brightness Headlights On
the dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
Display Brightness Headlights Off this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
Units “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 249

This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Cluster Display.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
Time Format be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Wake Up” Word
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
5
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect
Navigation Settings
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
Radio Power Off When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
Radio Off With Door
opened.
250 MULTIMEDIA

Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings Ú page 265.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
“Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
New Text Message Pop-ups
options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
Missed Calls Message
are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
Navigation Pop-ups
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
Custom Areas On Cluster This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed on the cluster.
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 251
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Language
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
Display Mode 5
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
the dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the
252 MULTIMEDIA

Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”.
The available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or
Units km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and
“Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards
Keyboard
are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
Control Screen Timeout
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 253
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the
FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have 5
the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible
Forward Collision Warning
chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide
an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
LaneSense Warning
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
LaneSense Strength
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
ParkSense
and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
254 MULTIMEDIA

This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
Front ParkSense Volume
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
Rear ParkSense Volume
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
Blind Spot Alert
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert have the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max” setting will always set
the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The available options
Power Side Steps are “Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps and “Stow” to deactivate the
Power Side Steps.
MULTIMEDIA 255
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
Sync Time With GPS
control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
Set Time And Format/Time Format be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
5
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
Set Time Hours setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
Set Time Minutes setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
256 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are
Do Not Disturb All
“On” and “Off”.
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
Enable Two Active Phones
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 257
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement
Voice Barge-In 5
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
258 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:

Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, or “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations
Trailer Select
can be used to save different trailer settings.
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are
Trailer Brake Type “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy
Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
Trailer Name
equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel,
utility, and 5th wheel.
MULTIMEDIA 259
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
Surround View Camera Delay
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
of REVERSE.
5
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
260 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
MULTIMEDIA 261
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchased.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to
Headlight Off Delay shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
5
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to
Headlight Illumination On Approach shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
Flash Lights With Lock
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options
Steering Directed Lights
262 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
Auto Door Locks
reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
Flash Lights With Lock
pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
Sound Horn With Lock
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 263

This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
Passive Entry
or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
linked to the key fob.
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort

Systems 5
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
With Vehicle Start
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is
Easy Exit Seats
shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
264 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
Headlight Off Delay vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
MULTIMEDIA 265
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Display Suspension Messages The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will
only display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
5
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Refer to an
Wheel Alignment Mode
authorized dealer for further information.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and
Balance/Fade
left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
266 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
Speed Adjusted Volume volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are
“Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
AUX Volume Offset
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is
Notification Sounds
sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
New Text Message Pop-Ups
phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
Missed Calls Message
on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 267
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
Tune Start
channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display
Channel Skip 5
of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
Subscription Information
separate subscription.
Software Updates — If Equipped

When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
the setting are “On” and “Off”.
268 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
Clear Personal Data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be
pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 269
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
270 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 273.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
Phone
hands-free phone system Ú page 283.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 247.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
MULTIMEDIA 271
Feature Description
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Feature Description
Compass Push the COMPASS button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button to access additional options. 5
272 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. away from the system. Besides damage to the
Safety Guidelines Please read and follow these safety precautions. system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
Failure to do so may result in injury or property with any electronic device.
WARNING!
damage. NOTE:
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the  Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If Many features of this system are speed
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and prolonged viewing of the screen is required, dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
assume all risks related to the use of the park in a safe location and set the parking use some of the touchscreen features while the
Uconnect features and applications in this brake. vehicle is in motion.
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do Care And Maintenance
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
involving serious injury or death. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair. sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a which could scratch the surface.
Please read this manual carefully before using the
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic  Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
and emergency vehicles. the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
system in a safe and effective manner.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
tronic device. Do not let young children use the with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
system. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play manufacturer's precautions and directions
your music or sound system at loud volumes. Ú page 476.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
MULTIMEDIA 273
UCONNECT MODES The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

push button in the center. The function of the
RADIO MODE
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS left-hand control is different depending on which Radio Controls
mode you are in.
The remote sound system controls are located on The following describes the left-hand control
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three operation in each mode:
and nine o’clock positions.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
5
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
1 — Preset Radio Stations
Remote Sound System Controls track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go 2 — All Preset Radio Stations
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with 3 — Seek Down
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
a push button in the center and controls the
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the 4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 5 — Tune
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
seconds after the current track begins to play. 6 — Station Info
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
switch will decrease the volume. 7 — Audio Settings
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
Pushing the center button will make the radio the current track. 8 — Seek Up
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
274 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes: Tune/Scroll Control NOTE:
 AM Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
 FM clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to Seek Down button will scan the different
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the frequency bands at a slower rate.
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter Seek
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, Press the Info button to display information related
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by to the currently playing song and radio station.
corresponding button in Radio Mode. pressing the double arrow buttons on the
Direct Tune
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
Volume & On/Off Control station display or by pushing the left steering wheel Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on audio control button up or down. radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
and off the Uconnect system. station or channel.
Seek Up and Seek Down
The electronic volume control turns continuously Press the available number button on the
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Press and release the Seek Up or touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Turning the VOUME & On/Off control knob Seek Down button to tune the radio to the Once a number has been entered, any numbers
clockwise increases the volume, and next available station or channel. During a Seek that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
counterclockwise decreases it. Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the starting reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will station after passing through the entire band two Undo
be set at the same volume level as last played. times, the radio will stop at the station where it You can backspace an entry by pressing the
began.
Mute Button Back button on the touchscreen.
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down GO
system. Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
or Seek Down button to advance the radio press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
through the available stations or channels at a the system will automatically tune to that station.
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
MULTIMEDIA 275
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
If Equipped 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
Customer Agreement for complete terms
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
Satellite Radio trial required.) www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
example below:
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
5
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
provides you with a list of commands. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
This functionality is only available for radios
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
outside with a clear view to the sky.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
Manual kit for more information.
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold does not receive a signal in underground parking
separately after the trial included with the new garages or tunnels.
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
276 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription When in Satellite Mode:

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the lighted.
radio does not have the necessary subscription,  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel of the screen.
only.
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription the center.
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio  The Program Information is displayed at the
subscription, US residents visit bottom of the Channel Number.
http://www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or
 The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
call: 1-800-643-2112
below the Program Information.
Canadian residents visit Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. 1 — Browse
call: 1-888-539-7474.
In addition to the tuning operation functions 2 — Radio Bands
NOTE: 3 — Direct Tune
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are 4 — Info Button
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
available in SiriusXM® Mode. 5 — Next Button
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 277
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
Play/Pause
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the
Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for 5
Rewind
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
Forward therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to

Live
resume the playing of live content.
278 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES This Screen contains many submenus. You can Remove Favorites
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
pressing the Back arrow. screen. Press the Delete All button on the
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction. All touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
pressing the All button, the following categories deleted.
button.
become available: Alert Settings
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
then uses this information to alert you when either all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
the favorite artist or song is being played at any scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. Down arrows, located on the right side of the visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating any of the SiriusXM® channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50. the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Game Zone
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch- Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the screen to display a list of Genres. You can select the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
the touchscreen. The radio tunes to a channel with the content in set alerts.
the selected Genre.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a On-Air
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the Favorites
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
the touchscreen. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
BROWSE IN SXM along with providing a list of Channels currently to that channel.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® and Down arrows located at the right side of the
Channel List. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
MULTIMEDIA 279
Add/Delete — If Equipped Setting Presets The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to Radio Modes.
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
league and a scroll list of all teams within the A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
league will appear, then you can select a team by Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
appears for all teams that are chosen. saved over the old one.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Audio Settings
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
Press the Audio button within the settings main
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
deleted. 5
Alert Settings The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. buttons, located at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert When you are on a station that you wish to save as
upon score update” or both when one or more of a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
280 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
Equalizer each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound — If Equipped
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX Volume Offset AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play — If Equipped connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped the driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected
time has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 281
MEDIA M ODE Audio Source Selection The display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Operating Media Mode start of track 1.
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and BLUETOOTH® MODE
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button Overview
on the touchscreen to be given these options: Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
 Now Playing is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
 Artists
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
 Albums
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
 Genres with the Uconnect system.
 Songs On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the 5
 Playlists MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
 Folders
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Ú page 283.
1 — Seek Down Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
2 — Browse To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
located on the faceplate.
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
3 — Source
Types of Media Modes the Source Select/Select Source button (if
4 — Pause/Play equipped).
5 — Info USB MODE
6 — More Options Overview
AUX MODE
7 — Seek Up USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into Overview
the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA the faceplate and then selecting the USB button. device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
button located on the faceplate. On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
insert a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the faceplate, selecting the Source button and
the unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. then the AUX button.
282 MULTIMEDIA
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Media Mode
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you Up button on the touchscreen for the next In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen USB.
begin to play. to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
Controlling The Auxiliary Device the touchscreen to select the desired audio
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting of the current selection. source: Bluetooth®.
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
provided by the radio; use the device controls Browse
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the AUX.
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
knob, or with the volume of the attached device. Mode, the left side of the browse window displays Repeat
a list of ways you can browse through the contents In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
NOTE:
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen when active. The Radio will continue to play the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
on the left side of the screen. The center of the current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
browse window shows items and their active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
radio unit to play the music on the device.
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
Seek Up /Seek Down pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll. function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, select the Repeat button a third time.
device. Press and release the Seek Down button Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll Shuffle
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of through and select a desired track on the device. In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
the current selection, or to return to the beginning Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
of the previous selection if the USB device is within wish to cancel the Browse function. device in random order to provide an interesting
the first three seconds of the current selection.
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
MULTIMEDIA 283
Audio MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS The feature supports the following:

Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, Voice Activated Features
Audio button Ú page 273. and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Info available for connected USB and AUX devices. Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the Push the VR button located on the steering  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
touchscreen to display the current track wheel. After the beep, say one of the following incoming SMS messages.
information. Press the Info or X button on the commands and follow the prompts to switch your  Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature. media source or choose an artist: one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
Tracks  “Change source to Bluetooth®” incoming calls/text messages.
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the  “Change source to AUX”  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.  “Change source to USB”  Calling Back the last incoming call number
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow (“Call Back”). 5
and lines above and below the song title. When in  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/ Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the “Play genre Classical” Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
line above and below the track name) and then Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
that track. device. Your Voice Command must match exactly John Smith Mobile”).
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device how the artist, album, song, and genre information Screen Activated Features
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on is displayed.
 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song PHONE MODE  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title. Overview displayed on the touchscreen.
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
284 MULTIMEDIA
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy The Phone feature is driven through your Phone Operation
access to connect to them quickly. Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
NOTE: Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the OPERATION
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via global standard that enables different electronic Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work devices to connect to each other without wires or a Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
properly. docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on structure. Voice commands are required after
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will general methods for how Voice Command works:
devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
automatically mute your radio when using the Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one 1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Uconnect Phone. audio device can be used with the system at a Smith mobile”.
For Uconnect customer support: time. 2. Say the individual commands and allow the
 US visit UconnectPhone.com or call Phone Button system to guide you to complete the task.
877-855-8400 The Phone button on your steering wheel You will be prompted for a specific command and
 Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call is used to get into the Phone Mode and then guided through the available options.
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call make calls, show recent, incoming or
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
800-387-9983 outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
or another prompt.
between the system and your mobile phone as you The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
 For certain operations, compound commands
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute Voice Command Button
can be used. For example, instead of saying
the system's microphone for private conversation. The Voice Command button on your “Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” the following compound command can be said:
WARNING! and when you are already in a call or “Call John Smith mobile.”
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the want to make another call.
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and The button on your steering wheel is also used to
assume all risks related to the use of the access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Uconnect features and applications in this Voice Command features if your vehicle is
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do equipped.
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 285
 For each feature explanation in this section, follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
only the compound command form of the voice call?” in the case where a phone call was PHONE
command is given. You can also break the requested but the specific name was not
Use this QR code to access your
commands into parts and say each part of the recognized.
digital experience.
command when you are asked for it. For The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
example, you can use the compound command To begin using your Uconnect
system requires more information from the user, it
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” Phone, you must pair your
will ask a question to which the user can respond
or you can break the compound command form compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts” mobile phone. Mobile phone
steering wheel.
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please pairing is the process of
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best HELP COMMAND establishing a wireless connection between a
when you talk in a normal conversational tone, cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ To complete the pairing process, you will need to
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
meters away from you. reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please 5
following the beep.
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
NATURAL SPEECH To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
phone compatibility information.
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Natural speech allows the user to speak Phone button.
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and CANCEL COMMAND
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
and you will be returned to the main menu.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
for a command and be returned to the main or
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
previous menu. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
the topic or context and provides the associated
286 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: NOTE: 9. When the pairing process has successfully

 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your During the pairing procedure, you may receive a completed, the system will prompt you to
phone to complete this procedure. pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make choose whether or not this is your favorite
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
from the pop-up on your mobile phone. the highest priority. This phone will take
Follow the steps below to pair your phone: 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to precedence over other paired phones within
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing range and will connect to the Uconnect system
position. or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
main screen. one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
2. Press the Phone button.
audio device can be connected to the
NOTE:  Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
Device button. simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
 If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking  Search for available devices on your phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
if you would like to pair a mobile phone. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
below). When prompted on the phone, Bluetooth® device.
 This pop-up only appears when the user
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) NOTE:
tion request.
have previously been paired. If the system For phones which are not made a favorite, the
has a phone previously paired, even if no 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress phone priority is determined by the order in which
phone is currently connected with the screen while the system is connecting. it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
system, this pop-up will not appear. 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect have the higher priority.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. system, select “Uconnect.”
NOTE:
4. Search for available devices on your 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. the connection request from Uconnect.
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
 Press the Settings button on your mobile system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
phone. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
MULTIMEDIA 287
You can also use the following VR command to DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen AUDIO DEVICE FAVORITE
on the radio:
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
 “Show Paired Phones” press the Settings button located to the right
NOTE: of the device name for a different phone or
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect audio device than the currently connected
system may interfere with the Bluetooth® device or press the preferred “Connected
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the Phone” from the list.
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
the device from the list of phones on your
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
move to the top of the list.
Bluetooth® settings.
5
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING button.
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the 2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
button.
within range. If you need to choose a particular If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
phone or audio device follow these steps: 3. Press the Settings button located to the right the ability to download contact names and number
of the device name for a different phone or entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. audio device than the currently connected Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources device or press the preferred Connected Access Profile may support this feature. Your
button. Phone from the list. mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
3. Press to select the particular phone or the 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. permission for the Uconnect system to access your
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
appear; press “Connect Phone”. Device button on the touchscreen. will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
288 MULTIMEDIA
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED Phone Call Features
for supported phones. There are two ways you can add an entry to your The following features can be accessed through
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile favorites: the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
phonebook, Ú page 292. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
 Automatic download and update of a phone- the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and service plan. For example, if your mobile service
book, if supported, begins as soon as the Blue- then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
tooth® wireless phone connection is made to buttons that appears on the list. accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start your mobile service provider for the features that
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select you have.
the vehicle. “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four then select the appropriate number. Press the Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:
numbers per contact will be downloaded and Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button  Redial
updated every time a phone is connected to the next to the selected number to display the  Dial by pressing in the number
Uconnect Phone. option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
 Depending on the maximum number of entries Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
downloaded, there may be a short delay before NOTE: Call Back)
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
then, if available, the previously downloaded  Favorites
remove an existing favorite.
phonebook is available for use.  Mobile Phonebook
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED  Recent Call Log
mobile phone is accessible. 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from  SMS Message Viewer
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited the Phone main screen.
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
only be edited on the mobile phone. The Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
changes are transferred and updated to Ucon- to remove from your favorites. This will bring
nect Phone on the next phone connection. up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
MULTIMEDIA 289
CALL CONTROLS KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
The touchscreen allows you to control the following 1. Press the Phone button. NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
call features: 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
touchscreen. Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
wheel, press the Answer button on the
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen.
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED

You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types: 5
 All Calls
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
1 — Answer  Missed Calls
2 — Mute/Unmute These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
3 — Ignore Calls button on the phone main screen. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
4 — Transfer You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above operation. 1 — Answer Button
For example, say “Show my incoming calls”. 2 — Caller ID Box
Other phone call features include:
 End Call
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
 Swap two active calls
290 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — Automatic reply messages can be: MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you CALL IS IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly”. You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
another incoming call, you will hear the same  Create a custom auto reply message up to button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
network tones for call waiting that you normally 160 characters. number from the keypad (if supported by your
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
NOTE:
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the phonebooks.
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
touchscreen while typing a custom message. TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
NOTE: without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support NOTE:
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in  Reply with text message is not compatible with
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an iPhone® devices.
incoming call or ignore it.  Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
DO NOT DISTURB Access Profile (MAP).
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
your convenience, there is a counter display to button on the Phone main screen. If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
keep track of your missed calls and text messages hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
while Do Not Disturb is active. main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text at a time.
message, a call, or both when declining an You can also push the Phone button to toggle
incoming call and send it to voicemail. between the active and held phone call.
MULTIMEDIA 291
JOIN CALLS Advanced Phone Connectivity  Fully Closed Windows

When two calls are in progress (one active and one  Dry Weather Conditions
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a PHONE WARNING!
conference call. The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
transferred from your mobile phone without wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
CALL TERMINATION terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the from your connected mobile phone to the features and applications in this vehicle. Only
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active button on the Phone main screen. do so may result in an accident involving serious
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on Things You Should Know About Uconnect injury or death.
hold, it will become the new active call.
Phone
REDIAL Even though the system is designed for many 5
VOICE COMMAND languages and accents, the system may not always
Push the VR button and after the work for some.
“Listening” prompt and the following For the best performance:
beep, say “Redial.”  Always wait for the beep before speaking NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
was dialed from your mobile phone. would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
motion.
meters away from you
CALL CONTINUATION Number and name recognition rate is optimized
 Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
when the entries are not similar. You can say
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call during a voice command period “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
has been switched to OFF. Even though international dialing for most number
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
NOTE:
 Low Road Noise number combinations may not be supported.
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the  Smooth Road Surface
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
292 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Audio quality is maximized under: say a command. See some examples below: RESPONSES
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting  “Call John Smith”
Stuck in
 “Dial 123 456 7890” Yes. See you later.
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed traffic.
 Low Road Noise  “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) Start without
No. I’ll be late.
 Smooth Road Surface  “Call back” (call previously answered incoming me.
 Fully Closed Windows
phone number) Where are I will be 5 <or
Okay.
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, you? 10, 15, 20,
 Dry Weather Conditions
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then 25, 30, 45,
 Operation From The Driver's Seat Are you there 60> minutes
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your Call me.
yet? late.
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”. I’ll call you I need See you in 5
network, and not the Uconnect Phone. later. directions. <or 10, 15,
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by 20, 25, 30,
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60>
Push the VR button or Phone button and minutes.
Phone Voice Commands now.
say:
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is I’m lost. Thanks.
1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is NOTE:
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile Only use the numbering listed in the provided
phone compatibility and pairing instructions. 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
been read. message.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
MULTIMEDIA 293
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the

full implementation of the Message Access Profile
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
directions, read text messages, and many other performance from your radio. This condition may
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
useful requests. be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
incoming text messages only. For further
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
information on how to enable this feature on BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone®
Mobile phones may lose connection to the does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
“User Manual”.
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
connection can generally be re-established by
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with operation when not using the Uconnect system.
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
text message. 5
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped POWER-UP
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
your voice to send text messages, select media, change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your using the system Ú page 476.
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
294 MULTIMEDIA
REGULATORY AND SAFETY OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED

I NFORMATION Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages
US/CANADA which display vehicle information related to the
drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle
The radiated output power of the internal wireless button on the touchscreen, select the Off-Road
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency Pages tab, and then select the Off-Road button on
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio the main screen. Off-Road Pages can also be
will be used in such a manner that the radio is accessed through the app drawer.
8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 476.
Off-Road Button
MULTIMEDIA 295
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR 1 — Transfer Case Status

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the 2 — Latitude/Longitude
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of 3 — Altitude
the four selectable page options. It provides 4 — Hill Descent Control Status
information for the following items: 5 — Current Vehicle Speed
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD

296 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS 1 — Steering Angle

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information 2 — Transfer Case Status
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and 3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
steering angle. 4 — Rear Axle
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 297
ACCESSORY G AUGE 1 — Oil Temperature

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current 2 — Coolant Temperature
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil 3 — Oil Pressure
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission 4 — Battery Voltage
Temperature, and Battery Voltage. 5 — Transmission Temperature
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

298 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL NOTE:

Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu

MULTIMEDIA 299
SUSPENSION FORWARD F ACING C AMERA

The Suspension page displays the current status of Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
the vehicle’s suspension system and the current Facing Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
ride height of the vehicle. The Suspension page will image of the front view of your vehicle. The image
also indicate when the vehicle’s height changes. will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
Suspension Menu
300
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) may result in degraded ABS performance.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and WARNING! following another vehicle too closely, or
brake performance under most braking conditions. hydroplaning.
 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
enhances vehicle control during braking.
ence caused by improperly installed or high must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that output radio transmitting equipment. This dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle interference can cause possible loss of user’s safety or the safety of others.
is started and driven. During this self-check, you anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some such equipment should be performed by
related motor noises. qualified professionals. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS is activated during braking when the Light
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system detects one or more wheels are beginning their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you stay on for as long as four seconds.
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). need to slow down or stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
You also may experience the following normal while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
characteristics when the ABS activates: of the brake system is not functioning and that
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may service is required. However, the conventional
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) brake system will continue to operate normally if
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
the ABS Warning Light is on.
 Brake pedal pulsations brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of (Continued)
the stop
SAFETY 301
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To repaired as soon as possible.
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition continuous braking pressure during the stopping
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not EBD manages the distribution of the braking
repaired as soon as possible. reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) the BAS is deactivated. prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
SYSTEM instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
WARNING! entering Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced front axle.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force nor can it increase the traction afforded by ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start collisions, including those resulting from excessive the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of 6
These systems work together to enhance both hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
vehicle stability and control in various driving vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
conditions. dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
user's safety or the safety of others. reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC). wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
braking capability during emergency braking when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency and may stay on for as long as four seconds. or other vehicles.
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or NOTE:
of brake application and then applies optimum comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce system is not functioning properly and that mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation of
braking distances. The BAS complements the immediate service is required. If the Brake System the available ESC modes, see Ú page 302.
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
302 SAFETY
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the

WARNING! vehicle path intended by the driver and compares WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
conditions and driving conditions, influence the path does not match the intended path, ESC prevent the natural laws of physics from
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
especially those that involve leaving the roadway condition. tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
or striking objects or other vehicles. The The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light including those resulting from excessive
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must located in the instrument cluster will start to flash speed in turns, driving on very slippery
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also prevent accidents resulting from loss of
or the safety of others. flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
flash during acceleration, ease up on the tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
ESC enhances directional control and stability of Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the must never be exploited in a reckless or
the vehicle under various driving conditions. prevailing road conditions. dangerous manner which could jeopardize
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) corrects for the user’s safety or the safety of others.
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
(Continued)
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the above conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
SAFETY 303
Partial Off Full Off — If Equipped

WARNING!
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC use only and should not be used on any public
maintain your vehicle, may change the thresholds for activation, which allows for more roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and wheel spin than normally allowed. turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
may negatively affect the performance of the hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
ESC system. Changes to the steering system, vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
suspension, braking system, tire type and size five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor- Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn message will display in the instrument cluster.
ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- NOTE: ESC OFF button.
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the NOTE:
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be required to System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
return to "ESC On" mode. Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
injury and death. 6
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
WARNING! predetermined speed the system will return to
ESC Operating Modes ESC “Full Off”.
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
ESC system may have multiple operating modes. (if equipped).
described in the TCS section, has been
ESC On disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
WARNING!
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system the engine power reduction feature of TCS is  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability reduction and stability features are disabled.
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes offered by the ESC system is reduced. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
should only be used for specific reasons as noted by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
in the following paragraphs. gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
(Continued)
304 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
WARNING! (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
 The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
prevent the natural laws of physics from becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
while descending hills during various driving
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active.
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
traction afforded by prevailing road condi- If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
controlling the brakes.
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
including those resulting from excessive accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. HDC Has Three States:
speed in turns, driving on very slippery Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevailing road conditions. activate).
prevent collisions. The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) activation conditions are not met, or driver is
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light is in a reduced mode. actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE: 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light controlling vehicle speed).
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in Enabling HDC
RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction the ON position. HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi- following conditions must also be met to enable
engine running, a malfunction has been detected tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was HDC:
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after turned off previously.  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer  The parking brake is released.
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
as soon as possible to have the problem following the maneuver that caused the  The driver door is closed.
diagnosed and corrected. ESC activation.
SAFETY 305
Activating HDC NOTE: Disabling HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. target speed selection, but will not affect the gear following conditions occur:
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, chosen by the transmission. When actively
 The driver pushes the HDC switch.
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
The following summarizes the HDC set speeds: priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-  The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
sponding driving conditions.  The parking brake is applied.
HDC Target Set Speeds
Driver Override  The driver door opens.
 P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate. The driver may override HDC activation with  The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
throttle or brake application at any time. (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
 R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Deactivating HDC  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
 N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
 D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) of the following conditions occur:  HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or Feedback To The Driver
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) brake application. 6
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)  Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). to the driver about the state HDC is in.
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)  Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) grade. activated. This is the normal operating condition
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)  Vehicle is shifted to PARK. for HDC.
 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions
are not met.
306 SAFETY
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for  The parking brake must be off. Disabling And Enabling HSA
several seconds then extinguish when HDC  The driver door must be closed. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
disables due to excess speed.
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. change the current setting, proceed as follows:
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill  If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward display, see Ú page 109.
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).  If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward Ú page 247.
WARNING! gears. The system will not activate if the trans- Towing With HSA
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. back while towing a trailer.
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a WARNING!
WARNING!
safe vehicle speed.
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your
There may be situations where the Hill Start
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
Hill Start Assist (HSA) may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a may not be enough brake pressure to hold
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
short period. If the driver does not apply the eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
and objects, and most importantly brake
throttle before this time expires, the system will apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll releasing the brake pedal.
under all road conditions. Your complete
down the hill as normal. attention is always required while driving to  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
The following conditions must be met in order for maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
HSA to activate: follow these warnings can result in a collision or Also, be certain to place the transmission
serious personal injury. in PARK.
 The feature must be enabled.
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
 The vehicle must be stopped.
collision or serious personal injury.
SAFETY 307
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) NOTE:

RAB may reduce the time required to reach full TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
braking during emergency braking situations. It use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
anticipates when an emergency braking situation trailer tongue weight recommendations
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is Ú page 227.
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Control system will prepare the brake system for a Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
panic stop. power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
Traction Control System (TCS) attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Rear Detection Zones
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is Off” or “Full Off” modes.
detected, the Traction Control System (TCS) may When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/ WARNING! will momentarily illuminate in both outside
or reduce engine power to provide enhanced rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle system is operational. The BSM system sensors
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, 6
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven in PARK.
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
allow more engine power to be applied to the BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control I F E QUIPPED (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
(ESC) are in reduced modes. BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
excessively swaying trailer and will take the areas.
the vehicle.
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
308 SAFETY
NOTE: The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the

 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
outside the detection zones. sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 311.
 The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
Radar Sensor Locations
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and If the system detects degraded performance due
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
can function properly. Do not block the taillights warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle indicators in the side view mirrors will be on. The
racks, etc.). warning indicators will remain illuminated until Warning Light Location
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage. The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
is operated in areas with extremely low radar
After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
returns such as a desert or parallel to a large
from ON to OFF and then back ON. driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a “Blind
system will issue an alert during these types of
Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” If the blockage message is still present after
zone entries.
message will display in the cluster, both mirror cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will again for a blockage.
not occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when
the condition clears.
SAFETY 309
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side of the vehicle. either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring 6
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles Overtaking/Passing
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate. The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
310 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path (RCP) When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
in adjacent lanes Ú page 476. alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and NOTE:
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an sensors are blocked by other structures or
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
Opposing Traffic
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
WARNING! carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
The BSM system is not designed to detect RCP Detection Zones before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your serious injury or death.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
shoulder, and use your turn signal before speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
serious injury or death. (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
SAFETY 311
Blind Spot Modes NOTE: BSM system will disable until the trailer is discon-
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the nected. If the wrong option is selected, the system
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of
BSM system, the radio is also muted. can be reset by either disconnecting and recon-
operation that are available in the Uconnect
When the system is in RCP, the system shall necting the trailer harness connector or disabling
system.
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a then re-enabling the Blind Spot Monitoring system
For further information, see Ú page 247. in the customer settings in the Uconnect system.
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/ This will prompt the trailer selection menu again to
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Only hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state allow for the correct selection.
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in always requests the chime. Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
the appropriate side view mirror based on a Blind Spot Alert Off Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
detected object. However, when the system is spot zone to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
system will respond with both visual and audible  Automatic Trailer Detection
RCP systems.
alerts when a detected object is present.
 Trailer Length Detection
Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio NOTE:
is muted. The BSM system will store the current operating  Trailer Merge Warning 6
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime be recalled and used.
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a Trailer Merge Assist
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, NOTE:
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be Path is disabled.
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected NOTE:
object are present on the same side at the same
When a trailer with an electric brake is connected
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
to the vehicle, the instrument cluster display will
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
provide a menu to allow a selection of the trailer
(if on) will also be muted.
type. There will be two options provided: Conven-
1 — Vehicle
tional and Goose/Fifth Wheel. Goose/Fifth Wheel
Trailer is incompatible and when selected, the 2 — Trailer
312 SAFETY
Automatic Trailer Detection Trailer Length Detection

There are two modes of operation for the detection Once the trailer presence has been established,
of the trailer length: the trailer length will be established (by making a
 Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
selected, the system will use the blind spot category (e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
sensors to automatically determine the pres- displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a completing the turn.
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar NOTE:
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once “trailer detection request” is enabled by the Trailer Length Detection
the trailer has been detected, the system will system once the vehicle resumes motion. 1 — Trailer Length
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge 2 — Trailer Hitch
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
the instrument panel cluster . 3 — Trailer Width
considered the forward most portion of the trailer
 Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is hitch to the rearward most portion of the body,
selected, the system will default to the fascia/bumper, or ramp of the trailer. Trailer length will be identified and placed into one
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what of the following categories:
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
size trailer is attached . Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is  Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind Spot zone
NOTE: measured at the widest portion of the trailer and will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.  Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting, NOTE: 6 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported 20 ft (6 m) .
Ú page 247. by Trailer Merge Assist.  Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
9 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to
30 ft (9 m) .
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
12 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to
Max distance .
SAFETY 313
NOTE:  Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor- NOTE:

Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of FCW monitors the information from the forward
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the false alerts. This is normal operation. looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
subject to being placed in the category above or WARNING! forward collision. When the system determines
below the correct one. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
Trailer Merge Warning to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. be provided with audible and visual warnings as
The BSM system is not designed to detect well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your brake jerk.
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always If the driver does not take action based upon these
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your progressive warnings, then the system will provide
the illumination of the BSM Warning Light located shoulder, and use your turn signal before a limited level of active braking to help slow the
in the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
is detected on. In addition, an audible (chime) alert serious injury or death. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
will be heard and radio volume reduced the system determines that the driver intends to
Ú page 311. avoid the collision by braking but has not applied 6
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
NOTE:
WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED and provide additional brake force as required.
 The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert When towing a trailer, the system will also respond
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with to activate the trailer brakes (if equipped).
that are outside the detection zones. audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a haptic If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
 The BSM system may experience dropouts below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
warning in the form of a brake jerk, to warn the
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision.
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
The warnings are intended to provide the driver
object remains at the side of the vehicle for Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
extended periods of time (more than a couple of completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
potential collision.
seconds). standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
314 SAFETY
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use Turning FCW On Or Off
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
in the control settings. For further information, see
essary warnings to the surroundings.
Ú page 247.
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
 To turn the FCW system on, press the Forward
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects Collision button once.
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading  To turn the FCW system off, press the Forward
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. Collision button once.
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail- NOTE:
FCW Message able screens.  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
When the system determines a collision with the  During an FCW event when towing a trailer, your warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the Electronic Brake system will respond by acti- vehicle in front.
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 476. vating the trailer brakes (if equipped).  When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
NOTE: from warning the driver of a possible collision
WARNING! with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is
“FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument
3 mph (5 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
cluster display.
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
detect every type of potential collision. The driver  When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by prevents the system from providing limited
posts based on the course prediction. This is
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Active Braking, or additional brake support if the
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
Failure to follow this warning could lead to driver is not braking adequately in the event of
and functionality.
serious injury or death. a potential frontal collision.
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
front using audible/visual warnings and it
the next key cycle.
applies autonomous braking.
SAFETY 315
 The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On”  Near Service FCW Warning
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the “Near” setting and the system status is displays:
vehicle is restarted. “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
 ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity system to warn the driver of a possible
closer collision with the vehicle in front  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status are
using audible/visual warnings. This indicates there is an internal system fault.
programmable through the Uconnect system.
For further information, see Ú page 247.  This setting provides less reaction time than Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which conditions, have the system checked by an
 Far authorized dealer.
allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the ence.
“Far” setting and the system status is TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
 More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
(TPMS)
system to warn the driver of a possible more
distant collision with the vehicle in front this setting. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
using audible/visual warnings. FCW Limited Warning
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
6
 More cautious drivers that do not mind If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
frequent warnings may prefer this setting. Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited NOTE:
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
 Medium instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
“Medium” setting and the system status is drivable under normal conditions, Active Braking road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the may not be fully available. Once the condition that display a graphic showing the pressure values of
system to warn the driver of a possible colli- limited the system performance is no longer each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/ present, the system will return to its full different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
visual warnings. performance state. If the problem persists, see an TPMS message. When this occurs you must
authorized dealer. increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
316 SAFETY
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by will turn off once the system receives the updated
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven CAUTION!
This means that when the outside temperature for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in  The TPMS has been optimized for the original
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire order for the TPMS to receive this information. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
pressure should always be set based on cold NOTE: and warning have been established for the tire
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) system operation or sensor damage may
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile above the recommended cold placard pressure in result when using replacement equipment
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. For example, your vehicle may have a
damage.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle recommended cold (parked for more than three
is driven — this is normal and there should be no hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
adjustment for this increased pressure. ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a sensor to become inoperable. After using an
See Ú page 439 on how to properly inflate the temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
vehicle’s tires. tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). that you take your vehicle to an authorized
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn dealership to have your sensor function
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle checked.
warning limit for any reason, including low may cause the tire pressure to rise to
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
temperature effects and natural pressure loss approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
through the tire. Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
sensor.
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or placard pressure value.
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the low TPMS Warning Light illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
SAFETY 317
NOTE: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low

 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire Pressure Warnings
care and maintenance or to provide warning of The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
a tire failure or condition. Warning Light will illuminate in the
 If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill instrument cluster when tire pressure is
Alert feature the TPMS should not be used as a low in one or more of the four active road
tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
pressure. a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display displayed.
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
readings to the receiver module.
6
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation NOTE:
has not reached the level to trigger illumination It is particularly important for you to check the tire
of the TPMS Warning Light. pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire and to maintain the proper pressure.
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual The TPMS consists of the following components:
tire pressure in the tire.  Receiver module Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
 Four TPMS sensors Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
 Various TPMS messages, which display in the possible and inflate the tires with a low
instrument cluster pressure condition (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
 TPMS Warning Light
vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate
to XX" message. Once the system receives the
318 SAFETY
updated tire pressures, the system will  Signal interference due to electronic devices or Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
automatically update, the graphic display in the driving next to facilities emitting the same radio Compact Spare
instrument cluster will return to its original color, frequencies as the TPMS sensors.  The non-matching full size spare or compact
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning  Installing aftermarket window tinting that spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There-
Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be contains materials that may block radio wave fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph signals. the non-matching full size spare or compact
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this spare tire.
information.  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings.  If you install the non-matching full size spare or
NOTE: compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
 Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in sensors. TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” message
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS will remain on and a chime will sound. In addi-
Warning Light off. sensor location condition. When a system fault tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
Service TPMS Warning occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location, still display a pressure value in a different color
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for and an “Inflate to XX” message.
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system  After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
a minimum of five seconds and then display
tire pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the message for a minimum of five seconds and then
indicate which sensor is not being received.
system fault still exists. If the system fault no display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the longer flash and the tire pressure display screen  For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning will be displayed showing the tire pressure values chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM in the correct locations. flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
pressure value will display in place of the dashes. a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
A system fault can occur due to any of the minimum of five seconds and then display
following: dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
SAFETY 319
 Once you repair or replace the original road tire can support up to 12 trailer tires per configured NOTE:
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the trailer on up to four configurable trailers The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
non-matching full size spare or compact spare, Ú page 247. process is complete.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pres-
sure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing 6
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
pressure values and warns the driver of a low tire In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
pressure event based on the drivers set target tire sensors must be installed in the desired trailer
pressure value, through the TTPMS settings found tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck.
in the radio. If the target trailer requires more than the provided
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased
warns the driver through the instrument cluster, at an authorized Ram dealership.
when either a low tire pressure condition falls With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
below 25% of the drivers set pressure or if a connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing
system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster process by entering the settings menu in the radio
will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for and selecting trailer. Select the desired trailer
each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu,
position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS and hit “Setup All Tires” Ú page 247.
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing

320 SAFETY
Follow the on screen prompts to select the Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires Pressure Warnings (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
(2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. When a tire pressure low in one or more of the trailer tire pressure information.
The range is selectable anywhere between active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Not
25-125 psi (172-862 kPa). will display a message stating “Trailer Tire Configured
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure message will be displayed in the instrument
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi values of each tire with the low tire pressure values cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic
(34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up in a different color. when a trailer number is selected that has not had
to three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating Should this occur, you should stop as soon as trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct this
that the sensor has paired. Repeat process on possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition, see Ú page 247.
each tire, in order, until complete. Do not exit the condition (those in a different color in the
pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer Trailer
was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, programmed target tire pressure value as shown
and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic. The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will Trailer” message will be displayed in the
setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired automatically update the graphic display in the instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being
during a single pairing process to receive the instrument cluster, returning to its original color. received by the TTPMS module do not match the
success screen. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number
selected. This message will be displayed when the
NOTE: 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TTPMS to receive the updated information. sensors being received completely match the
If the pairing process times out after three minutes
sensors paired to another trailer number
of no communication with a sensor, a double horn Service TTPMS Warning configured in the TTPMS module.
chip will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
a message will display on the radio indicating the
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service must be selected in the radio Ú page 247.
process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.
stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
happen every three minutes indicating the failed Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be Pressure System Service Required" message will
canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be
then back to RUN position.
SAFETY 321
System Limitations NOTE: NOTE:

The TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting It is not required to have the engine running to After use, the TFA feature will NOT remain active
through steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than enter Tire Fill Alert mode. after ignition shut down. The feature will need to be
30 ft. It is recommended to use standard tires and The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the re-enabled when the vehicle is restarted
trailers less than 30 ft long to avoid dropouts or vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. Ú page 247.
difficulty when pairing. If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA)
NOTE: the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an inoperative
position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
being received. In this case, the vehicle may need optional feature that is included as part of the
process is complete.
to be moved slightly forward or backward. normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
Tire Fill Alert designed to allow the customer to select a
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
instrument cluster. customer while inflating or deflating the vehicle's
tire.
Operation: tires.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer  The horn will chirp once to let the user know In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is 6
settings in the radio. when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system,
recommended pressure. the customer will be able to select a pressure
NOTE:
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over- setting for both the front and rear axle tire
 Only one tire can be filled at a time when using pressures by scrolling through a pressure range
the Tire Fill Alert system. filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire. from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle
 The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the  The horn will chirp once again when enough air values for the front and rear axles as shown on the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped). is let out to reach proper inflation level. vehicle placard pressure label.
 The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
The system will be activated when the system NOTE:
detects an increase of tire pressure, while filling then underinflated and will continue to chirp
The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the
the fire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with every five seconds if the user continues to
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The feature
the transmission in PARK (P). deflate the tire.
must be re-enabled through the radio each time
the ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position
Ú page 247.
322 SAFETY
The customer may also store the pressure values signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle NOTE:
chosen for each axle in the radio as a preset may need to be moved slightly forward or It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure. The customer will be allowed to store up backward. pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
to two sets of preset values in the radio for the When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire and to maintain the proper pressure.
front and rear axle pressure values. pressure display screen will be displayed in the The TPIS consists of the following components:
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for instrument cluster.  Receiver module
the front and rear axles that they want to inflate or Operation:  Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
deflate to, they can begin inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.  The horn will chirp once when the selected pres- applications)
sure is reached to let the user know when to  Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
NOTE: stop inflating or deflating the tire. applications)
The STFA system will only support inflating or
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-  Pressure display in the instrument cluster
deflating one tire at a time.
inflated or over deflated and will continue to
The customer may choose to disable or enable the chirp every five seconds if the user continues to The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
STFA feature through use of the TFA settings in the inflate or deflate the tire. (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
radio. If STFA appears grayed out it must be turned applications) tire pressure values in the instrument
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air cluster display.
on prior to selecting.
is added or removed to reach proper selected
In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
pressure level.
be enabled through the radio Ú page 247. will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) a minimum of five seconds and then display
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. 3500 Series Trucks dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPIS. indicate which sensor is not being received.
transmission in PARK (P). The TPIS uses wireless technology with wheel rim If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM
as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating a pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an readings to the receiver module.
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
SAFETY 323
A system fault can occur due to any of the I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should
following: be moved back as far as practical to allow the
Please pay close attention to the information in front air bags room to inflate.
 Signal interference due to electronic devices or
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
frequencies as the TPMS sensors. vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
as safe as possible.
 Installing aftermarket window tinting that occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
Here are some simple steps you can take to into the space between occupants and the
contains materials that may block radio wave
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: door and occupants could be injured.
signals.
1. Children 12 years old and under should 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a modified to accommodate a disabled person,
or wheel housings.
vehicle with a rear seat. see Ú page 473 for customer service contact
 Using tire chains on the vehicle. information.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
sensors. the appropriate child restraint or WARNING!
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS position Ú page 340.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in 6
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
Some of the most important safety features in your 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
vehicle are the restraint systems: rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT SYSTEMS back as possible and use the proper child
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
FEATURES restraint Ú page 340.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
 Seat Belt Systems child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
behind them or under their arm.
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
5. You should read the instructions provided with rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Child Restraints your child restraint to make sure that you are
Some of the safety features described in this using it properly.
section may be standard equipment on some 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
models, or may be optional equipment on others. shoulder belts properly.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
324 SAFETY
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS Initial Indication Change Of Status

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime equipped with outboard front passenger seat
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
includes you. This can happen far away from home
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
or on your own street.
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder active when the outboard front passenger seat is
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front animal or other items are placed on the outboard
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
times.
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System speed range and the driver or outboard front seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
(BeltAlert) passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the NOTE:
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
the driver and outboard front seat
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
passenger (if equipped with outboard
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder on and remain on until the driver and outboard
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
Light will remain on until the seat belts are front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
ON/RUN position.
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
SAFETY 325
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! WARNING!
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
combination lap/shoulder belts. or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during ously injured or killed. but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows part of your seat belt as low as possible and
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
keep it snug.
with you under normal conditions. However, in a vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk seat belts.  A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
out of the vehicle. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
including the driver, should always wear their
WARNING! belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to provided at their seating position to minimize
more severe injuries in a collision. The air the risk of severe injury or death in the event  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
6
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you of a crash. buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t portion could ride too high on your body,
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even possibly causing internal injuries. Always
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
though you have air bags. buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
you.
 In a collision, you and your passengers can even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
suffer much greater injuries if you are not instructions to wear your seat belt safely and  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- to keep your passengers safe, too. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
 Two people should never be belted into a
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be Wear your seat belt snugly.
single seat belt. People belted together can
sure you and others in your vehicle are (Continued)
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
buckled up properly.
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
(Continued) belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
326 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is and adjust the seat.
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
worn under the arm can cause internal inju- seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
your strongest bones will take the force in a necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
collision. your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
protect you from injury during a collision. You low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
and shoulder belt are meant to be used too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
together. belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a under the seat belt in a collision.
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Pulling Out The Latch Plate
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
collision, or if you have questions regarding a “click.”
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY 327
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE:
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
shoulder belt. in the upward position without pushing or
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button button to release the anchorage, and move it up or squeezing the release button. To verify the
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
retract to its stowed position. If necessary, on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow into position.
the seat belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted your injuries in a collision much worse. You
lap/shoulder belt. might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and 6
to keep your passengers safe, too.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt  Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
Adjustable Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded shoulder belt.
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the position, and if you are taller than average, you will
slot at the top of the latch plate. prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
no longer twisted. when the vehicle is stationary.
328 SAFETY
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
Instructions (Regular Cab Only) reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The latch The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
plate and regular latch plate can then be stored seat belt.
out of the way in the seat for added convenience to 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the on the buckle.
front seats when the seat is not occupied. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate from its stowed position on the seat. 2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt plate into the center red slot on the
over the seat. mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
right head restraint. slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until stowed position.
you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
SAFETY 329
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

WARNING!
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
 If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not when the webbing is fully extended and the
properly connected when the seat belt is used adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
to provide proper restraint and will increase dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
the risk of injury in a collision. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
 When reattaching the mini-latch plate and existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow occupant, it must be removed.
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the WARNING!
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
and mini-buckle. required in order to properly fit the original Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
Extender if, when worn, the distance between an accident is reduced for the mother and the
6
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Instructions — If Equipped
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body Position the lap belt snug and low below the
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and is LESS than 6 inches.
Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle  Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt can increase the risk of serious injury or death from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
the latch plate and pull. in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender behind the back or under the arm.
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. use in the recommended seating positions.
Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as when not needed.
tightly as is comfortable.
330 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped (ALR) — If Equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic
collision. These devices may improve the Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a
performance of the seat belt by removing slack child restraint system Ú page 350.
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
work for all size occupants, including those in child
each seating position.
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still Locations
must be worn snugly and positioned properly. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
replaced immediately.
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
Energy Management Feature mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a completely in this case and then carefully pull out
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor only the amount of webbing necessary to
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
controlled manner. mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
SAFETY 331
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S YSTEMS
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic (SRS)
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child Locking Mode. Some of the safety features described in this
restraint is installed in a seating position that has section may be standard equipment on some
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
and under should always be properly restrained in Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. allow it to retract completely to disengage the The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
WARNING! sensitive (emergency) locking mode. (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in interconnecting wiring associated with the
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger WARNING! electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
front air bag can cause death or serious injury  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
to a child 12 years or younger, including a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) System Components:
child in a rear-facing child restraint. feature or any other seat belt function is not Air Bag System Components
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the working properly when checked according to 6
the procedures in the Service Manual.  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly  Air Bag Warning Light
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Steering Wheel and Column
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Instrument Panel
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat  Knee Impact Bolsters
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt or children who are using booster seats.
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder The locked mode is only used to install
belt. rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward that have a harness for restraining the child.  Supplemental Side Air Bags
until the entire seat belt is extracted.  Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
332 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
service the air bag system immediately.
monitors the readiness of the electronic detected, which could affect the
parts of the air bag system whenever the  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN during the four to eight seconds when the igni- the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position. illuminate on the instrument panel. The
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
and the air bags will not inflate. four to eight-second interval. the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
The ORC contains a backup power supply system sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
that may deploy the air bag system even if the Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
tently or remains on while driving.
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
prior to deployment.
NOTE: comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the related gauges are not working, the Occupant immediately.
instrument panel for approximately four to eight Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is For additional information regarding the
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, see
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC Ú page 119.
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it Front Air Bags
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either WARNING! This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
initial startup.
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will light does not come on as a bulb check when the mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start passenger front air bag is mounted in the
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the an authorized dealer service the air bag system The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system immediately. embossed on the air bag covers.
SAFETY 333
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or

WARNING! front passenger seat track position sensors that
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing Air Bags based upon seat position.
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle 3500 Series Truck
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Features Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations information from the front impact sensors (if
2500 Series Truck
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags equipped) or other system components.
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
provides output appropriate to the severity and
A low energy output is used in less severe
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
6
WARNING! Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
severe collisions.
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- information from the front impact sensors (if
ment panel during front air bag deployment equipped) or other system components. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
could cause serious injury, including death. Air front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
ably extending your arms to reach the steering belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
A low energy output is used in less severe
wheel or instrument panel. adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
Bags.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
severe collisions.
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front air bag can cause death or serious injury front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
to a child 12 years or younger, including a detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
child in a rear-facing child restraint. belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
(Continued) adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
334 SAFETY
vehicle damage — for example, some pole Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING! collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
 No objects should be placed over or near the collisions.
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering On the other hand, depending on the type and front occupants for improved interaction with the
wheel because any such objects could cause location of impact, front air bags may deploy in front air bags.
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
enough to cause the air bag to inflate. that produce a severe initial deceleration. WARNING!
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag Because air bag sensors measure vehicle  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
covers or attempt to open them manually. You deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage impact bolsters in any way.
may damage the air bags and you could be by themselves are not good indicators of whether
injured because the air bags may no longer be or not an air bag should have deployed.  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
functional. The protective covers for the air impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all citizen band radios, etc.
bag cushions are designed to open only when collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
the air bags are inflating. position, away from an inflating air bag.
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Supplemental Side Air Bags
more severe injuries in a collision. The air detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you signals the inflator units. A large quantity of This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even bags.
though you have air bags. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
passenger side of the instrument panel separate The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
Front Air Bag Operation and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less outboard side of the seats.
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front the driver and front passenger.
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, belts and body structure.
including some that may produce substantial
SAFETY 335
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
(SABICs) windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains properly, or if items are positioned in the area
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
or “AIRBAG.”
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label side windows in certain side impact events.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the WARNING!
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
the space between the occupant and the door. The other cargo up high enough to block the
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering 6
high force that it could injure occupants if they are above the side windows where the SABIC and
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in its deployment path are located should
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an remain free from any obstructions.
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
Label Location not install any accessory items in your vehicle
WARNING! which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
Do not use accessory seat covers or place injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury roof racks that require permanent attach-
performance could be adversely affected and/or reduction potential provided by the seat belts and ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
objects could be pushed into you, causing body structure. vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
serious injury. vehicle for any reason.
336 SAFETY
Side Impacts
WARNING! WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint  Occupants, including children, who are up  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
Controller (ORC) determines whether the against or very close to Side Air Bags can be to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular seriously injured or killed. Occupants, Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity including children, should never lean on or you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid sleep against the door, side windows, or area won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
the ORC in determining the appropriate response where the side air bags inflate, even if they are even though you have Side Air Bags.
to impact events. The system is calibrated to in an infant or child restraint.
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- NOTE:
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag priate) are necessary for your protection in all Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air collisions. They also help keep you in position, trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the Rollover Events
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
Children must be properly restrained in a child
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collisions, including some collisions at certain the size of the child.
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal WARNING!
collisions where the front air bags deploy. The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt against the door or window. Sit upright in the sensing system determines if a rollover event may
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time center of the seat. be in progress and whether deployment is
than it takes to blink your eyes.
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
deployment could cause you to be severely rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
injured or killed. appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
(Continued)
both sides of the vehicle.
SAFETY 337
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or If A Deployment Occurs rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
The front air bags are designed to deflate
side windows in certain rollover or side impact continues, see your doctor. If these particles
immediately after deployment.
events. settle on your clothing, follow the garment
NOTE: manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Air Bag System Components Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
NOTE: sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the air bag system.
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring If you do have a collision which deploys the air
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- bags, any or all of the following may occur: WARNING!
nents listed below:
 The air bag material may sometimes cause
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
 Air Bag Warning Light pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
 Steering Wheel and Column belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
those you might get sliding along a carpet or authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
 Instrument Panel gymnasium floor. They are not caused by Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced 6
 Knee Impact Bolsters contact with chemicals. They are not permanent as well.
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme- NOTE:
 Supplemental Side Air Bags diately.  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
 Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal ment.
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
by-product of the process that generates the  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
 Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These to an authorized dealer immediately.
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
338 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System  Electric park brake After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
 Automatic transmission gear selector performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
In the event of an impact, if the communication
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
network remains intact, and the power remains  Horn and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
 Front wiper System reset.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response  Headlamp washer pump (if equipped) Maintaining Your Air Bag System
System perform the following functions: NOTE:
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to WARNING!
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key  Modifications to any part of the air bag system
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the could cause it to fail when you need it. You
equipped)
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in could be injured if the air bag system is not
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has the engine compartment and on the ground near there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
power the engine compartment and fuel tank before nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as resetting the system and starting the engine. If badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an instrument panel. Do not modify the front
Response System accident, reset the system by following the fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
 Unlock the power door locks
procedure described below. If you have any doubt, aftermarket side steps or running boards.
contact an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
Enhanced Accident Response System: Reset Procedure who works on your vehicle that it has an air
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response bag system.
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door System functions after an event, the ignition switch (Continued)
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
 Cut off battery power to the:
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
 Engine leaks in the engine compartment and on the
 Electric Motor (if equipped) ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
 Electric power steering
engine.
 Brake booster
SAFETY 339
Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE:

WARNING! EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- record, in certain crash or near crash-like recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tally or may not function properly if modifica- situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an a road obstacle, data that will assist in age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
authorized dealer for any air bag system understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. other parties, such as law enforcement, could
service. If your seat, including your trim cover The EDR is designed to record data related to combine the EDR data with the type of personally
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
(including removal or loosening/tightening of period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. investigation.
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such To read data recorded by an EDR, special
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer data as: equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
necessary to modify the air bag system for manufacturer, other parties, such as law
persons with disabilities, contact an autho- ating;
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
rized dealer.  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety can read the information if they have access to the 6
belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle or the EDR.
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
 How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
340 SAFETY
CHILD R ESTRAINTS There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost  For additional information, refer to
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
all times, including babies and children. Every the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
state in the United States, and every Canadian
givers or call: 1–888–327–4236
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
province, requires that small children ride in and follow all the instructions and warnings in the  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the Canada’s website for additional information:
can be prosecuted for ignoring it. labels attached to the child restraint. http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly child-car-seat-safety.html
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
crash statistics, children are safer when properly Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
SAFETY 341
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat 6
342 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints

WARNING! WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
old or until they reach either the height or weight front of an air bag. A deploying passenger support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious injury vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant to a child 12 years or younger, including a forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
carriers and convertible child seats. child in a rear-facing child restraint. support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
be more severely injured as a result.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
until they reach the weight or height limit of the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
SAFETY 343
Older Children And Child Restraints 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
WARNING! the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
Children who are two years old or who have
 After a child restraint is installed in the still sitting all the way back?
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child or rearward because it can loosen the child shoulder between the neck and arm?
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for restraint attachments. Remove the child
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
children who are over two years old or who have restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
touching the child’s thighs and not the
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of position. When the vehicle seat has been
stomach?
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a  When your child restraint is not in use, secure trip?
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
weight or height allowed by the child seat. anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
All children whose weight or height is above the not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a stop or accident, it could strike the occupants this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s or seatbacks and cause serious personal belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with injury. the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming 6
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the child’s back is against the seatback, they Children Too Large For Booster Seats the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in Children who are large enough to wear the a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
the vehicle by the seat belt. shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long correctly.
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
WARNING! their back is against the seatback, should use the WARNING!
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
 Improper installation can lead to failure of an to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in seat belt alone: under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
a collision. The child could be badly injured or the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- which may result in serious injury or death. A
back of the vehicle seat?
turer’s directions exactly when installing an child must always wear both the lap and
infant or child restraint. shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
(Continued)
344 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs
X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs
X
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs
X X
Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs
X
SAFETY 345
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following Regular Cab LATCH Positions
table for more information. Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6
346 SAFETY
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
SAFETY 347
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
weight of the child restraint) for using the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
LATCH anchorage system to attach the and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
child restraint? weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
belt be used together to attach a
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
rear-facing or forward-facing child
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
restraint?
manual for more information.
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear seat: Use the seat
Can a child seat be installed in the center belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position using the inner LATCH lower N/A – Regular Cab/Mega Cab position.
anchorages from the outboard seating No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab: Child restraints
positions? can be installed using the supplied lower anchorages for the center 6
seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower
Can two child restraints be attached using
No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an
outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
the back of the front passenger seat?
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position if
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
they interfere with the installation of the child restraint Ú page 42.
348 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars Regular Cab models have tether strap
that are found at the rear of the seat anchorages behind the front center and
cushion where it meets the seatback. right seats. Mega Cab and Crew Cab
They are just visible when you lean into models have tether strap anchorages
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will located behind each of the rear seats.
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side) 1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint In
Raised Position
SAFETY 349
Center Seat LATCH Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
described here.
WARNING! To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
 Do not install a child restraint in the center Restraint
position using the LATCH system. This position If the selected seating position has a Switchable
is not approved for installing child seats using Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the LATCH attachments. You must use the the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child Ú page 350 to check what type of seat belt each
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
seat in the center seating position. seating position has.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be  Never use the same lower anchorage to attach 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each more than one child restraint. For typical instal- on the tether strap of the child seat so that
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach lation instructions, see Ú page 349. you can more easily attach the hooks or
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 6
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear 2. Place the child seat between the lower
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether Seat: Center LATCH Anchorages Available anchorages for that seating position. If the
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the second row seat can be reclined, you may
If a child restraint installed in the center position
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
after it is attached to the anchorage. (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
outboard position, do not use that outboard
can be moved forward and rearward in the
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
rear-most position to make room for the child
install a child seat in that outboard position.
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
WARNING! to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
more than one child restraint. For typical selected seating position.
installation instructions, see Ú page 349.
350 SAFETY
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
it to the top tether anchorage. See through the child restraint belt path and then WARNING!
Ú page 354 for directions to attach a tether buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all  Improper installation or failure to properly
anchor. children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child toys and that they should not play with them. the restraint. The child could be badly injured
restraint rearward and downward into the or killed.
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to WARNING!
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.  Improper installation of a child restraint to the directions exactly when installing an infant or
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the child restraint.
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at restraint. The child could be badly injured or
the belt path. It should not move more than killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an Regular Cab
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
(ALR) Seat Belt: withstand only those loads imposed by portion of the seat belt tight around the child
When using the LATCH attaching system to install correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not circumstances are they to be used for adult clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
being used by other occupants or being used to seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure items or equipment to the vehicle. retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child Installing Child Restraints Using The a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat into the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
Vehicle Seat Belt
Mode” description Ú page 330 for additional
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the Child restraint systems are designed to be secured information on ALR.
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
SAFETY 351
Crew Cab And Mega Cab Please see the table below and the following
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions sections for more information.
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or Child Restraints In This Vehicle
both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is Locations
pulled back into the retractor. See the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description Ú page 330 for Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
additional information on ALR. The cinching latch ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6
belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
352 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child to the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint? restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
of the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraints can be removed in every rear
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 42.
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH),
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
seat belt against the belt path of the child
No – ALR Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
restraint?
with an ALR retractor.
SAFETY 353
Installing A Child Restraint With A For Regular Cab Models 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor the seating position has a top tether
Place the child seat in the center of the seating anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
(ALR): position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward anchorage and tighten the tether strap. For
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured as possible to keep the child as far from the directions to attach a tether anchor, see
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion passenger air bag as possible. Ú page 354.
of a lap/shoulder belt.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
WARNING!
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than
 Improper installation or failure to properly the belt path. 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
hear a “click.” the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
or killed.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
tight against the child seat.
directions exactly when installing an infant or Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
child restraint. 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder 6
part of the belt until you have pulled all the Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
1. For Mega And Crew Cab Models allow the webbing to retract back into the of a lap/shoulder belt.
Place the child seat in the center of the seating retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is WARNING!
position. If the second row seat can be re-
clined, you may recline the seat and/or raise now in the Automatic Locking mode.  Improper installation or failure to properly
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and is locked, you should not be able to pull out any the restraint. The child could be badly injured
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat or killed.
it to its rear-most position to make room for the step 5.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
child seat. You may also move the front seat 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to directions exactly when installing an infant or
forward to allow more room for the child seat. tighten the lap portion around the child child restraint.
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
354 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
seating position. If the second row seat can by pulling back and forth on the child seat at Tether Anchorage
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or the belt path. It should not move more than
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING!
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
wish to move it to its rear-most position to the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. seat to any location in front of the car seat,
make room for the child seat. You may also If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
move the front seat forward to allow more to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
room for the child seat. may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
happens, disconnect the latch plate from the that seating position, located behind the top of
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
into the buckle with the release button facing out, Ú page 345.
webbing in the belt path.
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6,
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
above, to complete the installation of the child
hear a “click.”
restraint.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
tighten the lap portion around the child
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from
restraint while you push the child restraint
the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn,
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and you still cannot make the child restraint installation
the seating position has a top tether tight, try a different seating position.
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 354 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
SAFETY 355
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks: 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether direct path between the anchorage and the 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
anchorages are located behind the child seat. The tether strap should go between the rear seat and rear glass to access the
center and right passenger seats. In the the head restraint posts underneath the head tether strap loop.
mega cab truck, the top tether restraint. You may need to adjust the head
anchorages are located behind each rear seating restraint to the upward position to pass the
position. There is a plastic cover over each tether strap underneath the head restraint
anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child and between its posts.
restraint: 3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach Tighten the tether strap according to the child
over the seat back, under the head restraint seat manufacturer’s instructions.
and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat. WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front Head Restraint In Raised Position 6
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Crew Cab Trucks:

The top tether anchorages in this vehicle
are tether strap loops located between
the rear glass and the back of the rear
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages seat. There is a tether strap loop located
1 — Tether Anchor behind each seating position. Follow the steps
below to attach the tether strap of the child Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
2 — Tether Strap Hook Raised Position
restraint.
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
356 SAFETY
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust Center Seat:

the tether strap so that it will reach over the 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
seat back, under the head restraint, through the rear seat and rear glass to access the
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over tether strap loop.
to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
tether two outboard child seats. the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
to the tether strap loop behind either the right
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop or left outboard seat.
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY 357
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head 5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
restraint behind the child seat, though the seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right and left tether straps before the
the right or left outboard tether strap loop. center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown 6
seat. Route the tether straps following the
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap directions for right and left seating positions,
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap above. WARNING!
according to the child seat manufacturer’s 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
instructions. loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. lead to increased head motion and possible
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
Route the tether strap following the directions position directly behind the child seat to
for the center seating position, above. secure a child restraint top tether strap.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
loop. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
358 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS TRANSPORTING P ETS Air Bag Warning Light

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about four to eight seconds as a bulb check
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during when the ignition switch is first placed in
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
panic braking or in a collision. the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either
AREA.
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if driving, have the system inspected at an
WARNING! equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked secured by seat belts. bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
may cause serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
I NSIDE THE VEHICLE removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- Seat Belts remains on while driving, have an authorized
sion, people riding in these areas are more dealer service the vehicle immediately
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking Ú page 323.
likely to be seriously injured or killed. for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your must be replaced immediately. Do not Defroster
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and disassemble or modify the system. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
seat belts. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you place the blower control on high speed. You should
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor be able to feel the air directed against the
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
and using a seat belt properly. your defroster is inoperable.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
SAFETY 359
Floor Mat Safety Information

WARNING! WARNING!
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE into the driver’s side floor area when the
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely before installing any other floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot NEVER install or stack an additional trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
slip out of position and interfere with the floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
operation of your vehicle in other ways. vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
WARNING! vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator,
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals.
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere vehicle.
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent 6
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the each pedal to check for interference with the
mat using the floor mat fasteners. brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
DO NOT install your floor mat upside check for interference. If your floor mat inter- re-install the floor mats.
down or turn your floor mat over. feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
always check your floor mat has been properly
trunk.
(Continued) installed and is secured to your vehicle using
 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
the passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
360 SAFETY
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
WARNING!
Tires Open seams or loose connections could permit
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or odorless. Breathing it can make you system each time the vehicle is raised for
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. unconscious and can eventually poison you. lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. confined areas any longer than needed to
WARNING!
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
Lights Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
 If you are required to drive with the
Have someone observe the operation of brake deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
lights and exterior lights while you work the carbon monoxide poisoning:
that all windows are closed and the climate
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed.  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas,
Door Latches which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked
the engine running, adjust your heating or
vehicle with the engine running for an extended
Fluid Leaks cooling controls to force outside air into the
period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Check area under the vehicle after overnight with the engine running for more than a short
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. period, adjust the ventilation system to force
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or The best protection against carbon monoxide entry fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
be located and corrected immediately. engine exhaust system.
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be Have any abnormal conditions repaired
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an windows fully open.
361
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
the upper switch bank just below the radio. oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only
when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety
hazard warning for other motorists.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button When you must leave the vehicle to seek
NOTE: assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch continue to operate even though the ignition is
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers placed in the OFF position.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button button is located above the display. NOTE: 7
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button

362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
NOTE: rized by the subscriber Ú page 476.
Depending on the vehicles trim level, the overhead
 The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
console may vary.
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) 3G or 4G (data) network, which comes as
a built in feature. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Assist And SOS Buttons
ASSIST Call
1 — ASSIST Button The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
2 — SOS Button connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
If equipped, the overhead console contains an  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
Assist And SOS Buttons ASSIST and a SOS button. need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
1 — ASSIST Button you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
WARNING! Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
2 — SOS Button
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
may apply for roadside assistance.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
and assume all risks related to the use of the support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
features and applications in this vehicle. Only  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
use the features and applications when it is safe other vehicle issues.
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
accident involving serious injury or death.
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
SOS Call 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead operator through the vehicle audio system to appropriate emergency responders and
console. determine if additional help is needed. provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
NOTE: WARNING!
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to WARNING!
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
on the overhead console or press the cancellation and assume all risks related to the use of the
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the use the features and applications when it is safe
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
overhead console. to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
and move to a safe location.
accident involving serious injury or death.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
operable network and GPS antennas. You
green once a connection to a SOS operator has NOTE:
could prevent operable network and GPS
been made.  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as signal reception, which can prevent your
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a authorized by the subscriber. vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system  Once a connection is made between the operable network and GPS signal reception is 7
may transmit the following important vehicle vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- required for the SOS Call system to function
information to a SOS operator: ator, the SOS operator may be able to open properly.
 Indication that the occupant placed a a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- (Continued)
SOS Call. mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
 The vehicle brand.
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
 The last known GPS coordinates of the should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle. vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
WARNING! of the following may occur at the time the factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- each ignition cycle: include, but are not limited to, the following
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s  The overhead console light located within the factors:
electrical system. This may prevent your ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-  The ignition is in the OFF position.
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an nate red.  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
 The Device Screen will display the following  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
message: “Vehicle device requires service. are damaged during a crash.
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle disconnected during a vehicle crash.
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
WARNING! able or obstructed.
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
 Ignoring the overhead console light could
OPERATE. facility.
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated, have  Operator error by the SOS operator.
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail an authorized dealer service the SOS Call  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
when you need it. You could be injured if the system immediately. tion.
air bag system is not there to help protect you.  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns  Weather.
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
SOS Call System Limitations panel if a malfunction in any part of the tunnels.
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
system capabilities.
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico immediately.
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
WARNING! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to WARNING! system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of changing a tire.
and assume all risks related to the use of the the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
This feature can be activated through the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only enough off the road to avoid the danger of
Uconnect system Ú page 265.
use the features and applications when it is safe being hit when operating the jack or changing
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an the wheel. PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
accident involving serious injury or death.  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on Avoid ice or slippery areas.
NOTE: you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. WARNING!
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
rized by the subscriber. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
it to a service center where it can be raised on
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s a lift. the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS enough off the road to avoid being hit when
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle operating the jack or changing the wheel.
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can is on a jack. 7
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) changing tires only. The jack should not be
network connection and a GPS signal is 3. Apply the parking brake.
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
required for the SOS Call system to function The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level 4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
properly. surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover Remove the jack and tools from the bracket
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For toward the front of the seat until it is free from the assembly. Turn the jack turn-screw
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being seat frame. counterclockwise to release jack from bracket
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel. assembly.
Jack Access Cover

Wheel Blocked Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
NOTE: counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when slide the assembly out from under the seat.
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
J ACK L OCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL O F JACK A ND T OOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the Jacking Tools
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
There are two ways to assemble the tools: Assembled For Jack Operation
CAUTION!
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
 The lug wrench can only be attached to exten-
sion two (2).
 When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension four (4) is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
 Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from improper
tool assembly.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising 1 — Lug Wrench
1 — Lug Wrench 2 — Extension 2
2 — Extension 2 3 — Extension 3
3 — Extension 3 4 — Extension 4
4 — Extension 4 5 — Jack Driver 7
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid
acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools,
bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move
around with force, resulting in serious injury.
REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
extension tubes with the curved angle facing
cable.
away from the vehicle. Insert the extension
tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/
bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole

2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
Removing The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Winch Mechanism Tube
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out

J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS WARNING!

WARNING!  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
vehicle: careful of motor traffic.
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
the edge of the roadway as possible before securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
raising the vehicle. the valve stem facing the ground.
Lug Wrench Adapter Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the CAUTION!
transmission in PARK.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel locations other than those indicated in the
to be raised. Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack. 7
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Jack Warning Label
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
(Continued)
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from Front Jacking Location
storage.
When changing the front wheel, assemble the
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not
jack driver to the jack and connect
remove, the wheel nuts by turning them
the jack driver to the extension tubes.
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground. Changing a dually tire Place the jack under the axle as close to the
requires the lug wrench adapter. tire as possible with the drive tubes extending
to the front. Connect the extension tubes and
NOTE: lug wrench.
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground Ú page 374. Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
Front Lifting Point
Lug Wrench Adapter

Jack / Extensions Placement
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
Front Jacking Location Rear Lifting Point the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
Rear Jacking Location 4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack WARNING!
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
under the axle between the spring and the make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
shock absorber with the extension tubes ex- jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle 7
tending to the rear. only enough to remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location

Connect the extension tubes and lug
wrench.
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On 7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the
Single Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On wheel. This may result in cap damage.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel models (DRW) trucks, 8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
if the outer tire is being replaced then leave the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously
the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner described.
wheel is being replaced remove the outer
wheel and replace the inner wheel. The wheel NOTE:
nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on 9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
lowered. the lug wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in NOTE:
a star pattern until each nut has been Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
tightened twice Ú page 461. If in doubt about substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or
TO STOW THE FLAT O R S PARE
service station. 1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
WARNING! cable and position it properly across the
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision wheel opening.
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of 2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement spare tire in the places provided. winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped) the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
REINSTALLING T HE JACK A ND T OOLS

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket
assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is under
the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools
into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack
into bracket assembly and turn the jack
Reinstalling The Retainer Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
Position bracket assembly.
3. Lay the wheel flat after the retainer is installed.
4. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes 5. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
with the curved angle facing away from the the wheel is drawn into place against the
vehicle. Insert the extensions through the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
access hole between the lower tailgate and until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the click three or four times. It cannot be
winch mechanism tube. overtightened. Push against the tire several 7
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
wrench or other power tools is not WARNING!
recommended and can damage the winch.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) models,
storage position holding the jack by the jack use the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the off the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap,
seat so that the bottom slot engages into the insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you
fastener on the floor. need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel
surface.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS —

I F E QUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising the
Jack Hold Down Fastener vehicle off the ground.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
CAUTION! On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW),
slides into the front hold down location. Use extreme caution when removing the front you must first remove the hub caps—use the
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover. center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat end of
tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off the lug wrench between the outer edge of the
motion, is recommended to remove the caps. wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel
to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
around the wheel until the cover pops off.
JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a the engine compartment, behind the driver side
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable headlight assembly.
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the batteries, jump start off the driver side battery.
procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
CAUTION! personal injury.
 Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap.

Do not use a twisting motion when removing CAUTION!
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish
may occur. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
 The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has
any other booster source with a system voltage Battery Location 7
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook starter motor, alternator or electrical system may The positive battery post may be covered with a
of the jack handle driver is located squarely in occur. protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
the cap notch before attempting to pull off. gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post
NOTE:
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
ease the installation. Align the wheel cover vent post.
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel precautions. 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly around the transmission into PARK and turn the ignition
wheel. OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
cables reach apply the parking brake, make WARNING! “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
sure the ignition is OFF. part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
could result in personal injury or property must be away from the battery and the fuel
WARNING! damage due to battery explosion. injection system.
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be CAUTION!
injured by moving fan blades.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, damage to the charging system of the booster
watch bands and bracelets that could make vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open vehicle. Jump Starting Label
flames or sparks away from the battery.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off WARNING!
WARNING! positive post. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the electrical spark could cause the battery to
could establish a ground connection and booster battery. explode and could result in personal injury.
personal injury could result.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the

booster battery, let the engine idle a few
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
minutes, and then start the engine in the battery. 6–S PEED TRANSMISSION
vehicle with the discharged battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
CAUTION! vehicle with the discharged battery. cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can
use the following procedure to temporarily move
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
If frequent jump starting is required to start your the gear selector:
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
electrical current will blow the fuse. vehicle you should have the battery and charging 1. Turn the engine OFF.
system inspected at an authorized dealer. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon- CAUTION! 3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
nection procedure below. 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
pedal.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). 5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will steering column, and push and hold the
with the discharged battery.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life override release lever up.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) and/or prevent the engine from starting.
7
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location

MANUAL PARK RELEASE Follow the below steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
8–S PEED TRANSMISSION 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
WARNING! remove the Manual Park Release access
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the cover, which is just above the parking brake
parking brake before activating the Manual Park release handle, below and to the left of the
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the steering column.
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
Gear Selector Override Access Port pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the

transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a Manual Park Release Access Cover
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available. 3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the
Engaging The Access Port Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just
below the middle of the lever) to the right.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. While holding the locking tab in the

disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place lever. If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
pointing towards the driver's seat. Release the serviced by an authorized dealer.
locking tab and verify that the Manual Park 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
to its original position, until the locking tab In any of the following situations, you can reduce
Release lever is locked in the released the potential for overheating by taking the
position. snaps into place to secure the lever.
appropriate action.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that
 On the highways — slow down.
the lever is locked in its stowed position.
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
Manual Park Release Tether system and turning the A/C off can help remove 7
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be this heat.
Manual Park Release Tether In Stowed Position
towed. Release the parking brake only when  You can also turn the temperature control to
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow 4. Re-install the access cover. maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
vehicle. the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that

WARNING! will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning CAUTION!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine the wheels or racing the engine.  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. NOTE: lead to transmission overheating and failure.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
 For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmis-
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
sion, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
system pressure cap when the radiator or overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
coolant bottle is hot. sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
stuck vehicle.
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
CAUTION! between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
 Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 302. drivetrain damage may result.
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode. fast may lead to transmission overheating and
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear WARNING! spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
immediately and call for service.
generated by excessive wheel speeds may ring).
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking seconds continuously without stopping when
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 240.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System Ú page 168 must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to
follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Wheels OFF The
Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
Ground
If transmission is operable: Detailed instructions Ú page 240

• Transmission in NEUTRAL  Automatic Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed  Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed transmission)  Tow in forward direction
Front • 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed transmission) NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED 7
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS CAUTION!
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose, FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. requirements can cause severe transmission
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar If flatbed equipment is not available, and the damage. Damage from improper towing is not
or other towing device to main structural members transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed covered under the New Vehicle Limited
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated (with rear wheels on the ground) under the Warranty.
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles following conditions:
under tow must be observed.
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
If you must use the accessories (wipers, Instructions on shifting the transmission to
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. Ú page 378. OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
 The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
(48 km/h).
transmission out of PARK Ú page 378.
 The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles CAUTION!
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
CAUTION!  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
 The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. (24 km) for 6–speed transmission.
Vehicle damage may occur. Internal damage to the transmission or
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or lift is used when towing.
do not attach to front or rear suspension farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
components. Damage to your vehicle may  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods to
result from improper towing. requirements can cause severe transmission
tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
 The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on improper towing is not covered under the New
a towing dolly Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold
the front wheels in the straight position with the
rear wheels raised when and the front wheels
ON the ground.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — WARNING! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

I F EQUIPPED  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. (EARS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow Chains may break, causing serious injury or
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
hooks. death.
Accident Response System.
NOTE:  Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow This feature is a communication network that
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 338.
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of causing serious injury.
damage to the vehicle.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
CAUTION! This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue record data that will assist in understanding how a
a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
You could damage your vehicle. deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 339.
Front Tow Hooks

384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
ENGINE oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
 Check windshield washer fluid level.
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
change indicator system. The oil change indicator described under instrument cluster display or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
system will remind you that it is time to take your Ú page 109. ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. cator system turns on.
NOTE:
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
Under no circumstances should oil change
change indicator message will illuminate. This brake master cylinder and power steering and
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
means that service is required for your vehicle. fill as needed.
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
customers.
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
MAINTENANCE P LAN — G ASOLINE E NGINE

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
8
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for X X X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. 1 X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at

10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or X X
frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. 8
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE At Each Stop For Fuel ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after
CAUTION! a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil  Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace the
level while the vehicle is on level ground will engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
Failure to perform the required maintenance
improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add  Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or
MIN mark.  Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Required Maintenance Intervals Once A Month  Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following with serviceable fittings.
 Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the
pages for the required maintenance intervals.  Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
terminals as required.
More frequent maintenance may be needed in Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may
severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, be more frequent if vehicle is operated in
short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, brake master cylinder, and automatic transmis- extreme dusty conditions.
additional maintenance not specified in the sion, and add as needed.
Inspection and service should also be performed
maintenance schedule may be required. At Each Oil Change anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected.
 Change the engine oil filter. Retain all receipts.
 Inspect the exhaust system. NOTE:
 Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg- hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent
premature wear.
OIL C HANGE I NDICATOR SYSTEM — Replace the engine oil and oil filter every PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR —
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or
DIESEL E NGINE sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator D IESEL E NGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change system. Under no circumstances should oil change Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at
indicator system. This system will alert you when it intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or a set interval. To help remind you when this
is time to change your engine oil by displaying the 12 months, whichever comes first. maintenance is due, the instrument cluster will
words “Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster NOTE: display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
display. The engine oil change indicator system is Service” message is displayed on the instrument
 Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil cluster it is necessary to have the emissions
vals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
change interval may fluctuate depending on your maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance
12 months or 500 hours, whichever comes first.
personal driving style. Failure to change the engine may include replacing the Closed Crankcase
oil per the maintenance schedule can result in  It is recommended that every 3,000 miles Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for
internal engine damage. (4,800 km), check the engine oil level at least clearing and resetting the “Perform Service”
30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut indicator message is located in the appropriate
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on Service Information.
indicator message after completing the scheduled
level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
below the ADD or MIN mark.
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under instrument cluster display  Severe service (high ambient temperature,
Ú page 109. short trips, heavy loading, trailer towing,
off-road, or law enforcement use) may reduce 8
oil change intervals.
If models configured with optional B20 capability
are operated with greater than 5% levels of
biodiesel, the oil change interval must not exceed
12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours,
whichever comes first under any circumstances.
See the Fuel Requirements section for more
information regarding operation with biodiesel
blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-7467.
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL ENGINE

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
(whichever comes first):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change engine oil every

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months or 500 Hours or
sooner if prompted by the oil X X X X X X X X X X
change indicator system,
whichever comes first.1
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(DEF) tank, refill if necessary.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate —
If equipped with serviceable X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
fittings.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect engine air cleaner filter,

X X X X X X X X X X
replace if necessary. 2
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie
rod ends and boot seals for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
X X X X X X X X X X
damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X 8
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel
X X X X X X X X X X
filter.
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
X X X X X X
using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing change the axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid
(4x4), change for any of the
X X X X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change the transfer case fluid

X X
(4x4).
Change automatic transmission
X X X X
fluid (AS69RC transmission only).
fluid and sump filter (AS69RC X X
transmission only).
fluid and filter(s) if using your
vehicle for any of the following: X X
police, fleet, or frequent trailer 8
towing (68RFE transmission only).
X
fluid and filter(s).
Replace Crankcase Ventilation
X X
Filter (CCV).
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace power steering

X
fluid.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
X
***
1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
2. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local authorized dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
6.7L DIESEL E NGINE — 6-S PEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6.7L DIESEL E NGINE — 6-S PEED AS69RC HD
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL NOTE: To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer

Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil markings on the dipstick. that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the your climate. This rating information can be found
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel on most washer fluid containers.
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
level to the high end of the range marking.
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine WARNING!
is shut off. CAUTION! Commercially available windshield washer
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
There are four possible dipstick types: could damage your engine. working around the washer solution.
 Crosshatched zone.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. ADDING W ASHER FLUID defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
should be checked for fluid level at regular cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
range.
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer with water as directed on the container, aids
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free  It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service
battery. You will never have to add water, and the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to
periodic maintenance is not required. to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which
WARNING! are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself.
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or and free of corrosion. NOTE:
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery systems may void your warranty and could result in
on skin, flush the area immediately with large cables before connecting the charger to the civil penalties being assessed against you.
amounts of water Ú page 376. battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
WARNING!
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep starting voltage.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not You can be badly injured working on or around a
use a booster battery or any other booster motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each Cleaning the engine compartment with a high equipment. If you have any doubt about your
other. pressure washer is not recommended. ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic. 8
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
CAUTION!
hands after handling. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressure
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL The API Starburst trademark certifies Materials Added To Engine Oil
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
the addition of any additives (other than leak
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
Ú page 468. engineered product and its performance may be
and 5W-40 engine oil.
NOTE: impaired by supplemental additives.
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after content may produce damaging deposits on Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
startup and then quiet down after approximately cylinder head valves and/or after treatment Filters
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the system damage. A maximum sulfated ash content
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
of 1.00 mass % is recommended for all oil used in oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started the engine.
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. The same oil change interval is to be followed for problem to the environment. Contact an
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for synthetic oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also, authorized dealer, service station or governmental
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended synthetic oil must meet the same performance agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine specifications as petroleum oil. oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized CAUTION! ENGINE OIL FILTER
dealer. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine the chemicals can damage your engine. Such filter at every engine oil change.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Engine Oil Filter Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Limited Warranty.
Ú page 468. A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Synthetic Engine Oils varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
Approved Engine Oil certified filters should be used.
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER NOTE:

When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384. vehicles equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine,
replace with a dry (non-oiled) filter only.
WARNING!
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, 1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the on engine air cleaner filter.
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection NOTE:
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter present before replacing the engine air cleaner
should be used to ensure most efficient service. filter.
Mopar® engine air cleaners are a high quality filter
1 — Fasteners
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
8
2 — Air Hose Clamp
and are recommended. housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And filter inspection surface facing downward.
Replacement — Gasoline Engine 2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the housing assembly.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or the engine air cleaner filter.
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris 3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the cleaner filter assembly.
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE

Replacement — Diesel Engine For best possible performance, your air conditioner
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or should be checked and serviced by an authorized
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris dealer at the start of each warm season. This
you should change your engine air cleaner filter. service should include cleaning of the condenser
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
WARNING!
Engine Air Cleaner Filter  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter air conditioning system. Some unapproved
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
NOTE: Information Book, for further warranty infor-
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is mation.
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.  The air conditioning system contains refrig-
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
1. Install the engine air cleaner into the housing
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover assembly with the engine air cleaner filter personal injury or damage to the system,
inspection surface facing downward. adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
2 — Screws
to be disconnected should be done by an
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto experienced technician.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the housing assembly locating tabs.
the engine air cleaner filter. 3. Tighten (6) screws to secure the engine air
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
housing assembly.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
CAUTION! behind the glove compartment. Perform the
R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
Do not use chemical flushes in your air following procedure to replace the filter:
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
conditioning system as the chemicals can 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
damage your air conditioning components. Such contents.
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
ozone-friendly substance with a low 2. With the glove compartment door open,
Limited Warranty.
global-warming potential. The manufacturer remove the glove compartment tension tether
recommends that air conditioning service be and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — performed by an authorized dealer using recovery face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
R-134a — (If Equipped) and recycling equipment. clip out of glove compartment door and
NOTE: release into dash panel.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
substance. The manufacturer recommends that compressor oil, and refrigerants.
air conditioning service be performed by an Cabin Air Filter Replacement
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384.
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: WARNING!
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
compressor oil and refrigerants.
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
8
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and Right Side Of Glove Compartment
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. 1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the 4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the 5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
glove compartment. Push inward on right side finger tabs on each end of the filter cover. out of the housing.
of the glove compartment travel stop to
disengage the stop. Then pull the right of the
glove compartment outward (away from the
hinge) to disengage the right side of the
compartment from the hinge. Continue by
removing the left side from the hinge by slightly
lowering the compartment while pulling
outward until it is completely disengaged from
the hinge.
Filter Cover Cabin Air Filter

6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
Glove Compartment indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
the need to replace it more often.
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
Filter Cover Removal
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION

hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall WARNING!
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
belt with vehicle running.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
 You can be badly injured working on or around Conditions that would require replacement:
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
you have the knowledge and the proper equip- from belt body)
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a  Rib or belt wear
Right Side Of Glove Compartment competent mechanic.  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop ribs)
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt slips
3 — Glove Compartment Door cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain 8
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a correct position on pulley)
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
NOTE: along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
 Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and before new belt is installed)
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension frayed cords or severe glazing. is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
compartment and sliding the clip away from component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
the face of the glove compartment door. should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the and turn the under body mounted filter drain valve
use of special tools, we recommend having your CAUTION! (located on the bottom of the filter assembly)
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on, counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn the ignition
DO NOT START the engine before you drain water switch to the ON position, and allow any
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage. accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve
FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE open until all water and contaminants have been
removed. When clean fuel is visible, close the drain
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a
valve following these guidelines:
on the driver's side of the engine. The best access single chime is heard while you are driving, or with
to this water drain valve is from under the hood. the ignition switch in the ON position, there may be 1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you
The second one is on the under body, located in a problem with your water separator wiring or feel resistance from the internal seal.
front of the rear axle above the drive shaft. The sensor. See an authorized dealer for service. 2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to
best access to this water drain valve is from under Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel properly compress the seal.
the vehicle. filters, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain NOTE:
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the Over-compression of the seal due to over-tight-
CAUTION! water was drained while the engine was running, ening of the drain will damage the seal, cause a
 Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may remain on for leak, and require the entire sensor to be replaced.
when the engine is running. approximately three minutes. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids The sensor drain should not be over-tightened
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately during normal service operations to avoid internal
container.
discarded, can present a problem to the envi- damage and future fuel leaks. The drain should be
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service closed and secured without the use of tools.
If water is detected in the water separator while the station, or government agency for advice on recy- If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in cling programs and for where used fluids and have been drained, follow the directions
the ON position, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light filters can be properly disposed of in your area. Ú page 408.
will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the
five times. At this point you should stop the engine
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within
and drain the water from both of the filters.
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine
mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of
the filter assembly) counterclockwise 1/4 turn,
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL F ILTER CAUTION!

8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine
REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving oil.
NOTE: surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate 9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
 Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu- container. and install into housing.
facturer's filtration and water separating  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a NOTE:
requirements can severely impact fuel system new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach
life and reliability. could be introduced into the fuel filter during this step in order to keep cartridge clean.
 The engine mounted filter housing is equipped this action. It is best to install the filter dry and 10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter
will not run if: system. housing with fuel.
 No filter is installed. 11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft lb
 Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of
1. Ensure engine is turned off. (30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten the lid.
OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle will 2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose. 12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and
run. 3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn confirm there are no leaks Ú page 408.
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container. UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
4. Close the water drain valve. REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. NOTE: 8
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
 Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
used o-ring and discard it.
facturer's filtration and water separating
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the requirements can severely impact fuel system
housing and dispose of according to your local life and reliability.
regulations.
 The underbody mounted filter housing will
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and cause the engine not to run if:
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly housing.
 No filter is installed.
1 — Drain Valve
1. Ensure engine is turned off. PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose. OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel WARNING!
and water into the approved container.
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
4. Close the water drain valve. the engine running. Engine operation causes
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove cause serious injury or death.
used o-ring and discard it.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly 6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the 1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
1 — Drain Valve housing and dispose of according to your local approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
regulations.
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and ignition to the RUN position and wait approxi-
CAUTION! housing. mately 30 seconds. This will activate the in
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the tank fuel pump. Turn the ignition switch to the
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine off position, and leave off for at least 30
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
oil. seconds. Repeat this procedure three times
container.
before cranking the engine.
 Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a NOTE: 3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service kit procedure Ú page 134.
could be introduced into the fuel filter during comes with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and 4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle
sensor.
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel for a minimum of 30 seconds.
system.
 Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
CAUTION! negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa- on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two
Do not engage the starter motor for more than rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres- hours, the system will automatically enter an
15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes sure fuel system corrosion or damage. emissions operating mode that will increase the
between the cranking intervals.  Ethanol blends are not recommended or engine idle speed to 900 RPM. While in this mode,
approved for use with your Cummins® diesel which is designed to help maintain the Diesel
engine. Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
NOTE:
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small
The engine may run rough until the air is forced  In addition, commercially available fuel addi- change in engine tone or a slight change in engine
from all the fuel lines. tives are not necessary for the proper operation performance while accelerating may also be
of your Cummins® diesel engine. noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
I NTERVENTION R EGENERATION This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
agent. They can be unstable under certain STRATEGY — M ESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when The Cummins® diesel engine meets all to additional maintenance required on your truck
mixed with diesel fuel. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty or engine Ú page 109.
Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in
one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever WARNING!
CAUTION! produced.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, To achieve these emissions standards, your over materials that can burn. Such materials
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine might be grass or leaves coming into contact 8
fuel system. and exhaust system. The engine and exhaust with your exhaust system. Do not park or
after-treatment system work together to achieve operate your vehicle in areas where your
NOTE: the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions exhaust system can contact anything that can
Standards. These systems are seamlessly burn.
 A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The
your Cummins® diesel engine.
PCM manages engine combustion to allow the
 A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
your Cummins® diesel engine. interaction on your part.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) services, the hood latch, release mechanism and NOTE:
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
DEF sometimes known simply by the name of its on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
active component, UREA—is a key component of performance of blades may be present with chat-
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission these conditions are present, clean the wiper
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that blades or replace as necessary.
into the lock cylinder.
reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
catalyst to convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES inspected periodically, not just when wiper
(NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the performance problems are experienced. This
Ú page 468.
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth inspection should include the following points:
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove  Wear or uneven edges
contacting an authorized dealer.
accumulations of salt or road film.  Foreign material
BODY L UBRICATION Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long  Hardening or cracking
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
Locks and all body pivot points, including such  Deformation or fatigue
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
contact with petroleum products such as engine damaged.
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the oil, gasoline, etc.
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off

of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position. Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
Wiper Locking Assembly 2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base
of the wiper arm.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from
the arm and with one finger, push the release
tab toward the wiper arm. 8
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the Installing The Front Wipers If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper arm is in the full up position. inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the 2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the technician inspect the complete exhaust system
base of the wiper arm and away from the J tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
hook in the end of the wiper arm). open. deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm to seep into the passenger compartment. In
through the opening in the wiper blade under addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
the locking tab. time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the change. Replace as required.
wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click). Fold WARNING!
down the latch release tab and snap it into its  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
locked position. Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
EXHAUST SYSTEM Ú page 360.
1 — Wiper  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
2 — Locking Tab into the vehicle body is a properly maintained park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook engine exhaust system. rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
NOTE: COOLING SYSTEM
Intentional tampering with emissions control
 The catalytic converter requires the use of systems can result in civil penalties being WARNING!
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will assessed against you.
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an In unusual situations involving grossly  You or others can be badly burned by hot
emissions control device and may seriously malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
reduce engine performance and cause may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
serious damage to the engine. overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off under the hood, do not open the hood until the
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately. ator or coolant bottle is hot.
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
apparent loss of performance, have your damage: from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera- raised. The fan starts automatically and may
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction start at any time, whether the engine is
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
could cause the converter to overheat, running or not.
resulting in possible damage to the converter  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
and vehicle. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo- tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
nents disconnected or removed, such as when controlled and can start at any time the igni-
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods tion is in the ON mode. 8
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ating conditions.
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
Engine Coolant Checks If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or  This vehicle has not been designed for use with
contains visible sediment, have an authorized propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to recommended.
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
MS.90032).  Some vehicles require special tools to add
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384. coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
Check the front of the A/C condenser or radiator properly could lead to severe internal engine
Selection Of Coolant
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose For further information Ú page 468. the system please contact an authorized dealer.
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser or NOTE: Adding Coolant
the back of the radiator core.  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the engine coolant, may result in engine damage MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. engine coolant is different and should not be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is important that you use the same engine coolant
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill introduced into the cooling system in an emer- (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
NOTE: gency, the cooling system will need to be the life of your vehicle.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any rized dealer as soon as possible.
coolant is needed to be added to the system  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
please contact an authorized dealer. coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
Please review these recommendations for using  Some vehicles require special tools to add
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems WARNING!
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer properly could lead to severe internal engine  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine coolant: the system, please contact a local authorized engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
 We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ dealer. remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- Heat causes pressure to build up in the
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the mended and can result in cooling system cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in do not remove the pressure cap while the
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, system is hot or under pressure.
 Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 MS.90032) as soon as possible. specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations Cooling System Pressure Cap engine damage may result.
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that Disposal Of Used Coolant
an authorized dealer for assistance.
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
deionized water when mixing the water/engine equipped. Check with your local authorities to determine the
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there disposal rules for your community. To prevent
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
is any accumulation of foreign material on the ingestion by animals or children, do not store 8
sealing surfaces. ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
NOTE: or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
proper level of protection against freezing assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
according to the temperatures occurring in the immediately.
area where the vehicle is operated.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. CHARGE A IR C OOLER — I NTER-C OOLER
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
range on the bottle when the engine is cold. coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
The radiator normally remains completely full, so passes through the turbocharger, where it is
against freezing.
there is no need to remove the cap unless pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing  If frequent engine coolant additions are high temperature. The air is then directed through
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service required, the cooling system should be pressure a hose to the charge air cooler and through
attendant of this. As long as the engine operating tested for leaks. another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a The air entering the engine has been cooled by
need only be checked once a month. When minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to about 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling
additional engine coolant is needed to maintain MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro- process enables more efficient burning of fuel
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant sion protection of your engine which contains resulting in fewer emissions.
bottle. Do not overfill. aluminum components. To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
Cooling System Notes  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
NOTE:
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
meters of operation, you may observe vapor vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
coming from the front of the engine compartment. the front of the condenser clean.
performance.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
enter the radiator. engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
If an examination of your engine compartment and increased emissions.
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING! WARNING!

In order to ensure brake system performance, all  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
brake system components should be inspected fluid Ú page 471. Using the wrong type of inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
periodically Ú page 384. brake fluid can severely damage your brake could be damaged, causing partial or
system and/or impair its performance. The complete brake failure. This could result in a
WARNING! proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is collision.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and also identified on the original factory installed
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that Special Additives
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You has been in a tightly closed container. Keep The manufacturer strongly recommends against
would not have your full braking capacity in an the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at using any special additives in the transmission.
emergency. all times. Brake fluid in an open container Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a engineered product and its performance may be
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This only exception to this policy is the use of special
checked when performing under the hood service
could result in a collision. dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 6-speed
or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, they may adversely affect seals. 8
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
CAUTION!
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap. surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its Do not use chemical flushes in your
contact with these surfaces. transmission as the chemicals can damage your
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to
(Continued) transmission components. Such damage is not
fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a system check should be conducted.
For further information Ú page 471.
Fluid Level Check — 8-Speed Transmission Use the following procedure to check the reference holes on the dipstick at normal
transmission fluid level properly: operating temperature. If the fluid level is low,
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to
require adjustment under normal operating
the instrument cluster display, and operate the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
the vehicle as required to reach the normal specified fluid Ú page 471. After adding any
required, therefore the transmission has no
operating temperature. If the transmission is quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below drain into the transmission before rechecking
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission the fluid level.
about checking the fluid level at colder
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
temperatures. NOTE:
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper 2. Park the vehicle on level ground. If it is necessary to check the transmission below
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. the operating temperature, the fluid level should
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
CAUTION! dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only
running for the rest of this procedure.
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an 4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
authorized dealer immediately. Severe brake pedal. mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
transmission damage may occur. An authorized 5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid gear position (allowing time for the mission reaches normal operating temperature.
level accurately. transmission to fully engage in each position),
ending with the transmission in PARK. CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check — 6-Speed Transmission 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
It is best to check the fluid level when the it until seated. may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
transmission is at normal operating temperature until the temperature is elevated enough to
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
(158-176°F / 70-80°C). This normally occurs produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
level on both sides. The fluid level reading is
after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on
operating temperature the fluid cannot be held both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes
comfortably between the fingertips. You can read in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual
the transmission sump temperature in the level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
instrument cluster screen Ú page 109. should be between the “HOT” (upper)
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release Fluid And Filter Changes — 6-Speed REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
the parking brake. Transmission AXLE FLUID L EVEL
NOTE: For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
If it is necessary to check the transmission below In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
the operating temperature, the fluid level should becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the transmission is disassembled for any reason. should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F / 20-30°C. Only suspected inspect the fluid level Ú page 471. This
Selection Of Lubricant
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough inspection should be made with the vehicle in a
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans- It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
level position.
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a level
level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
transmission fluid Ú page 471. It is important to surface. Take a piece of wire (or zip tie) and make
mission reaches normal operating temperature.
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level a 90 degree bend two inches from the end of the
CAUTION! using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes wire. Insert the wire into the fill plug hole and use it
should be used in any transmission; only the like a dipstick. Remove the wire and measure from
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it the 90 degree bend to the oil level.
approved lubricant should be used.
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the fluid
until the temperature is elevated enough to CAUTION! level should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm ±
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
Using a transmission fluid other than the 6.4 mm) below the fill hole for the rear axle and it
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm)
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or below the fill hole on the front axle. 8
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed torque converter shudder, and (for six-speed For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model
Transmission transmissions) will require more frequent fluid axles, the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid and filter changes Ú page 471. (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory 9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle, and 12.0 in rear
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. axle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Drain And Refill Drain And Refill Required Maintenance For Noise Control
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384. Systems
Lubricant Selection Selection Of Lubricant The following maintenance services must be
performed every six months or 7,500 miles
For further information Ú page 471. Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure
NOTE: Ú page 471.
proper operation of the noise control systems. In
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will NOISE CONTROL S YSTEM REQUIRED addition, inspection and service should be
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ- performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in MAINTENANCE & WARRANTY suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
types of service, will require draining and refilling Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale control systems.
the axle to avoid damage. and use in the United States are required to Exhaust System
Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited slip comply with the Federal Government's Exterior
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and
oil additive (friction modifiers). Noise Regulations. These vehicles can be
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps,
NOTE: identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
and U-bolts should be tight and in good condition.
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident located in the operator's compartment.
Damaged components, burned or blown out
while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential mufflers, burned or rusted out exhaust pipes
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be replaced according to the procedures
should be considered normal operation of the and specifications outlined in the appropriate
limited slip differential. service manual.
TRANSFER C ASE Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly
Fluid Level Check and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is properly
This fluid level can be checked by removing the positioned and that the cover is tight. Check all
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness. The
edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level air filter element must also be clean and serviced
position. according to the instructions outlined in the
Scheduled Maintenance section of this manual.
Tampering With Noise Control System AIR CLEANER Noise Emission Warranty
Prohibited  Removal of the air cleaner. The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the  Removal of the air cleaner filter element from manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed,
causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering the air cleaner housing. built and equipped to conform at the time it left the
inoperative by any person, other than for purposes manufacturer's control with all applicable US EPA
 Removal of the air ducting.
of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any Noise Control Regulations.
device or element of design incorporated into any EXHAUST SYSTEM
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built
new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to  Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust and equipped by the manufacturer, and is not
its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or system components including the muffler or tail- limited to any particular part, component or system
while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after pipe. of the vehicle manufactured by the manufacturer.
such device or element of design has been ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Defects in design, assembly or in any part,
removed or rendered inoperative by any person. component or system of the vehicle as
 Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
Among those acts presumed to constitute manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at the
 Removal of the fan shroud. time it left the manufacturer's control, caused
tampering are the acts listed below.
noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are
covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
8
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)

Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was
performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000

KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
FUSES WARNING!
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
General Information  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an When a device does not work, you must check the
authorized dealer. fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
WARNING!
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems melt.
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an (air bag system, braking system), power unit Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
appropriate replacement fuse with the same systems (engine system, transmission extended periods of time with the engine off may
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace system) or steering system blows, contact an result in vehicle battery discharge.
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. authorized dealer.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse CAUTION!
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a If it is necessary to wash the engine
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate- compartment, take care not to directly hit the
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use water.
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services 8
are switched off and/or disengaged.
(Continued)
Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center If it is necessary to wash the engine
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and compartment, take care not to directly hit the
circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
component may be stamped on the inside cover, water.
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Blade Fuses CAUTION!

1 — Fuse Element When installing the power distribution center
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
element properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse do so may allow water to get into the power
element (blown fuse) distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
Power Distribution Center Location

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Mtr
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI/Lo *
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp
F06 40 Amp Green – STOM
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor *
F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel / Fuel Heater *
F09 30 Amp Pink – Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake SYS MOD ECU& Valves
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blwr Mtr
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *

* If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F22 20 Amp Blue – Gas - ECM *
F22 25 Amp White – Diesel - PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 — – Spare
F27 — – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B/U
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR TOW PARK
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow
F31 – – Spare
8
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Mod *
F34 30 Amp Pink – VSIM #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel HTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – ITBM *

* If Equipped
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Vented Seats *
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter / Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Strng Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coils *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod *
F51 – 10 Amp Red IGN Mod / KIN Mod/ RF Hub
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow – Lt Turn/Stop
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non-Memory Adjustable Pedals *
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocking Valve (VBV) *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Trans PRSR SW
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting

* If Equipped
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors
F65 – – Spare
Sunroof / USB Rear * / Inside Rearview Mirror / Passenger
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Window SW
UCI Port / USB Front / Trailer Gateway Module (360 Camera) /
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Tachograph
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Mod 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Mtr/ Fuel Htr RLY 8
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amp / Act Noise Cnsl

* If Equipped
F72 – – Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm
F75 – 10 Amp Red SCR RLY / ATMM*
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC) *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / TCM / FAD MOD / STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue ECM / PCM / IRCM / AUX PDC Relay Coil Feed / HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lt
F80 – 10 Amp Red Ovrdh Con / Assist / 911
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr tow Rt turn/Stop
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Heated Seats SW
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp / ITBM / SCCM / Module Gateway Trailer

* If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Batt
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – 10 Amp Red MOD Invertor (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM*
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW / TRL TPM
R CAM / PRKTRNX/ CHMSL Cam / Bld SPT SNR /
F95 – 10 Amp Red
SVUE CAM *
F96 – 10 Amp Red TRL Cam *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST PSGR *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST DRIVER *
HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD / Module
F99 – 10 Amp Red
Gateway Trailer / Tachograph 8
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter Box Feed *
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Right *
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Left / Run RLY #3 *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
Please see an authorized dealer for LED replacement
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Tail/Backup Lamp W21/5W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Turn/Tail Lamp PWY24W
Rear License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
8
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel 6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
house splash shield and disengage the bulb turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH access cover by rotating counterclockwise. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN —
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
IF EQUIPPED bulb and covers.
Low Beam
High Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
cover over the access hole in the front of the Bulb Access Cover
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
of the lamp can be gained through this access 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
hole. connector from the low beam bulb.
CAUTION!
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result. Bulb Access Cover
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
Splash Shield Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the Outer Front Park And Turn
headlamp to find the high beam bulb access See below steps to replace:
cover.
1. Open the hood.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb. 3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
CAUTION! cover over the access hole in the front of the
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching of the lamp can be gained through this access Park And Turn Sockets
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact hole.
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
result. housing.
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type twisting.
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. bulb and covers.
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED

6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp. Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED 8
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. and Halogen front fog lamps.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new Splash Shield Access Cover
bulb and covers. 4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the side
marker socket by rotating counterclockwise a
quarter turn.
Halogen REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP

See below steps to replace: LAMPS
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/ See below steps to replace:
bumper to access the back of the front fog 1. Remove the two screws and push pins that
lamp housing. pass through the bed sheet metal.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Tail Lamp Locations
1 — Tail Lamp CAUTION!
2 — Screws Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
3 — Fasteners with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
Fog Lamp Bulb
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the 6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
CAUTION! outboard side of the lamp housing from the housing.
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it side panel.
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL) CAB TOP CLEARANCE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
WITH CARGO LAMP See below steps to replace:
See below steps to replace: 1. Remove the screws from the top of the lamp.
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/
lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other Screw Location From Clearance Lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
it from the lamp assembly.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing  Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
and wiring harness to the body.  Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn Lamp 8
and remove the socket and bulb from housing. 5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket. and housing.
SIDE MARKER LAMPS (DUAL REAR WHEELS) —

IF EQUIPPED
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp Screw Locations

3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and 2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
replace. clockwise to access the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
REAR LAMP BAR ID MARKER (DUAL REAR Side Marker Lamp Locations
WHEELS) — IF EQUIPPED 4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing. 1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp
See below steps to replace: assembly.
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to 2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
gain access to the bulb sockets. 3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from assembly to
access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
TIRES Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
(TIN) the sidewall preceding the size designation.
2 — Size Designation Example: LT235/85R16.
3 — Service Description  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
4 — Maximum Load
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or 8
5 — Maximum Pressure “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
ture Grades  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
8
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
EXAMPLE:
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 8
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing Ú page 226.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the NOTE:
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading The following table shows examples on how to
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo configurations and number and size of occu-
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
Steps For Determining Correct Load (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) and may not be accurate for the seating and
Limit— load carry capacity of your vehicle.
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the  For the following example, the combined weight
(1) Locate the statement “The combined of occupants and cargo should never exceed
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely
865 lbs (392 kg).
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your exceed the available cargo and luggage
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, WARNING!
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
determine how this reduces the handling, and increase your stopping distance.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
available cargo and luggage load
driver and passengers from XXX kg or your vehicle. Never overload them.
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to uncomfortable ride.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. drift to the right or left.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
Tire Inflation Pressures
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
pressure: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
recommended cold tire inflation pressure. the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
 Safety
side door.
 Fuel Economy Both underinflation and overinflation affect the At least once a month:
 Tread Wear stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
steering.
Safety make a visual judgement when determining
NOTE: proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
WARNING!  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may even when they are underinflated.
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
response.
can cause collisions. damage.
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause the vehicle to drift left or right. CAUTION!
result in overheating and tire failure.
Fuel Economy After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, 8
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
can cause damage that result in tire failure. valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tread Wear
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where WARNING!
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased handle poorly. The instability could cause a
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to four. Never combine them with other types of
sidewall.
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment tires.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire Repair
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING! If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. it meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added strain  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could  The damage is only on the tread section of your
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). (6 mm).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
condition. and additional information.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
will be too low. size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
WARNING! tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
generated by excessive wheel speeds may When the tread is worn to the tread wear
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could indicators, the tire should be replaced.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is explode and injure someone. Do not spin your Life Of Tire
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving factors including, but not limited to:
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.  Driving style.
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
not designed to be reused when driven under Run develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
tires to help you in determining when your tires the need for earlier tire replacement.
NOTE: should be replaced.
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the  Distance driven.
vehicle on a flat tire condition.  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
Run Flat mode Ú page 315. the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended. 8
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, WARNING!
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
continuously without stopping. six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
For further information Ú page 380. Tire Tread sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
1 — Worn Tire have a collision resulting in serious injury or
2 — New Tire death.
NOTE: It is recommended you contact an authorized tire

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when dealer or original equipment dealer with any CAUTION!
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing questions you may have on tire specifications or Replacing original tires with tires of a different
tires. capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement size may result in false speedometer and
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and odometer readings.
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires ride of your vehicle.
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING! TIRE TYPES
Replacement Tires
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or All Season Tires — If Equipped
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of speed rating other than that specified for your
many characteristics. They should be inspected All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation tires and wheels may change suspension
pressures. The manufacturer strongly levels may vary between different all season tires.
dimensions and performance characteristics, All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
originals in size, quality and performance when M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre- season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
replacement is needed Ú page 447. Refer to the dictable handling and stress to steering and
Tire and Loading Information placard or the may adversely affect the safety and handling of
suspension components. You could lose your vehicle.
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation control and have a collision resulting in
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for serious injury or death. Use only the tire and Summer Or Three Season Tires —
your tire will be found on the original equipment wheel sizes with load ratings approved for If Equipped
tire sidewall. your vehicle. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
information relating to the Load Index and Speed snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Symbol of a tire Ú page 439. capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or smaller load index could result in tire over- designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can loading and failure. You could lose control and Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever have a collision. temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s are covered with ice or snow. For more
specifications match those of the original wheels.  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having information, contact an authorized dealer.
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Summer tires do not contain the all season authorized tire dealer for recommended safe If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; pressures. rotation pattern.
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and While studded tires improve performance on ice, Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
handling of your vehicle. skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
WARNING! use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. laws should be checked before using these tire
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in types.
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
vehicle control. letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
CAUTION!
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Snow Tires Because of the reduced ground clearance, do T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
Some areas of the country require the use of snow wash with a compact or limited use temporary Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire result. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
sidewall. opportunity.
If you need snow tires, select tires Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
equivalent in size and type to the original
designated for temporary emergency use conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, 8
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in since the wheel is designed specifically for the
Ú page 233.
sets of four; failure to do so may compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
adversely affect the safety and handling of your Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
vehicle. And Wheel — If Equipped given time.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
should not be operated at sustained speeds over original equipment tire and wheel found on the
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
WARNING! properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
Compact and collapsible spares are for collapsible tire using the electric air pump before at the first opportunity.
temporary emergency use only. With these lowering the vehicle.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited The limited use spare tire is for temporary
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
collapsible spare tire.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
WARNING!
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
vehicle control. Compact and Collapsible spares are for Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
temporary emergency use only. With these vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread at the first opportunity.
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the WARNING!
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Information Placard located on the driver’s side do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. vehicle control.
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
Collapsible spare tire description more than the speed listed on the limited use
example: 165/80-17 101P. Full Size Spare — If Equipped spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) Loading Information Placard located on the
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
opportunity. driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
result in loss of vehicle control.
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. CAUTION!
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
Wash wheels with the same soap solution wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
recommended for the body of the vehicle and or polishing compounds. They will permanently
aluminum or chrome wheels.
remember to always wash when the surfaces are damage this finish and such damage is not
not hot to the touch. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road products may damage the wheel's protective finish.
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is SNOW TRACTION D EVICES
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s recommended. Use of traction devices require sufficient
protective coating that helps keep them from
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: the following snow traction devices are
CAUTION! If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an recommended. Follow these recommendations to
extended period after cleaning the wheels with guard against damage: 8
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the  Snow traction device must be of proper size for
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or brakes to remove the water droplets from the the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel brake components. This activity will remove the device manufacturer.
cleaners and automatic car washes may red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
vibration when braking. with the snow traction device.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
 Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device (maximum

2500 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
LT245/70R17E
Tradesman
LT275/70R18E
Bighorn
LT275/70R18E
Laramie Rear U Class
LT285/60R20E
Longhorn
Limited LT285/60R20E
Power Wagon (4x4 Only) LT285/70R17D

3500 SRW 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
Laramie
Longhorn

3500 DRW 4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Laramie
Longhorn

3500 DRW 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Laramie
Longhorn
8
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe  Do not use traction devices on a compact
the following precautions: spare tire.
 Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the operate at different loads and perform different
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
indicate device breakage. Remove the reasons, they wear at unequal rates. Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
damaged parts of the device before further These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
use. tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
 Install device as tightly as possible and then matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
Autosock traction devices do not require across all four tires. The straight edge should touch
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
retightening. all the tires.
quiet ride.
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 384.
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
instructions on the method of installation, tires that must not be reversed.
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
Tire Rotation
30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
NOTE:
CAUTION!
TREADWEAR
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):  When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have The Treadwear grade is a comparative
 The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) to be remounted on the rim, or installed at a rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to different location, to maintain the correct when tested under controlled conditions
help identify them from the outer rear wheels, placement of the tire on the wheel relative to on a specified government test course.
because of this, the inner and outer wheel loca- the tire/wheel position on the truck. For For example, a tire graded 150 would
tions can’t be switched. example, if the spare is used to replace an
outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on
wear one and one-half times as well on
 After a tire rotation is completed, as shown the government course as a tire graded
the rim so that the wheel is dished inward.
below, the system can auto learn the locations
That way the tread design of asymmetrical 100. The relative performance of tires
of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization
occurs when the vehicle ignition status is
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will depends upon the actual conditions of
changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
maintain proper position. their use, however, and may depart
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain significantly from the norm due to
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute
period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
account slower speeds and stops. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES characteristics and climate.
 If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto The following tire grading categories
localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate TRACTION G RADES
were established by the National
correctly resulting in incorrect locations for the
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction grades, from highest to 8
pressure values displayed in the instrument
cluster. The specific grade rating assigned by the lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
tire's manufacturer in each category is represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
CAUTION! shown on the sidewall of the tires on pavement, as measured under
 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one your vehicle. controlled conditions on specified
approved direction of rotation. This is to All passenger vehicle tires must conform government test surfaces of asphalt and
accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread
to Federal safety requirements in concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire and the use of
addition to these grades. traction performance.
Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING! BODYWORK

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based The temperature grade for this tire is PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and established for a tire that is properly inflated and
does not include acceleration, cornering, not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, AGENTS
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. or excessive loading, either separately or in Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
combination, can cause heat build-up and geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
possible tire failure. make roads passable in snow and ice and those
TEMPERATURE G RADES that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
The Temperature grades are A (the STORING THE VEHICLE other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
resistance to the generation of heat and which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's weather and other extreme conditions will have an
under controlled conditions on a battery: adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
protection.
Sustained high temperature can cause  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
The following maintenance recommendations will
the material of the tire to degenerate enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
and reduce tire life, and excessive run the air conditioning system at idle for about
temperature can lead to sudden tire five minutes in the fresh air and high blower What Causes Corrosion?
failure. The grade C corresponds to a setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri- Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
level of performance, which all of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
damage when the system is started again.
passenger vehicle tires must meet The most common causes are:
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A  Stone and gravel impact.
represent higher levels of performance  Insects, tree sap and tar.
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
minimum required by law.
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK Fascia/Bumper Care

The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
Cleaning Headlights Washing
the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your away road debris and salt using an automotive
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or soap. Fascia/bumpers should be cleaned regularly
to stone breakage than glass headlights. a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and completely with water. their luster and to prevent corrosion.
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
be followed. accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or
solution followed by rinsing. protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
scratch the paint. protective coating that helps keep them from
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
corroding and tarnishing.
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
clean the lenses. buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
CAUTION!
the paint finish.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care —
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
If Equipped CAUTION! brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold products may damage the fascia/bumper’s
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate- 8
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Conditioner/Protectant. soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi recommended.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal (Continued)
of paint and decals.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use wheel. or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives, or  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as the truck bedliner.
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners and soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
automatic car washes may damage the fascia/ touch up paint to match the color of your WARNING!
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is not vehicle.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do not use silicon-based protection products to
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
equivalent is recommended. During ownership, the shine and luster of the become slippery and may result in personal
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road injury.
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Special Care Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading, Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you dulling, and loss of gloss over time. many different types of chemicals (including
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
at least once a month.
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be and clean your truck at least twice per year using permanent damage.
kept clear and open. the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the available at a local authorized dealer.
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
paint, touch them up immediately. To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below: loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon any loose dirt and debris. is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
as possible. or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, soft cloth or brush. vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
3. Rinse bedliner with water. or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
materials are well packaged and sealed.
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS  For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove WARNING!
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
residue. collision and leave you with no protection.
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery  Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
and carpeting. of protectants on Stain Repel products. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
WARNING! Seat Belt Maintenance Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
if used in closed areas they may cause fabric. retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
respiratory harm. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from Certified Collision Care Program facility for
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. inspection.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following buckles do not work properly.
manner: Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
NOTE:
 Remove as much of the stain as possible by If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
CAUTION!
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
 Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- 8
towel. lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
 For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and away immediately.
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.  Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

Lenses If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
The lenses in front of the instruments in this transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
the plastic. cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content CAUTION! antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean instruments that may scratch the elements.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
LEATHER S URFACES upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
result.
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
461
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining system
Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the will still function with some loss of overall braking should be torqued using a properly calibrated
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. effectiveness. This will be evident by increased torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force socket.
required to slow or stop, and activation of the
Brake Warning Light and/or the ABS Warning Light TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
during brake use.
Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/ **Lug
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST — Bolt
Lug Nut/
Nut/Bolt
Bolt
Bolt Type Socket
I F E QUIPPED Torque Size
Size
The brake system power assist is provided by a 130 Ft-Lb
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power Cone
(176 N·m) M14 x
steering system. You may experience some 22 mm
129 Ft-Lb 1.50
clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost Flanged
Vehicle Identification Number (175 N·m)
system during hard braking conditions.
NOTE: NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
higher than normal until the power steering fluid nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
BRAKE SYSTEM reaches operating temperature. before tightening. 9
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, NOTE:
repeated brake applications with the engine off), WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
the brakes will still function. However, you will lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts
experience a substantial increase in braking effort ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
to stop the vehicle. at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
vehicle. washer. Do not oil wheel studs.
462 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
the torques listed in the table. Go through the torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel
sequence a second time to verify that specific stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication
torque has been achieved. Retighten to interval.
specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to
the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being
nuts/bolts are properly tightened. sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming
elongated. This is especially important during the
first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All
Two-Piece Lug Nut wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the
wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to
recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to final torque in increments. Progress around the
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the
loose particles. wheel nut just previously tightened until final
torque is achieved.
8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns WARNING!

1 — 10 Bolt Pattern To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
2 — 8 Bolt Pattern jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 463
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
While operating on gasoline with the required Many areas of the country require the use of intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound cleaner burning gasoline referred to as active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
from the engine is not a cause for concern. “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane quality.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
number can cause engine failure and may void or The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. oxygenates such as ethanol.
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
Warranty. provide improved performance and durability of CAUTION!
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as engine and fuel system components.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
6.4L E NGINE corrosion and stability additives are
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater recommended. Using gasolines that have these Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
than 15% in this engine. additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce observe pump labels as they should clearly
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. communicate if a fuel contains greater than
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline 15% ethanol (E-15).
satisfactory fuel economy and contains a higher level of detergents to
performance when using high quality further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
Problems that result from using gasoline 9
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
gasoline containing methanol are not the
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL CAUTION!

VEHICLES MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with GASOLINE malfunctions can cause the catalytic
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void that is blended into some gasoline to increase burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with performance advantage beyond gasoline of the require immediate service. Contact an autho-
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these same octane number without MMT. Gasoline rized dealer for service assistance.
symptoms: blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
 Operate in a lean mode. reduces emissions system performance in some sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that mended. Most of these products contain high
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
 Poor engine performance. MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on damage or vehicle performance problems
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
 Increased risk for fuel system component
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California turer and may void or not be covered under
corrosion.
reformulated gasoline. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS
MODIFICATIONS NOTE:
CAUTION! Intentional tampering with the emissions control
Modifications that allow the engine to run on system can result in civil penalties being assessed
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane Follow these guidelines to maintain your against you.
(LP) may result in damage to the engine, vehicle’s performance:
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited engine performance and damage the emis-
Warranty. sions control system.
(Continued)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
NOTE:
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable accumulated water from the fuel/water separator on your diesel vehicle, do not start the vehicle. If
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that using the fuel/water separator drain provided on you restart your vehicle you risk damaging the
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel and engine and fuel system. Please call an autho-
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel rized dealer for service.
prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the  A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
emissions control system. diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
warm-up performance. your Cummins® diesel engine. (Models config-
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel Fuel ured with B20 Capability.)
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification CAUTION!  In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. If tives are not necessary for the proper operation
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F of your Cummins® diesel engine. However, if
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
or -7°C), or is required to operate at seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar®
Ú page 406.
periods, use Climatized Number 2 Diesel Fuel or Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.
1 Diesel Fuel. This will provide better protection FUEL S PECIFICATIONS  Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should
from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. only be used where extended arctic conditions
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
(0°F or -18°C) exist.
developed to take advantage of the high energy
WARNING!
content and generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low
agent. They can be unstable under certain Sulfur Climatized Diesel Fuels. Experience has Pickup Models 9
conditions and hazardous or explosive when shown that it also operates on Number 1 Ultra Low Your vehicle has been validated and approved for
mixed with diesel fuel. Sulfur Diesel Fuels or other fuels within the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20)
specification. provided that you comply with the requirements
outlined below. It is important that you understand
and comply with these requirements.
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements for Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 Within Six Months Of Manufacture Required Oil Change Interval
will result in premature engine wear. Such wear is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
resources typically derived from animal fat, properly, provides for protection against fuel change interval must be maintained to the
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base), oxidation for up to six months. following schedule:
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Ram PickUp 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 Miles
require that you understand and adhere to the Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter (24,000 km)*
following requirements if you use blends of Elements (*unless otherwise notified with a oil service
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than message.)
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel
20% (B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for
filter elements in both your engine mounted filter CAUTION!
the use of B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is
and frame mounted filter.
not approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can  Under no circumstances should oil change
result in engine damage. Such damage is not Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/ intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km) if
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. operation occurs with greater than 5%
Cummins® filtration system is designed to provide
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM adequate fuel water separation capabilities. biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should
Standards not exceed 6 months in either case. Failure to
Bio-Diesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient comply with these Oil Change requirements
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only
Temperatures for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the to B20 may result in premature engine wear.
following specifications may be blended to meet Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM Limited Warranty.
specification D-7467: storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as  B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer
 Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated severe damage if operated with concentra-
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives. tions of Biodiesel higher than 20%.
specification D-6751.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters 9
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 Gallons 21 Liters
US Metric
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Engine 22.0 Quarts 20.8 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
Engine Oil
MS-A0921. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but
must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 400.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 10W-30
engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil
category is required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be
used. The identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of
Engine Oil
the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 5W-40
synthetic engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that
meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4
engine oil category is required.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine
mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter). Using a
Fuel Filters
fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration and water
separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
9
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend using Mopar® CCV Filter.

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal
law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
Fuel Selection If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are
operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid
gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup models configured with optional
B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been
API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO
Diesel Exhaust Fluid 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive assistance in locating
DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In
Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Automatic equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner
Transfer Case
44-44 and 44-45. 9
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant.
Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not
Front and Rear Axle
pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar®
MS-10111 Limited Slip Additive.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
We recommend using Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF+4
Power Steering Reservoir
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may
Automatic Transmission – 68RFE affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend
Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.Failure to
Automatic Transmission – AS69RC use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in
9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5
Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual Rear Wheel) Rear axles.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not
pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111
Limited Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
473
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (866) 726-4636
dealer service manager first. If for some reason
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. If an
If you list a number of items and you must have Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
situation with the service advisor and list the items French
Assistance center.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
474 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs relay contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay please refer to the contract documents, and
Mexico, D. F.
Service operator. contact the person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
You may have purchased a service contract for a authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle ownership experience.
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed WARNING!
Phone: (866) 726-4636 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
only), some of its constituents, and certain
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
date. If you have any questions about the
(TDD/TTY) service contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Contract National Customer Hotline at
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu- 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
reproductive harm.
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired French).
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 475
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
See the Warranty Information for the terms and defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
injury or death, you should immediately D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
applicable to this vehicle and market.
inform the National Highway Traffic information about motor vehicle safety
Use this QR code to access your
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in from http://www.safercar.gov.
digital experience.
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
MOPAR® PARTS vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
and factory filled fluids are available from an cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
its original condition. Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP. 10
476 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om (US) or
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
To order the following manuals, you may use either www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
the website or the phone numbers listed below. licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Or
Service Manuals conditions suivantes:
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
 1-800-890-4038 (US) et
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations, Information Books can be ordered through brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. Archway at: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on The following regulatory statement applies to all
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
They show exactly how to find and correct cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle:
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
a complete list of all tools and equipment. pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic standard(s). Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
Procedure manuals, visit: two conditions: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). 1. This device may not cause harmful by the party responsible for compliance could void
Owner's Manuals interference, and the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with 2. This device must accept any interference
the assistance of service and engineering received, including interference that may
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US cause undesired operation.
LLC vehicles.
477
INDEX
A Air Cleaner, Engine Automatic Tailgate Release .............................84
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) .................... 401, 420 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............68
(Cruise Control) .................................... 191, 193 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 402 Automatic Transmission....................... 149, 419
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............414 Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 402, 403 Adding Fluid .............................................. 419
Adding Fuel .......................................... 222, 223 Air Conditioner System ................................. 402 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 419
Additives, Fuel ...............................................463 Air Conditioning................................................66 Fluid Change............................................. 419
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter ..............................69, 403 Fluid Level Check............................. 417, 418
Down ........................................................... 39 Air Conditioning System ...................................68 Fluid Type ........................................ 419, 471
Forward ....................................................... 39 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................68 Shifting ..................................................... 154
Rearward..................................................... 39 Air Filter ........................................................ 401 Special Additives ...................................... 417
Up................................................................ 39 Air Pressure Automatic Transmission Limp
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 44 Tires ......................................................... 445 Home Mode .................................................. 152
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................291 Alarm AutoPark ....................................................... 132
Air Bag Security Alarm ....................................28, 122 AUX Camera .................................................. 217
Air Bag Operation ......................................334 Alterations/Modifications Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 307
Air Bag Warning Light ................................332 Vehicle.........................................................13 Axle Fluid.....................................419, 420, 471
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 338, 383 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 414, 467 Axle Lubrication ................................... 419, 420
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................383 Disposal ................................................... 415
If Deployment Occurs ................................337 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 300 B
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................334 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 122 Back-Up......................................................... 210
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............338 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 306 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 210
Maintenance .............................................338 Audio Settings ............................................... 279 Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ......................... 171
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............332 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 246 Battery ................................................. 120, 399
Transporting Pets ......................................358 Auto Down Power Windows .............................80 Blanket ..................................................... 141
Air Bag Light ............................... 119, 332, 358 Automatic Door Locks ......................................33 Charging System Light .............................. 120 11
Automatic Headlights.......................................56 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................21
478
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 59 Caps, Filler Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 463
Belts, Seat .....................................................358 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 395 Cleaning
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................307 Power Steering ......................................... 190 Wheels ...................................................... 451
Bluetooth Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 415 Climate Control ................................................62
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Car Washes................................................... 457 Automatic ....................................................62
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....287 Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 360 Manual ........................................................66
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11 Cargo Light.......................................................58 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 134
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................410 CD ................................................................. 281 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 449
B-Pillar Location.............................................443 Cellular Phone .............................................. 293 Contract, Service ........................................... 474
Brake Assist System ......................................301 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 437 Controls ........................................................ 273
Brake Control System ....................................301 Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................70 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 415
Brake Fluid .......................................... 417, 471 Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 416 Cooling System ............................................. 413
Brake System ...................................... 417, 461 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 440 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 414
Fluid Check ...............................................417 Check Engine Light Coolant Level ................................... 414, 416
Master Cylinder .........................................417 (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 130 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 467
Parking ......................................................146 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 358 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 415
Warning Light ............................................120 Checks, Safety .............................................. 358 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 414
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................149 Child Restraint .............................................. 340 Inspection ................................................. 416
Bulb Replacement .........................................432 Child Restraints Points To Remember ................................ 416
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 360, 432 Booster Seats ........................................... 343 Pressure Cap ............................................ 415
Child Seat Installation ..................... 351, 353 Radiator Cap............................................. 415
C How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 350 Selection Of Coolant
Cab Top Clearance Lights ..............................437 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 342 (Antifreeze) .........................414, 467, 468
Camera ..........................................................210 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 348 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 456
Camera, AUX ..................................................217 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 191, 193
Camera, Rear ...................................... 210, 212 Children................................................ 345 Cruise Light .......................................... 127, 128
Camera, Trailer Surround ..............................217 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 343 Customer Assistance .................................... 473
Capacities, Fluid ............................................467 Seating Positions ...................................... 344 Cybersecurity ................................................ 246
479
D Driving Compartment Identification ...................... 395

Daytime Running Lights ................................... 55 Off-Pavement............................................ 172 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 468
Dealer Service ...............................................399 Off-Road ................................................... 172 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 360
Defroster, Rear Window................................... 66 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Fails To Start............................................. 133
Defroster, Windshield .............................66, 358 Standing Water .................................... 244 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 133
Deleting A Phone ...........................................287 Dual Rear Wheels ................................ 454, 461 Fuel Requirements .......................... 463, 467
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................129 Identification.................................... 396, 397
Diesel Exhaust Brake ....................................147 E Idling ......................................................... 141
Diesel Fuel .....................................................465 Electric Brake Control System....................... 301 Jump Starting ........................................... 375
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................465 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 300 Oil ...........................................400, 467, 468
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................408 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 301, 307 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 395
Differential, Limited Slip ................................181 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................76 Oil Filter .................................................... 400
Dipsticks Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............. 153, 157 Oil Reset ................................................... 111
Power Steering ..........................................190 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 302 Oil Selection..................................... 400, 467
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................381 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 121 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 400
Disc Drive ......................................................281 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 160, 163 Overheating .............................................. 379
Disconnecting ................................................287 Emergency Braking ....................................... 146 Runaway ................................................... 221
Disposal Emergency, In Case Of Starting ..................................................... 131
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................415 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 380 Enhanced Accident Response
Disturb ...........................................................290 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 361 Feature ................................................ 338, 383
Door Ajar........................................................120 Jump Starting ........................................... 375 Entry System, Illuminated ................................60
Door Ajar Light ...............................................120 Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 130 Ethanol.......................................................... 463
Door Locks Engine.........................................395, 396, 397 Exhaust Brake ............................................... 147
Automatic .................................................... 33 Air Cleaner ................................................ 401 Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 360
Doors ............................................................... 29 Block Heater .................................... 137, 144 Exhaust System ..........................360, 412, 420
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............406 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 145 Exterior Lighting ...............................................54
Driver Memory Presets ..................................279 Compartment .................................. 396, 397 Exterior Lights ........................................ 54, 360
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 37 11
480
F Ethanol ..................................................... 463 H

Filters Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 223 Hazard
Air Cleaner.................................................401 Filter ......................................................... 406 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Air Conditioning ..................................69, 403 Gasoline ................................................... 463 Shallow Standing Water ....................... 244
Engine Fuel ...............................................406 Light ......................................................... 123 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 361
Engine Oil ........................................ 400, 468 Materials Added ....................................... 463 Head Restraints ...............................................42
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................400 Methanol .................................................. 463 Head Rests ......................................................42
Flashers Octane Rating.................................. 463, 468 Headlights ..................................................... 434
Turn Signals ..............................57, 128, 360 Requirements ......................... 463, 465, 467 Automatic High Beam ..................................55
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 56 Specifications ........................................... 465 Cleaning.................................................... 457
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................................372 Tank Capacity ........................................... 467 High Beam ...................................................55
Fluid Capacities .............................................467 Fueling .......................................................... 223 Lights On Reminder .....................................57
Fluid Leaks ....................................................360 Fuses ............................................................ 423 Passing ........................................................56
Fluid Level Checks Switch ..........................................................54
Brake ........................................................417 G Heated Mirrors .................................................50
Power Steering ..........................................190 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................50 Heated Seats ...................................................41
Fluid, Brake ...................................................471 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 223 Heater, Engine Block..................................... 144
Fog Lights ...............................................57, 435 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 463 Hill Descent Control ...................................... 304
Fold Flat Load Floor ......................................... 74 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 463 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 304
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 37 Gauges Hill Start Assist .............................................. 306
Forward Collision Warning .............................313 Voltage ..................................................... 139 Hitches
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................160 Gear Ranges ................................................. 154 Trailer Towing ........................................... 231
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................361 Gear Selector Override ................................. 377 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................50
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................380 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 460 Hood Prop ........................................................83
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................419 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 228 Hood Release...................................................83
Fuel ..................................................... 463, 465 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 227 Hub Caps ...................................................... 374
Adding ............................................. 222, 223 Guide
Additives ...................................................463 Body Builders ..............................................11
Clean Air ....................................................463 GVWR............................................................ 226
Diesel ........................................................465
481
I K Cab Top Clearance ................................... 437

Idle-Up Feature ..............................................142 Key Fob Cargo ................................................. 58, 126
Ignition ............................................................ 23 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............22 Center Mounted Stop ............................... 437
Switch ......................................................... 23 Key Fob Battery Service Courtesy/Reading ........................................59
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 60 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................21 Cruise .............................................. 127, 128
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................45, 362 Key Fob Programming Daytime Running .........................................55
Instrument Cluster .............105, 106, 108, 109 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................22 ECO ........................................................... 128
Display ......................................................109 Keyless Enter-N-Go ....................... 30, 131, 135 Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Display Controls ........................................110 Passive Entry ...............................................30 Indicator ............................................... 121
Engine Oil Reset ........................................111 Keys .................................................................19 Exterior .............................................. 54, 360
Instrument Cluster Display Fog................................................... 128, 435
Driver Assist ..............................................112 L Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 168
Fuel Economy ............................................112 Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................57 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 361
Speedometer ............................................111 Lane Change Assist .........................................57 Headlights ............................................54, 56
Trip ............................................................113 LaneSense .................................................... 207 High Beam ...................................................55
Vehicle Info ...............................................112 Latches ......................................................... 360 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 304
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................460 Hood ............................................................83 Illuminated Entry .........................................60
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ....................234 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 463 Interior .........................................................59
Interior Appearance Care...............................459 Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 360 LaneSense..............................123, 124, 128
Interior Lights .................................................. 59 Life Of Tires................................................... 447 Lights On Reminder .....................................57
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 115, 409 Light Bulbs ........................................... 360, 432 Low Fuel ................................................... 123
Inverter Outlet (115V) ...................................... 77 Lights ............................................................ 360 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 123
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 75 Air Bag .................................... 119, 332, 358 NEUTRAL .................................................. 126
Automatic High Beam ..................................55 Park .......................................................... 128
J Brake Assist Warning ............................... 304 Passing ........................................................56
Jack Location .................................................365 Brake Warning .......................................... 120 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 121
Jump Starting ................................................375 Bulb Replacement .................................... 432
11
482
Security Alarm ...........................................122 M N

Service ......................................................432 Maintenance ....................................................83 Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) .............. 210
Side Marker...............................................438 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 399 New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 145
Snowplow ..................................................127 Maintenance Plan......................................... 390 Noise Control
Traction Control .........................................304 Maintenance Schedule ............... 384, 388, 390 Maintenance ............................................ 420
Trailer Hitch ................................................. 58 Malfunction Indicator Light Tampering Prohibited ............................... 421
Transfer Case ............................................168 (Check Engine) ..................................... 123, 130 Noise Emission Warranty ..................... 420, 421
Turn Signals ........... 57, 128, 360, 434, 436 Manual
Warning Instrument Cluster Park Release ............................................ 378 O
Descriptions ..........................................121 Service ..................................................... 476 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 323
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 181, 420 Media Hub .......................................................75 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...................... 463
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................118 Media Mode.................................................. 281 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) .......... 172, 245
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................118 Memory Seat ...................................................36 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) .......... 172, 245
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............118 Memory Settings ..............................................36 Oil Change Indicator ...................................... 389
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............118 Methanol ...................................................... 463 Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 400
Loading Vehicle .............................................226 Mirrors .............................................................45 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 400
Tires ..........................................................443 Electric Powered ..........................................48 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 121
Locks Heated.........................................................50 Oil Reset ....................................................... 111
Automatic Door ........................................... 33 Memory .......................................................36 Oil, Engine ............................................ 400, 468
Child Protection ........................................... 33 Outside ........................................................47 Capacity .................................................... 467
Power Door.................................................. 30 Rearview.............................................45, 362 Dipstick..................................................... 398
Low Tire Pressure System .............................315 Trailer Towing ..............................................49 Disposal .................................................... 400
Lubrication, Body ...........................................410 Mirrors, Digital .................................................46 Filter ................................................ 400, 468
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................461 Modifications/Alterations Filter Disposal ........................................... 400
Vehicle.........................................................13 Identification Logo .................................... 400
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 315 Materials Added To................................... 400
Mopar Parts .................................................. 475 Pressure Warning Light............................. 121
MP3 Control .....................................................75
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................55
483
Recommendation ............................ 400, 467 Power R

Synthetic ...................................................400 Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................... 424 Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 446
Viscosity ....................................................467 Door Locks ..................................................30 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...414, 415
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................129 Mirrors .........................................................48 Radio
Operating Precautions ...................................129 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ......... 76, 77 Presets ..................................................... 279
Operator Manual Seats ...........................................................39 Settings .................................................... 247
Owner's Manual ........................................476 Side Steps ...................................................30 Radio Controls .............................................. 273
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 47 Sliding Rear Window....................................81 Radio Mode................................................... 273
Overdrive .......................................................158 Steering ..............................................48, 190 Radio Operation ................................... 273, 293
Overdrive OFF Switch .....................................158 Sunroof........................................................82 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 273
Overheating, Engine ......................................379 Windows ......................................................80 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................62
Power Seats Ramp Travel Index ........................................ 172
P Down ...........................................................39 Rear Axle (Differential) ......................... 419, 420
Paint Care ......................................................456 Forward .......................................................39 Rear Camera ................................................. 212
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Rearward .....................................................39 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................89
Mobile Phone b .........................................285 Recline ........................................................40 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 310
Parking Brake ................................................146 Tilt ...............................................................40 Rear ParkSense System................................ 201
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................201 Up ................................................................39 Rear Window, Sliding .......................................81
Passive Entry ................................................... 30 Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 471 Reclining Rear Seats ........................................39
Pedals, Adjustable ........................................... 44 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 329 Recreational Towing...................................... 240
Perform Service Indicator, Reset ...................389 Presets ......................................................... 279 Shifting Into Transfer Case
Pets ...............................................................358 Pretensioners Neutral (N)............................................ 242
Phone Mode ..................................................283 Seat Belts ................................................. 330 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Pickup Box ................................................ 87, 91 Profile Settings ............................................. 248 Neutral (N)............................................ 243
Pinch Protection .............................................. 83 Programmable Features ............................... 247 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 463
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........443 Refrigerant .................................................... 403
11
484
Release, Hood ................................................. 83 Satellite Radio .............................................. 275 Seats ..................................................37, 38, 39
Release, Tailgate ............................................. 84 Saved Radio Stations ................................... 279 Adjustment ...........................................37, 39
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................324 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 384 Easy Entry ....................................................40
Remote Keyless Entry Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 121 Folding Floor ................................................74
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 22 Seat Belts ............................................ 324, 358 Head Restraints ...........................................42
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........273 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 327 Memory .......................................................36
Remote Start (Diesel) ...................................... 27 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 327 Power...........................................................39
Remote Start (Gasoline) .................................. 24 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Rear Folding ................................................37
Remote Starting Anchorage ............................................ 327 Reclining Rear .............................................39
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 26 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 330 Tilting ...........................................................37
Replacement Bulbs .......................................432 Child Restraints ........................................ 340 Security Alarm ........................................ 28, 122
Replacement Tires.........................................448 Energy Management Feature ................... 330 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 468
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................475 Extender ................................................... 329 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................23
Resetting Perform Service Indicator ..............389 Front Seat........................................ 324, 326 Service Assistance ........................................ 473
Restraints, Child ............................................340 Inspection................................................. 358 Service Contract ............................................ 474
Restraints, Head .............................................. 42 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 326 Service Manuals ........................................... 476
Rotation, Tires ...............................................454 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 327 Settings, Audio .............................................. 279
Operating Instructions .............................. 326 Shift Lever Override ...................................... 377
S Pregnant Women ...................................... 329 Shifting .......................................................... 148
Safety ............................................................272 Pretensioners ........................................... 330 Automatic Transmission .................. 149, 154
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................358 Reminder.................................................. 324 Transfer Case ........................................... 167
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................360 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 329 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................475 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 330 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 242
Safety Features .............................................272 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 324 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Safety Information, Tire .................................439 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 327 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 243
Safety Tips .....................................................358 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 459 Side Steps, Power ............................................30
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................360 Signals, Turn ................................. 57, 128, 360
485
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................275 Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 134 Tilt
Favorites ...................................................278 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 131 Down ...........................................................40
Replay .......................................................277 Steering Up ................................................................40
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Power ....................................................... 190 Tilt Steering Column .........................................33
Browse in SXM ..........................................278 Tilt Column ..................................................33 Tip Start ............................................... 131, 135
Favorites ...................................................278 Wheel, Heated ...................................... 33, 34 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 443
Replay .......................................................277 Wheel, Tilt....................................................33 Tire Markings ................................................ 439
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................ 81 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 273 Tire Safety Information.................................. 439
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................451 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 273 Tires .................................. 360, 445, 449, 455
Snow Plow .....................................................238 Steps, Power Side ............................................30 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 447
Snow Tires .....................................................449 Storage ............................................................69 Air Pressure .............................................. 445
Spare Tires .......................................... 449, 450 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................70 Chains ...................................................... 451
Speed Control Storage, Vehicle ......................................68, 456 Compact Spare ......................................... 449
Accel/Decel ...............................................192 Store Radio Presets ...................................... 279 Dual ................................................. 454, 461
Cancel .......................................................192 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 456 General Information ........................ 445, 449
Resume .....................................................192 Sun Roof ................................................... 82, 83 High Speed ............................................... 446
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 191, 193 Sunglasses Storage .........................................72 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 445
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System...........................171 Sunshade Operation ........................................83 Life Of Tires .............................................. 447
Starting ................................................ 131, 134 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 307 Load Capacity ........................................... 443
Automatic Transmission .................. 131, 135 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 400 Pressure Monitoring System
Button ......................................................... 23 (TPMS) ......................................... 124, 315
Cold Weather ............................................134 T Quality Grading ......................................... 455
Engine Block Heater ..................................137 Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................84 Radial ....................................................... 446
Engine Fails To Start .................................133 Telescoping Steering Column ..........................33 Replacement ............................................ 448
Starting And Operating ..................................131 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............68 Rotation .................................................... 454
Starting Procedures ............................. 131, 134
11
486
Safety .............................................. 439, 445 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 231 Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Sizes..........................................................440 Trailer Weight................................................ 231 Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing..... 287
Snow Tires .................................................449 Transfer Case ............................................... 420 Help Command ......................................... 285
Spare Tires ...................................... 449, 450 Electronically Shifted ....................... 160, 163 Join Calls .................................................. 291
Spinning ....................................................447 Fluid ......................................................... 471 Making A Phone Or Audio Device
Trailer Towing ............................................233 Transmission ................................................ 149 A Favorite ............................................. 287
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................447 Automatic ............................... 149, 154, 417 Making A Second Call While Current
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................461 Fluid ......................................................... 471 Call Is In Progress ................................. 290
To Open Hood .................................................. 83 Maintenance ............................................ 417 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 288
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................232 Shifting ..................................................... 148 Natural Speech ......................................... 285
Tonneau Cover .......................................95, 457 Transporting Pets.......................................... 358 Operation .................................................. 284
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................457 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 447 Overview ................................................... 283
Torque Converter Clutch ................................159 Turn Signals ......................... 57, 128, 434, 436 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Tow Mode Mirror ............................................. 46 Mobile Phone ....................................... 285
Towing ................................................. 227, 381 U Phonebook Download ............................... 287
Disabled Vehicle........................................381 Uconnect Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 290
Guide.........................................................231 Phone Call Features ................................. 288 Power-Up .................................................. 293
Recreational ..............................................240 Things You Should Know About Recent Calls.............................................. 289
Weight .......................................................231 Your Uconnect Phone ........................... 291 Redial ....................................................... 291
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................240 Uconnect Phone ........................................... 285 To Remove A Favorite ............................... 288
Traction .........................................................244 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Toggling Between Calls ............................. 290
Traction Control .............................................307 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 290 Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 289
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................307 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Transfer Call To And From
Trailer Towing ................................................227 No Call Currently In Progress................ 289 Mobile Phone ....................................... 291
Hitches ......................................................231 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 293 Voice Command ....................................... 291
Minimum Requirements............................232 Call Continuation ...................................... 291 Uconnect Settings ......................................... 247
Mirrors......................................................... 49 Call Controls ............................................. 289 Customer Programmable Features ..............30
Tips ...........................................................237 Call Termination ....................................... 291 Passive Entry Programming .........................30
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................232 Cancel Command ..................................... 285 Uconnect System .......................................... 269
Wiring ........................................................236 Uconnect Voice Command ...............................34
487
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................455 W Window Fogging ...............................................69

Universal Garage Door Opener Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windows ..........................................................80
(Homelink®) — If Equipped b ...................... 50 Descriptions)................................................. 123 Power...........................................................80
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................463 Warranty Information .................................... 475 Rear Sliding .................................................81
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................327 Washers, Windshield .................................... 398 Reset Auto-Up ..............................................81
USB ................................................................. 75 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 457 Windshield Defroster .................................... 358
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ........................... 89 Water Windshield Washers .............................. 61, 398
Driving Through ........................................ 244 Fluid.......................................................... 398
V Water Separator Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 410
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............461 Diesel Fuel................................................ 406 Windshield Wipers ...........................................61
Vehicle Loading ................................... 226, 443 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 451 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 410
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................399 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 451 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................62
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 13 Wheel Covers ................................................ 374 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................79
Vehicle Settings .............................................247 Winch ............................................................ 181
Vehicle Storage ......................................68, 456 Accessories .............................................. 183
Ventilated Seats .............................................. 42 Operation ................................................. 183
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 34 Rigging Techniques .................................. 189
Voltmeter .......................................................139 Usage ....................................................... 181
Wind Buffeting .................................................81
11
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
2022 RAM 2500/3500
U.S. CANADA

2022 RAM 2500/3500
OWNER’S MANUAL

The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM 2500/3500

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 19 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................101 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 131 4

6 SAFETY ....................................................................................................................................... 300 6

PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 87 BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —

MULTIMEDIA SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Hood Open Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light LaneSense Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light

Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light

Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light

Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Cargo Light 4WD Low Indicator Light

4WD Lock Indicator Light Snowplow Mode Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Wait To Start Light Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

Water In Fuel Indicator Light ECO Mode Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

LaneSense Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light

Blue Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

SENTRY KEY If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! TO ARM THE SYSTEM NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — WARNING!

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING!